NC Manufacturing Infrastructure

NC Manufacturing Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1
NC Manufacturing Infrastructure
User's Guide
Version 5 Release 16
Special Notices
CATIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.
Protected by one or more U.S. Patents number 5,615,321; 5,774,111; 5,821,941; 5,844,566; 6,233,351;
6,292,190; 6,360,357; 6,396,522; 6,459,441; 6,499,040; 6,545,680; 6,573,896; 6,597,382; 6,654,011;
6,654,027; 6,717,597; 6,745,100; 6,762,778; 6,828,974 other patents pending.
DELMIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.
ENOVIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.
SMARTEAM® is a registered trademark of SmarTeam Corporation Ltd.
Any of the following terms may be used in this publication. These terms are trademarks of:
Java Sun Microsystems Computer Company
OLE, VBScript for Windows, Visual Basic Microsoft Corporation
IMSpost Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc.
All other company names and product names mentioned are the property of their respective owners.
Certain portions of this product contain elements subject to copyright owned by the following entities:
Copyright © Dassault Systemes
Copyright © Dassault Systemes of America
Copyright © D-Cubed Ltd., 1997-2000
Copyright © ITI 1997-2000
Copyright © Cenit 1997-2000
Copyright © Mental Images Gmbh & Co KG, Berlin/Germany 1986-2000
Copyright © Distrim2 Lda, 2000
Copyright © Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique (INRIA
Copyright © Compaq Computer Corporation
Copyright © Boeing Company
Copyright © IONA Technologies PLC
Copyright © Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc., 2000
Copyright © SmarTeam Corporation Ltd
Copyright © Xerox Engineering Systems
Copyright © Bitstream Inc.
Copyright © IBM Corp.
Copyright © Silicon Graphics Inc.
Copyright © Installshield Software Corp., 1990-2000
Copyright © Microsoft Corporation
Copyright © Spatial Corp.
Copyright © LightWork Design Limited 1995-2000
Copyright © Mainsoft Corp.
Copyright © NCCS 1997-2000
Copyright © Weber-Moewius, D-Siegen
Copyright © Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2001
Copyright © Cogito Inc.
Copyright © Tech Soft America
Copyright © LMS International 2000, 2001
Raster Imaging Technology copyrighted by Snowbound Software Corporation 1993-2001
CAM-POST ® Version 2001/14.0 © ICAM Technologies Corporation 1984-2001. All rights reserved
The 2D/2.5D Display analysis function, the MSC.Nastran interface and the ANSYS interface are based on LMS
International technologies and have been developed by LMS International
ImpactXoft, IX Functional Modeling, IX Development, IX, IX Design, IXSPeeD, IX Speed Connector, IX Advanced
Rendering, IX Interoperability Package, ImpactXoft Solver are trademarks of ImpactXoft. Copyright ©2001-
2002 ImpactXoft. All rights reserved.
This software contains portions of Lattice Technology, Inc. software. Copyright © 1997-2004 Lattice
Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright © 2005, Dassault Systèmes. All rights reserved.

NC Manufacturing Infrastructure
Overview
Conventions
What's New?
Getting Started
Manage Workbenches
Manage Documents
Set Up and Part Positioning
Design Changes
User Tasks
Part Operations and Manufacturing Programs
Part Operation
Machine Editor
Manufacturing Program
Process Table
Auto-Sequence Operations in a Program
Generate Transition Paths in a Program
Create a Process Template
Machining Processes
Create a Machining Process
Organize Machining Processes in Catalogs
Apply a Machining Process
Apply Machining Processes Automatically
Auxiliary Operations
Tool Change
Machine Rotation
Machining Axis Change
PP Instruction
COPY Operator
TRACUT Operator
Copy Transformation Instruction
Opposite Hand Machining
Machining Entities
Edit a Tool in an Operation
Edit a Tool in the Resource List
Edit a Tool Assembly in an Operation
Edit a Tool Assembly in the Resource List
Create a Tool Catalog from the Resource List
Replace Tools in the Resource List
Manage Tools in the Resource List and TDM
Use Tooling Resources from TDM
Specify Tool Compensation
Define the Tool Axis
Create and Use a Machining Pattern
Manufacturing View
Define Macros on a Milling Operation
Define Macros on an Axial Machining Operation
Define Macros on a Turning Operation
Build and Use a Macros Catalog
Status Management
User Parameters in PP Instructions
Verification and Simulation
Tool Path Replay
Photo Mode for Material Removal Simulation
Video Mode for Material Removal Simulation Using Tool Path Data
Video Mode for Material Removal Simulation Using NC Code
Check Machine Accessibility at Tool Axis Definition
Generic Machine Accessibility (CATProduct)
VNC Machine Accessibility (*.dev device)
Program Output
Interactive Generation of NC Output
Batch Generation of APT Source Code
Batch Generation of Clfile Code
Batch Generation of NC Code
Batch Generation of a CATProduct
MfgBatch Utility for Generating NC Data
Batch Queue Management
NC Documentation Generation
Import APT Source
Workbench Description
Menu Bar
Toolbars
Manufacturing Program Toolbars
Auxiliary Operations Toolbar
Transition Path Management Toolbar
NC Output Management Toolbar
Machining Features Toolbar
Auxiliary Commands Toolbar
Edge and Face Selection Toolbars
Machining Process Toolbars
Manufacturing Program Optimization Toolbar
Machine Management Toolbar
Measure Toolbar
Specification Tree
Customizing
Machining
General
Resources
Operation
Output
Program
Photo/Video
Build a Tools Catalog
Access External Tool Catalogs
PP Word Syntaxes
NC Documentation
Workbenches and Tool Bars
Reference Information
Machining Resources
Machine Tool Resources
Tool Assembly Resources
Tool and Insert Holder Resources
Insert Resources
NC Macros
Transition Path Management
PP Tables and PP Word Syntaxes
Feeds and Speeds
NC Data Options
APT Formats
Generated APT Syntaxes
NURBS Formats in APT Output
APT Output Modifications
Syntaxes Interpreted by APT Import
Clfile Formats
NC Data Import to Support Legacy Data
Feature Attributes for Tool Queries, Checks and Formula
PLM Integration
CATProcess Documents Support in SmartTeam
CATProcess Documents Support in Process Engineer
Methodology
Machining Processes
Knowledgeware in Machining Processes
CATProduct and CATProcess Document Management
Copy/Paste and External Referencing of NC Manufacturing Data
Design Changes and Associativity Mechanisms
Product-Setup Link in Manufacturing Hub Context
NC Synchronization in Manufacturing Hub Context
Lock/Unlock Mechanisms
Part Operation and Set Up Documents
Material Removal Simulation
User Features for Machining
Properties of a Machining Operation
Glossary
Index
Overview
Welcome to the NC Manufacturing Infrastructure User's Guide. This guide is intended for users who need to
become quickly familiar with the NC Manufacturing Infrastructure Version 5.
This overview provides the following information:
● NC Manufacturing Infrastructure in a Nutshell
● Before Reading this Guide
● Getting the Most Out of this Guide
● Accessing Sample Documents
● Conventions Used in this Guide.
NC Manufacturing Infrastructure in a Nutshell

NC Manufacturing Solutions enable you to define and manage NC programs dedicated to machining parts
designed in 3D wireframe or solids geometry using 2.5 to 5-axis machining techniques.
It offers an easy-to-use and easy-to-learn graphic interface that makes it suitable for shop floor-oriented use.
Moreover, its leading edge technologies together with a tight integration with Version 5 design methodologies
and DELMIA's digital manufacturing environment, fully satisfy the requirements of office programming. NC
Manufacturing is a unique solution that reconciliates office and shop floor activities.
An integrated Post Processor engine allows the product to cover the whole manufacturing process from tool
trajectory (APT source or Clfile) to NC data.
NC Manufacturing Infrastructure offers the following main functions:
● Common platform for 2.5 to 5-axis axis machining capabilities, which include mill, drill and turn operations
● Management of tools and tool catalogs
● Flexible management of the manufacturing program with intuitive and easy-to-learn user interface based
on graphic dialog boxes
● Tight interaction between tool path definition, verification and generation
● Knowledgeware customization facilities through f(x) formula and Edit search facilities
● Seamless NC data generation thanks to an integrated Post Processor Access solution
● Automatic shop floor documentation in HTML format
● High associative level of the manufacturing program ensures productive design change management
thanks to the integration with CATIA V5 modeling capabilities
● Based on the Process Product Resources (PPR) model, the manufacturing applications are integrated with
Digital Process for Manufacturing (DPM).
Before Reading this Guide

Before reading this guide, you should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as document windows,
standard and view toolbars. Therefore, we recommend that you read the Infrastructure User's Guide that
describes generic capabilities common to all Version 5 products. It also describes the general layout of V5 and
the interoperability between workbenches.
Getting the Most Out of this Guide

To get the most out of this guide, we suggest that you start reading and performing the step-by-step scenarios
in the User Tasks section, which gives relevant information about the common functionalities of NC
Manufacturing Solutions. The Reference section provides useful complementary information.
The Workbench Description section, which describes the commands that are common to NC Manufacturing
Solutions, and the Customizing section, which explains how to customize your Machining environment, and the
Methodology section, which provides useful information about recommended work methods, will also certainly
prove useful.
Accessing Sample Documents

To perform the scenarios, you will be using sample documents contained in the doc/online/mfgug_C2/samples
or doc/online/mfgug_D2/samples folder. For more information about this, refer to Accessing Sample
Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Conventions
Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you recognize and
understand important concepts and specifications.
Graphic Conventions
The three categories of graphic conventions used are as follows:
● Graphic conventions structuring the tasks
● Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required
● Graphic conventions used in the table of contents
Graphic Conventions Structuring the Tasks
Graphic conventions structuring the tasks are denoted as follows:
This icon... Identifies...
estimated time to accomplish a task
a target of a task
the prerequisites
the start of the scenario
a tip
a warning
information
basic concepts
methodology
reference information
information regarding settings, customization, etc.
the end of a task

functionalities that are new or enhanced with this release
allows you to switch back to the full-window viewing mode
Graphic Conventions Indicating the Configuration Required
Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required are denoted as follows:
This icon... Indicates functions that are...
specific to the P1 configuration
Graphic Conventions Used in the Table of Contents
Graphic conventions used in the table of contents are denoted as follows:
This icon... Gives access to...
Site Map
Split View Mode
What's New?
Overview
Getting Started
Basic Tasks
User Tasks or Advanced Tasks
Interoperability
Customizing
Administration Tasks
Reference
Methodology
Frequently Asked Questions
Glossary
Index
Text Conventions
The following text conventions are used:
● The titles of CATIA, ENOVIA and DELMIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text.
● File -> New identifies the commands to be used.
● Enhancements are identified by a blue-colored background on the text.
How to Use the Mouse

The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform.
Use this
mouse button... Whenever you read...
● Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...)

● Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the document window,
...)
● Double-click
● Shift-click
● Ctrl-click
● Check (check boxes)
● Drag
● Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects)
● Drag
● Move
● Right-click (to select contextual menu)
What's New?
Enhanced Functionalities
New Product-Setup Link in Manufacturing Hub Context
Part Operations will be always associated to product instances. This harmonization enables to associate
or replace a Product whatever the methodology used. In addition, the link to product instances enables
the following:
❍ Making the link between Setup and Product persistent after save in IPD.
❍ Managing several machining phases of the same Product in a unique Process, each phase
corresponding to one instance of the Product. User can manage different setups or constraints for a
same Product.
❍ Making design changes local to the Setup and not necessarily global to the Process.
This enhancement will enable the user to delete at least one Part belonging to the NC Setup Assembly
or replace the current version of it by a new version. User has the possibility to manually or
automatically synchronize the Process with the new version of the Part.
Support Machines with external axes in MPS and provide lock axis capability
NC Machine Tool Simulation must be installed.
See NC Machine Tool Simulation User's Guide for more information.
Support simulation based on ISO code
NC Machine Tool Simulation must be installed.
Getting Started
Before getting into the detailed instructions for using Machining products, this section deals with some
important concepts about your working environment.
Manage Workbenches
Manage Documents
Design Changes
Manage Workbenches
This section explains what happens when you open a design part and enter a Machining workbench (Prismatic
Machining, for example), and how to switch to and from Machining and Design workbenches.
1. Select File > Open then select the desired CATPart document.
2. Select Machining > Prismatic Machining from the Start menu. The Prismatic Machining workbench appears. The
part is displayed in the Setup Editor window along with the PPR specification tree.
The CATPart is automatically associated to the Part Operation and an instance of the part is created in the
Product List.
3. Select Manufacturing Program.1 in the tree to make it the current entity.

To insert program entities such as machining operations, tools and auxiliary commands you can either:
● make the program current before clicking the insert program entity command
● click the insert program entity command then make the program current.
4. Double-click the Part entity in the tree to switch to a Mechanical Design workbench (such as Part Design or
Wireframe and Surface Design depending on your configuration).
5. Double-click a Machining entity in the tree to switch back to the Machining workbench.
If the NC Machine Tool Simulation product is installed, you can switch from a Machining workbench to the NC
Machine Tool Simulation workbench as follows:
● By means of a contextual command: right-click the Manufacturing Program or a machining operation in the
tree and select Simulate Machine using Tool Path or Simulate Machine using NC Code.
● By means of a toolbar command: select Starts Machine Simulation in the NC Output Management
toolbar.
Please note the following points:
● When you switch to the NC Machine Tool Simulation workbench you can use tools and tool assemblies directly
from the resource list for clash checking.
● If a machining operation's tool path is manually modified in the NC Machine Tool Simulation workbench (for
example, by jogging the machine), the operation's status changes from Computed to Modified. During a
tool path replay, any zones where points have been modified, inserted or removed are displayed as dashed
lines.
Refer to the NC Machine Tool Simulation User's Guide for more information.
Manage Documents
This section shows how you can create a new CATPart document in the Product List dedicated to storing complementary geometry.
1. Select the Create a CATPart to store geometry checkbox in Tools > Options > Machining > General.
2. Open your design part and start the Machining workbench as described in the previous section.
Two CATPart documents are present in the Product list: the design part and a CATPart for storing Complementary Geometry in your Part
Operation.
This enables you to create geometry which may be necessary for your manufacturing model without modifying the design part. This
geometry can be created by switching to a Design workbench as mentioned in the previous section.
Being in a Machining workbench means being able to work in a multi-model environment.
The CATProcess references one or more CATPart and/or CATProduct documents.
You can have links between a CATProcess document and:
● CATPart and/or CATProduct documents (design part, associated geometry, stock, and so on)
● APT, Clfile or NC Code output (if associated using the CATMfgBatch utility)
● Packed tool path files stored on disk (if these tlp files were stored)
● CATPart documents relative to tool/tool assembly representation (if associated to a tool or assembly).
The links between documents can be visualized using the Edit > Links command.

This task shows you how to manage part set up.
You must create a CATProduct entity for each part set up you want to represent.
1. Enter a Machining workbench and double-click the Part Operation.1 entity in the tree.
The Part Operation dialog box appears.

2. Click Product to associate a product to the part operation.
3. Select a CATProduct from the Associated Product list, then click Open to display the corresponding
part set up.
4. Click OK in the Part Operation dialog box.

5. Click Part Operation to create the Part Operation.2 entity in the tree.
6. Associate another product to Part Operation.2 in the same way as described above.
7. Click OK in the Part Operation dialog box.
To display the desired part set up, just select the corresponding Part Operation in the tree.
Design Changes
This task shows you how to manage your design changes.
For more information on this topic please refer to Design Changes and Associativity Mechanisms.
1. Create a Profile Contouring operation and replay the tool path.
All the tabs of the Profile Contouring dialog box display a green status.
The Profile Contouring entity is displayed in the tree with no related symbol.
2. Switch to the window showing the CATPart design and modify the part geometry.
3. Switch to the Setup Editor window.
The Profile Contouring entity is now displayed in the tree with an Update symbol (or mask) .
4. Double-click the Profile Contouring entity to edit the operation.
The Geometry tab has an orange status, indicating that the geometry has been modified.
5. Select the Analyze contextual command in the sensitive icon zone of the dialog box.
The Geometry Analyzer dialog box appears showing the status of the referenced geometry.
6. Click the Smart icon to highlight the geometry that was used in the operation before the part was
modified.
Geometry highlighted in this way helps you to analyze the design change.
7. Click OK to return to the Profile Contouring dialog box.
8. Replay the tool path to make sure that the machining is consistent with the design change.
You should check that there is no longer an Update symbol beside the Profile Contouring entity in
the graph.
Analyze and Remove Geometry
You can analyze and, if needed, remove the geometry specified on a Machining Operation.
In the Machining Operation editor, three icon commands appear at the bottom of the
Strategy, Geometry, and Macros tab pages. They provide capability to:
● preview the geometry specified by means of the current tab page

● preview the smart geometry by means of the current tab page
● remove the geometry specified by means of the current tab page.
To analyze one geometry aggregate (guiding element, for example), right-click the corresponding
sensitive area of the Machining Operation editor and the Geometry Analyser dialog box appears.
In the Geometry Analyser dialog box, the same three icon commands as above are available.
They provide capability to:
● preview the geometry corresponding to the rows selected in the dialog box
● preview the smart geometry corresponding to the rows selected in the dialog box
● remove the geometry corresponding to the rows selected in the dialog box. You can easily
remove unwanted or unused geometry (short lines that were automatically inserted in guides,
for example).
The first column lists the geometry names (Guides 1-1, Guides 1-2, and so on when several
geometric elements are defined on Guides 1, or Bottom when only one geometric element is
defined on the Bottom).
The second column lists the names of the referenced geometries: Edge, Face, and so on.
The third column lists the geometry status: Up to date, Not up to date, or Not found.
The columns of the Geometry Analyser dialog box can be sorted by clicking on the column header.
Multi-selection is possible .
User Tasks
The user tasks you will perform using Machining products involve creating, editing and managing part
operations, manufacturing programs and other entities of the manufacturing process.

Machining Processes
Machining Entities
Program Output

This section deals with creating and managing the following major entities of the Machining environment.
Create and Edit a Part Operation: Select Part Operation then specify the entities to be referenced by
the part operation: machine tool, machining axis system, tool change point, part set up, and so on.
Create and Edit a Manufacturing Program: Select Manufacturing Program to add a program to the
current part operation then insert all necessary program entities: machining operations, tool changes, PP
instructions, and so on.
Process Table: Right-click a Manufacturing Program or a Part Operation selection in the PPR tree, and
select Process Table to activate a view in which the various operations of the program or PO are
presented in a table format.
Auto-sequence Operations in a Program (P2 functionality): Verify the administrator's settings for
sequencing rules and priorities. If you are authorized, you can adjust these settings before applying the
Auto-sequencing to your program.
Generate Transition Paths in a Program (P2 functionality): Automatically creates all necessary
transition paths and machine rotations in the program according to the kinematics of the machine tool
assigned to the Part Operation and user-defined transition planes.

Part Operation
This task shows you how to create a part operation in the manufacturing process.
When you open a Machining workbench on a CATPart or CATProduct document, the manufacturing
document is initialized with a part operation.
1. Select Part Operation .
A new part operation is initialized in the manufacturing process and a Part Operation entity is
added to the tree.
To access the parameters of the part operation, double-click the Part Operation entity in the
tree or use the contextual menu. The Part Operation dialog box appears.
Name and Comment
2. If needed, enter a new part operation name and assign comments to the part operation.
Machine
3. Click Machine to assign a machine tool to the part operation.

Please refer to Machine Editor for more information.
Reference Machining Axis System
4. Click Reference Machining Axis System to assign a reference machining axis system to
the part operation. The Machining Axis System dialog box appears.
This is similar to the procedure described in Insert a Machining Axis Change.
Output coordinates will be expressed in the reference machining axis system. If a local
machining axis system is inserted in the program, coordinates will be expressed in the local
axis system.
Product or Part
5. Click Product or Part to associate an existing product (CATProduct) or part (CATPart) to

the part operation. This procedure is described in Set Up and Part Positioning.
Note: In a Manufacturing Hub context, Product Instance Selection replaces Product
or Part in the Part Operation editor.
Geometry tab
6. Select the Geometry tab to associate the following geometry to the part operation:
● Design part: Just click Design Part then select the desired geometry. This is useful if
you want to do material removal simulations later.
● Stock: Just click Stock then select the desired geometry. This is useful for certain
surface machining operations and also for material removal simulations.
● Fixtures: Just click Fixtures then select the desired geometry. This is useful if you
want to do material removal simulations later.
● Safety plane: Just click Safety Plane then select the desired plane that will be used
as a global safety plane for the part operation.
● Traverse box planes: Just click Traverse Box Planes then select 5 planes that
define a global traverse box for the part operation.
● Transition planes: Just click Transition Planes then select the desired planes that
will be used as a global transition planes for the part operation.
● Rotary planes: Just click Rotary Planes then select the desired planes that will be
used as a global rotary planes for the part operation.
The generation of transition paths in the program takes into account:

● Traverse box planes and Transition planes to create linear tool path motions
● Rotary planes to create machine rotations:
❍ between machining operations
❍ between tool change and machining operation.
The Safety plane is not taken into account for the generation of transition paths.
When the geometry is selected, the identifiers are displayed in the corresponding fields and tool
tips (see example below).
Position tab
7. Select the Position tab to specify the following reference positions on the part operation:
● Tool change point

For machines created using the NC Machine Tool Builder product, the tool change point is
read from the machine and cannot be modified in the Part Operation.
For Multi-slide lathe machines, the tool change point is read from the machine and cannot
be modified in the Part Operation.
● Table center setup

● Home point
You can select the checkbox to use the Home point defined on the machine.
Simulation tab
8. Select the Simulation tab to specify the stock tessellation tolerance. In previous releases, this
tolerance was fixed at 0.2mm.
Option tab
9. Select the Option tab to specify the following option:
● Automatic stock selection for turning operations. This enables automatically updating the
input stock for operations in a manufacturing program for turning (that is, turning
operations and axial operations along the spindle axis). A lathe machine must be selected in
this case.
10. Click OK to create the part operation. The tree is updated with the new entity.
Machine Editor
This task shows you how to use the Machine Editor to assign a machine to a Part Operation.
1.Click Machine in the Part Operation dialog box. The Machine Editor dialog box appears.
2.Select the desired machine tool in one of the following ways.
● By clicking a Default machine icon :
● 3-axis machine
● 3-axis machine with rotary table
● 5-axis machine
● horizontal lathe machine
● vertical lathe machine
● multi-slide lathe machine (refer to Multi-Slide Lathe Machining User's Guide for more information
about this machine).
● By clicking then selecting a Generic machine
A generic machine is a CATProduct representation that was created using the NC Machine Tool Builder
product. Available machine types are:
● 3-axis machine with no rotary axis

● 3-axis machine with 1 rotary axis on table
● 3-axis machine with 2 rotary axes on table
● 3-axis machine with 1 rotary axis on table and 1 rotary axis on head
● 3-axis machine with 1 rotary axis on head
● 3-axis machine with 2 rotary axes on head
● 5-axis continuous machine (without generation of ROTABL or ROTHEAD instruction).
Each machine contains all the necessary NC parameters and kinematic definition data for the Part
Operation.
A number of sample generic machines are provided at this location:
..\OS\startup\Manufacturing\Samples\NCMachineToollib\DEVICES.
● By clicking to select a machine directly from the PPR tree.
The characteristics of the selected machine are displayed and the following parameters can be edited to
correspond to your actual machine tool.
Machine Name and Comment
If needed, enter a new name for the machine and assign comments to it.
Numerical Control Tab
You can also specify the following.
● Controller Emulator and Post Processor: Note that a Controller Emulator/Post Processor vendor must be
set in the Tools > Options > Machining > Output tab.
● Post Processor words table: Sample PP word tables are delivered with the product in the
..\startup\manufacturing\PPTables folder.
● NC data type: Defines whether APT, Clfile or NC code is the preferred output type.
● NC data format: Defines whether tool point coordinates (x,y,z) or tool point coordinates and tool axis
components (x,y,z,i,j,k) is the preferred output format.
● Home point strategy: Defines whether a GOTO or FROM instruction is to be generated in the output APT
source for the Home Point.
● Rapid feedrate: This is used to compute accurate machining time (in tool path replay and NC documentation,
for example) and can be used to replace the RAPID instruction in the output APT source.
● Axial/radial movement: Defines whether axial/radial transitions are to be used between the end of one
operation and the start of the next operation.
Tooling Tab
Displays tooling parameters including the Tools catalog.

Spindle Tab
Displays spindle parameters.

Turret Tab
Displays turret parameters for vertical and multi-axis lathe machines.

Rotary Table or Rotary Data Tab
For 3-axis machine with rotary table, rotary table parameters are displayed.
For machines with more than one rotary axis on head or table, parameters are displayed for each axis.
The rotary axis name can be set on a generic machine in NC Machine Tool Builder. This allows a better coverage of
machines for automatic generation of transition paths (for example, when the rotary axis of the machine is not
parallel to the X, Y or Z axis of the absolute axis system).
Compensation
Cutter compensation options are displayed for 3D contact compensation.
Note: Use of the 3D contact compensation capability is restricted as from V5R14 SP4.
Contact and Tip & Contact compensation modes can no longer be globally applied to all operations supporting
this 3D Cutter compensation.
The check box can only be selected when the No option is selected (see example below), otherwise a warning
message is issued.
If the Contact or the Tip & Contact option is selected and the checkbox is not selected (see example below), a
Compensation tab appears in the Strategy page of the machining operation editor.
In this case, 3D contact compensation can be managed at machining operation level.

Please note that some machining operations propose cutter compensation modes other than 3D contact (2D radial
profile, for example).
The table below specifies the modes available for each machining operation that supports compensation.
NC Output
For generic machines created using the NC Machine Tool Builder product, the Machine Editor centralizes all NC
output options. If such a machine is defined on the Part Operation, all options for NC data generation can be read
automatically from the machine definition.
Please note that generic machines (CATProducts) adhere to the Instance/Reference mechanism described in
CATProduct and CATProcess Document Management. A generic machine is added to the ResourceList in flexible
mode. This means that any modification to the machine in the CATProcess is valid only for that instance of the
machine in that CATProcess: the modification is not propagated to the reference (that is, the CATProduct file).
3.Click OK to validate any modified machine parameters and assign the machine to the Part Operation. The Part
Operation dialog box is displayed again.
The Resource List is updated with selected machine.

Example of a selected Default machine:
Example of a selected Generic machine:
In this case the machine appears directly in the 3D viewer. It is possible to use the Hide/Show
contextual command on the machine nodes in the tree to hide all or part of the machine.
Machining Operations Supporting Cutter Compensation
The following table specifies the Compensation output modes available for each operation. Cutter compensation
instructions are generated on the NC data output depending on the selected mode as follows:
● 2D radial tip
Compensation is computed in a plane normal to the tool axis, and activated with regard to a cutter side (left or
right).
The radius that is compensated is the cutter radius.
Output is the tool tip point (XT).
● 2D radial profile
Compensation is computed in a plane normal to the tool axis, and activated with regard to a cutter side (left or
right).
Output is the tool profile point (XP).
● 3D radial
Compensation is computed along a 3D vector (PQR), normal to the drive surface, in contact with the flank of the
tool.
Output is the tool tip point (XT) and PQR vector. Tool axis vector (IJK) is output in multi-axis.
● 3D contact
Compensation is computed along a 3D vector (XN), normal to the part surface, in contact with the end of the
tool.
The radius that is compensated is the corner radius.
Output is the contact point (XC) and XN vector.
The tool tip point (XT) may also be given if this choice is set on the machine.
Tool axis vector (IJK) is output in multi-axis.
Machining
2D radial tip 2D radial profile 3D radial 3D contact
Operation
Profile Contouring
Yes Yes - -
(between planes)
Pocketing Yes Yes - -
Circular Milling Yes Yes - -
Sweeping - - - Yes
Contour Driven - - - -
Spiral Milling - - - -
Z Level - - - Yes
Sweep Roughing - - - -
Isoparametric
- - - Yes
Machining
Multi Axis Sweeping - - - Yes
Multi Axis Curve
- - - Yes
(Contact)
Multi Axis Contour
- - - Yes
Driven
Multi Axis Helix
- - - Yes
Machining
Multi Axis Flank
- Yes Yes -
Contouring
A number of capabilities are available for managing manufacturing programs.
● Create
● Edit
● Insert entities
● Reorder using Copy / Paste or Drag / Drop
● Delete.
This task shows you how you can edit a manufacturing program.
When you open a Machining workbench on a CATPart document, the manufacturing document is
initialized with a manufacturing program.
When you select Manufacturing Program , a new program is initialized in the part operation and
a new Manufacturing Program entity is added to the tree.
Open the HoleMakingOperations.CATPart document, then select a Machining workbench from the Start
menu.
1. Double-click the Manufacturing Program in the specification tree. The Manufacturing Program
dialog box appears.
Rename the program and add a comment as shown below then click OK.
2. Create a drilling operation on the circular pattern of 6 holes.
3. Create a spot drilling operation on the circular pattern of 6 holes and the rectangular pattern of 10
holes.
4. Create another drilling operation on the rectangular pattern of 10 holes.
The three operations are assigned the same default tool.
5. Edit the spot drilling operation to assign a spot drill tool.
Each operation now has an associated tool change.
6. Right-click the first Drilling operation and select Cut.

7. Right-click the second Drilling operation and select Paste.
The program is reordered. You can delete unnecessary tool changes to give the following result.
The same result could have been obtained by using the drag and drop capability.
Program Simulation and Replay

The program can be simulated using NC code data or tool path data.
The program can be replayed using tool path data.
For this, the Manufacturing Program dialog box includes the following commands:
● Start Machine Simulation : if the NC Machine Tool Simulation product is installed, you
can switch from the Machining workbench to the NC Machine Tool Simulation workbench by
clicking this icon.
● Start Video Simulation : allows direct access to Video material removal simulation for
the program.
● Tool Path Replay : allows direct access to tool path replay for the program.
To choose simulation using NC code data, select the NC Code Based Simulation check box.
Otherwise, simulation is done using tool path data.
When simulation is done using NC code data, the following commands are available:
● Display Origin Management Panel : displays the Workpiece Origin Management panel,
which controls G53, G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59 NC code data.
● Display Cutter Compensation Panel : displays the Cutter Compensation panel, which
controls G41 and G42 (radial compensation) and G43 (2- and 3-axis length compensation) NC
codes.
Please refer to the NC Machine Tool Simulation User's Guide for a description of these capabilities.
Process Table
This task shows you how use the Process Table. This table gives a tabular view of the Process, or a given Part Operation
or a given Manufacturing Program. It provides an alternative view to the PPR tree.
From a Manufacturing Program or a Part Operation selection in the PPR tree, the Process Table command activates a
Process View in which the various operations of the Manufacturing Program or Part Operation are presented in a table
format.
If no pre-selection is performed, the Process Table shows the detail of all the Part Operations of the Process document.
1. Open the Processfinal.CATProcess document. The Setup Editor window appears showing the PPR tree as follows. The
part is displayed held in place by fixtures, with the stock hidden.
2. Right-click the Part Operation in the tree, then select Process Table . The Process Table appears presenting the
Part Operation, the Manufacturing Program and the various operations in a table format.
3. Right-click in the Process Table to access a contextual menu as follows:
These commands allow you to customize the table and manage the program.
Column Filter
Select the columns that you want to include in the Process Table. You can use the Cntl and Shift keys to make multiple
selections.
Other columns in process table can be used to visualize tool information: nominal diameter, corner radius/nose radius,
cutting length, body diameter, and non-cutting diameter.
Column Order
You can change the order of the filtered columns in the Process Table by selecting a line and moving it in the list by
means of the Up / Down buttons.
Select by String
You can use the pop-up that appears to search for any character string in the Process Table (pocket, for example). All
lines containing the searched string will be selected.
Compared with the Process Table shown above, the following table has:
● re-ordered columns
● all pocketing operations selected.
This was done by using the Select by String command with string set to 'pocket'.
Selected Objects
When you right-click selected line or lines in the Process Table, you access a menu of contextual commands. For
example, in the case of the selected pocketing operations above, the following menu is displayed:
A number of parameters (such as Machining feedrate, Spindle speed, Machining tolerance, Retract feedrate and
Approach feedrate) can be edited contextually. Note that these edit commands are displayed in the contextual menu
only if the column filtering makes them visible in the Process Table.
How to Edit a Parameter of a Single Machining Operation
● Select a machining operation in the table.

● Right-click on the selected line.
● Choose the parameter to be edited (machining feedrate, for example).
● Edit the parameters in the pop-up that appears.
How to Globally Edit a Parameter of Several Machining Operations
● Select the desired machining operations in the table (for example, all the pocketing operations).
● Right-click on a selected line.
● Choose the parameter to be edited (machining feedrate, for example).
● Edit the parameters in the pop-up that appears.
In this example, the machining feedrate of all the pocketing operations will be changed as follows:
If you click From in the Edit Parameters pop-up, you will be prompted to select a machining operation in the PPR tree.
The parameter value will be taken from the selected operation.
Delete
The Delete contextual command allows you to delete one or more lines in the Process Table.
Rename Current View
You can specify up to four different named views in the Process Table. The procedure is as follows:
● Select a view from the View combo.

● Customize the table using the Column Order and Column Filter commands (for example, to show cutting
condition information):
❍ right-click in the table and select Rename Current View
❍ enter the name for the view in the pop-up that appears and click OK.
Here is an example of such a view:

Any modifications done to the Process using the contextual commands are propagated to the PPR tree.
Operations that are locked cannot be edited using the contextual commands.
If the parameter is defined by a formula, this is indicated in the Process Table:
and the Edit Parameter pop-up:

Auto-Sequence Operations in a Program
This task shows how to optimize the order of operations in a program according to pre-defined
sequencing rules.
The Sequencing rules have been set up by the administrator. The Program settings under Tools >
Options > Machining are described in Program settings.
Make sure that the document in the sequencing rules path is accessible in Read/Write.
A sample sequencing rules document is delivered with the product at the following location:
../startup/Manufacturing/samples/AutoSequence/AllSequencingRules.CATProduct.
1. Create a program containing the following operations.
2. Select Rules Manager to visualize the administrator's sequencing rule settings. Change these
settings as follows:
● de-select all rules except for Sort by operation type and Sort by increasing tool diameter
● click the [...] button to visualize the sequencing priority between operations. Make Facing the
highest priority machining operation in the list by assigning a priority of 50. Spot drilling
remains unchanged at 40 and Drilling remains unchanged at 25.
3. Select Auto Sequence to display the Auto Sequence dialog box. Click the Select All button
to select all the operations of the program.
Click Apply to sequence the operations according to the defined rules and priorities.
4. The program is re-sequenced as follows.
You can click Undo if you want to cancel the auto-sequence results.
It is possible to impose a constraint (called strong precedence) to force a group operations to

remain together after sequencing.
Applying a strong precedence constraint means that in addition to imposing an order between two
operations A and B, it is not possible to have another operation C between them. The sequence A -
C - B is not allowed, only A - B is allowed if a strong precedence exists between A and B.
For this, a parameter named Strong must be added to operation B.
For example, in auto-sequencing this could be used to prevent inserting a threading operation
between a drilling operation and a reaming operation.
Machining axis changes are taken into account in auto-sequencing without having to impose strong
precedence criteria.
Generate Transition Paths in a Program
This task shows how to generate all necessary transition paths between operations in a program. This
is done by taking the selected machine's kinematic characteristics and specified transition planes into
account.
For more information, please refer to Transition Path Management in the Reference section.
Select File > Open then select the Stepped.CATPart document. You may need to use Fit All In
to view the part correctly in the window.
Select Start > Machining and select the desired workbench (Prismatic Machining, for example).
1. Double-click the Part Operation to display the Part Operation dialog box.
Click Machine and select a generic milling machine (CATProduct). See Machine Editor for
more information.
A suitable machine for this scenario is jomach35.1.CATProduct which is a 5-axis machine delivered
in:
..\startup\Manufacturing\Samples\NCMachineToollib\DEVICES.
Click OK to validate the machine selection.

2. In the Part Operation dialog box, click Traverse box planes then select 5 planes that define
a traverse box for the part operation.
Note that an arrow that represents the external normal vector is displayed on the top plane of the
Traverse Box.
The top plane is the traverse box planes that is perpendicular to all the other planes.
This arrow is be oriented from the plane to the outside of the traverse box.
3. Click OK to validate the Part Operation parameters.
Click OK to validate the modifications to the Part Operation.

You may want to position the part on the machine, although this is not necessary for the rest of
this user scenario. To do this:
● double-click the Machining Axis System label in the 3D view. Select the origin point in the
dialog box that appears and select the point in the model to reposition the machining axis
system on this point
● select Workpiece Automatic Mount to automatically mount the workpiece on the

machine.
4. Select the Manufacturing Program node in the tree, then create 2 Drilling operations in the
program (on Hole1 and Hole9, for example).
5. Right-click the program and select Compute Tool Path.
6. Select Generate Transition Paths . The Transition Paths dialog box appears. Select the
manufacturing program to be processed and set the desired options.
Please refer to Transition Path Options in the Reference section for a description of the proposed
options.
Click OK to validate the options and start generating transition paths.
7. The program is updated with the generated transition paths.
8. Select the program then select Replay to verify the generated transition paths.
The figure below illustrates that the transition path between the 2 operations respects the traverse
box defined on the part operation. Please note that the retract and approach paths are
perpendicular to the traverse box planes as specified in the Transition Paths dialog box.
9. To illustrate the effect of the traverse box with retract and approach paths along the tool axis:
● select Update Transition Paths to display the Transition Paths dialog box
● change the Approach/Retract option to Along operation tool axis

● select the program
● click OK to update the transition paths.
10. To obtain the transition path in the figure below:

● edit the Part Operation to specify an additional transition plane (inclined plane in figure)
● update the transition path using Update Transition Paths .

More About Generating Transition Paths

● You can use Remove Transition Paths to remove all generated transition paths.
● A transition path can include linear transitions and/or machine rotations as follows:
Linear transition A
Machine rotation i
Machine rotation j
Machine rotation k
Linear transition B
Machine rotations can be generated depending on the machine and rotary plane referenced in
the Part Operation, and the options selected in the Transition Paths dialog box. A machine with
rotary table is required.
Note that, if needed, transition paths can be deleted and replaced by machine rotations (see
Insert a Machine Rotation).
● If a transition path includes at least one machine rotation, it can be browsed. Just double-click
the Transition Path (Ext Rotation) entity in the tree to display a dialog box like the one shown
below.
● The rotary axis name can be set on a generic machine in NC Machine Tool Builder. This allows
a better coverage of machines for automatic generation of transition paths (for example, when
the rotary axis of the machine is not parallel to the X, Y or Z axis of the absolute axis system).

This task shows you how to create a Process Template, starting from an existing CATProcess.
The template is created by means of the following automatic steps:
● isolate the CATProcess file from all the files which are linked to it
● disconnect the CATProcess from the geometry
● remove the generated tool path from each machining operation.
The purpose of this is to reuse the CATProcess structure to program the machining of a new design by
keeping the sequence of operations and the parameter values that were used in the previous program.
1. Open the Processfinal.CATProcess document. The Setup Editor window appears showing the PPR
tree as follows.
2. Select Tools > Machining Tools > Isolate Process Data. The Process Template dialog box
appears.
3. If needed, select the check boxes concerning NC Setup Assembly and Tool Paths then click OK to
'clean' the process.
The following steps are done:
Isolate the CATProcess document from all the documents that were
linked to it:
● drawings of the part in different steps (.CATDrawing files)

● NC Documentation (.html files)
● APT file, CL file or NC code file
● pictures (.jpg)
● intermediate material removal video results (.wpc).
Disconnect the CATProcess from the geometry:
● Disconnect each elementary machining operation from the part geometry

● Disconnect each Part Operation from the design, the stock and complementary geometry.
Only the link with the NC Setup Assembly is not disconnected if the checkbox is set.
However, even if you choose to keep the NC Setup Assembly in the CATProcess, it must be
disconnected from the machining operation.
An IPM Body is associated to the NC Setup Assembly. If you choose to remove the NC Setup
Assembly, the IPM Body is also removed.
Remove the generated tool paths for each machining operation:

8. Right-click the Spot Drilling operation in the Machining Process View and select Edit Checks. The
Checks Editor dialog box appears.
Define a check as shown below. It corresponds to the criteria:

the Spot Drilling operation is only available for design holes with a diameter greater than 2mm.
You can assign checks to the Drilling and Tapping operations in the same way.
Define Tool Queries for the Machining Operations

9. Double-click the Tooling Query associated to the Spot Drilling operation. The Tool Query Definition
dialog box appears.
Define a simple tooling query as shown below. It corresponds to the criteria:

find a spot drill in the ToolsSampleMP tool repository whose name is Spot Drill D10.
10. Click OK to assign the tooling query to the Spot Drilling operation.
You can assign tool queries to the Drilling and Tapping operations in the same way (to find tools
Drill D10.5 and Tap D12, for example).
Through the Copy/Paste mechanism, you can manage more than one Tooling Query on an
operation. When you instantiate the Machining Process, the first query is executed. If there is no
tool found, the next query is executed and so on until a result is obtained or the last query is
reached. This enables you to query several tool catalogs, different tool types, and have less
constrained queries.
11. Select File > Save As to save the machining process in a CATProcess document (called
AxialMachiningProcess1.CATProcess, for example).
12. Right-click the Machining Process in the Machining Process View and select Save in Catalog.
The Save in Catalog dialog box appears. Click the [...] button and specify a new catalog name
(catalogAxialMP1.catalog, for example).
Click OK to save the machining process as a component in the specified catalog.
The following are initialized automatically:
● family name: Machining Process

● component name: name given to the machining process using File > Save As.
However, you can change family or component in the Catalog Editor workbench. Click here to see
how you can organize machining processes in a catalog using that workbench.
Please refer to Apply a Machining Process for information about applying machining processes to
geometry such as design features and machining patterns.
● Please note for Hole features, when you use string parameters in Checks, Formulas and Tool
Queries you must put the value in double quotes ("). For example:
Hole.Hole type = "Tapered"
● The Formula Editor, Checks Editor and Tool Query dialog boxes have several common areas:
1. All expressions of the current entity (tool query or machining operation and for a machining
operation, either formulas or checks).
2. The commands list.
3. Area for editing the current expression with restrictions and help for using Operator, Function
and Unit combos. To validate an edited expression, you must select the Add button.
4. All the possible attributes that you can use in an expression, according to the Knowledgeware
description:
❍ the different Knowledgeware packages which group a set of object types: the Machining
Resources, Machining Features and Machining Activities packages are always available
❍ the object types list for the selected package
❍ the attributes list for a selected type: select an attribute to insert it in the expression.
5. For the Tool Query dialog box, a fifth area allows you to define the tool type and tool
repository.
● In the same way as for machining operations, you can associate a check on a machining process.
Just right-click the machining process in the Machining Process View and select Edit Checks. You
can then constrain the domain of application of the machining process in the Checks Editor dialog
box.
● In the same way as for machining operations, machining axis systems can be used in machining
processes.
● Parameters can be added on machining operations and features in the Knowledge Advisor
workbench.
Please refer to Knowledgeware in Machining Processes.
In this case the Machining Process View displays a generic node named Parameters under the
machining object node. Under this generic node appears the parameter node with its name, its
value and/or its formula (depending on the Knowledge parameter display setting).
Organize Machining Processes in a Catalog
This task shows how to organize machining processes in a catalog file.
A catalog file allows you to display the machining processes list by means of the Catalog Editor workbench. Also, you use catalog files
to interactively apply a machining process.
All CATProcess documents containing machining processes to be used in the catalog should be open.
1. In order to store a machining process as a catalog component, select the Catalog Editor workbench from the Start >
Infrastructure menu.
2. Click Add Family to create a component family.

The Component Family Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the component family (for example, AxialMachiningProcesses).
4. Double-click the AxialMachiningProcesses component family in the graph.
5. Click Add Component to create a catalog component.
The Description Definition dialog box appears.
6. Click Select external feature, then select AxialMachProcess1 in the Machining Process View of your
AxialMachiningProcess1.CATProcess document.
7. Click OK to make the machining process a component of the catalog component family.
8. Select File > Save As to save the catalog (catalogAxialMP1.catalog, for example).
Please refer to Apply a Machining Process for information about applying machining processes to geometry such as design features
and machining patterns.
8. Right-click the Spot Drilling operation in the Machining Process View and select Edit Checks. The
Checks Editor dialog box appears.
Define a check as shown below. It corresponds to the criteria:

the Spot Drilling operation is only available for design holes with a diameter greater than 2mm.
You can assign checks to the Drilling and Tapping operations in the same way.
Define Tool Queries for the Machining Operations

9. Double-click the Tooling Query associated to the Spot Drilling operation. The Tool Query Definition
dialog box appears.
Define a simple tooling query as shown below. It corresponds to the criteria:

find a spot drill in the ToolsSampleMP tool repository whose name is Spot Drill D10.
10. Click OK to assign the tooling query to the Spot Drilling operation.
You can assign tool queries to the Drilling and Tapping operations in the same way (to find tools
Drill D10.5 and Tap D12, for example).
Through the Copy/Paste mechanism, you can manage more than one Tooling Query on an
operation. When you instantiate the Machining Process, the first query is executed. If there is no
tool found, the next query is executed and so on until a result is obtained or the last query is
reached. This enables you to query several tool catalogs, different tool types, and have less
constrained queries.
11. Select File > Save As to save the machining process in a CATProcess document (called
AxialMachiningProcess1.CATProcess, for example).
12. Right-click the Machining Process in the Machining Process View and select Save in Catalog.
The Save in Catalog dialog box appears. Click the [...] button and specify a new catalog name
(catalogAxialMP1.catalog, for example).
Click OK to save the machining process as a component in the specified catalog.
The following are initialized automatically:
● family name: Machining Process

● component name: name given to the machining process using File > Save As.
However, you can change family or component in the Catalog Editor workbench. Click here to see
how you can organize machining processes in a catalog using that workbench.
Please refer to Apply a Machining Process for information about applying machining processes to
geometry such as design features and machining patterns.
● Please note for Hole features, when you use string parameters in Checks, Formulas and Tool
Queries you must put the value in double quotes ("). For example:
Hole.Hole type = "Tapered"
● The Formula Editor, Checks Editor and Tool Query dialog boxes have several common areas:
1. All expressions of the current entity (tool query or machining operation and for a machining
operation, either formulas or checks).
2. The commands list.
3. Area for editing the current expression with restrictions and help for using Operator, Function
and Unit combos. To validate an edited expression, you must select the Add button.
4. All the possible attributes that you can use in an expression, according to the Knowledgeware
description:
❍ the different Knowledgeware packages which group a set of object types: the Machining
Resources, Machining Features and Machining Activities packages are always available
❍ the object types list for the selected package
❍ the attributes list for a selected type: select an attribute to insert it in the expression.
5. For the Tool Query dialog box, a fifth area allows you to define the tool type and tool
repository.
● In the same way as for machining operations, you can associate a check on a machining process.
Just right-click the machining process in the Machining Process View and select Edit Checks. You
can then constrain the domain of application of the machining process in the Checks Editor dialog
box.
● In the same way as for machining operations, machining axis systems can be used in machining
processes.
● Parameters can be added on machining operations and features in the Knowledge Advisor
workbench.
Please refer to Knowledgeware in Machining Processes.
In this case the Machining Process View displays a generic node named Parameters under the
machining object node. Under this generic node appears the parameter node with its name, its
value and/or its formula (depending on the Knowledge parameter display setting).
Organize Machining Processes in a Catalog
This task shows how to organize machining processes in a catalog file.
A catalog file allows you to display the machining processes list by means of the Catalog Editor workbench. Also, you use catalog files
to interactively apply a machining process.
All CATProcess documents containing machining processes to be used in the catalog should be open.
1. In order to store a machining process as a catalog component, select the Catalog Editor workbench from the Start >
Infrastructure menu.
2. Click Add Family to create a component family.

The Component Family Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the component family (for example, AxialMachiningProcesses).
4. Double-click the AxialMachiningProcesses component family in the graph.
5. Click Add Component to create a catalog component.
The Description Definition dialog box appears.
6. Click Select external feature, then select AxialMachProcess1 in the Machining Process View of your
AxialMachiningProcess1.CATProcess document.
7. Click OK to make the machining process a component of the catalog component family.
8. Select File > Save As to save the catalog (catalogAxialMP1.catalog, for example).
Please refer to Apply a Machining Process for information about applying machining processes to geometry such as design features
and machining patterns.
Apply a Machining Process
This task shows how to apply a machining process to selected geometry.
Open the desired CATPart document, then select a Machining workbench from the Start menu.
The machining process application uses a standard mechanism of instantiation of features from a
feature reference. In this case, the feature reference is the machining process to be applied.
When you apply a machining process, the following steps are executed for each operation:
● Default mapping execution in case of geometry selection

● Checks execution
● Tool query execution
● Cutting conditions execution
● Formula solving.
1. Select Open Catalog . Use the Catalog Browser to open the catalogAxialMP1.catalog you
created in the previous task.
2. Double-click the AxialMachiningProcesses component family.
3. Double-click the machining process to be applied: AxialMachProcess1.
The Insert Object dialog box appears allowing you to apply the machining process.
Two input types can be defined:
1. Geometry to machine.
The default Geometry to machine is the Manufacturing View.
If this is not redefined by selecting feature geometry, then only NC data of the machining
process can be processed. In this case if geometry is referenced in checks, tool queries or
formula, an error message is issued.
2. Insertion level in a program.
The program input only appears if Insertion level in a program is activated. If no
operation is yet inserted and only one Manufacturing Program is created, then that
Manufacturing Program is the default program input.
Note that for drilling machining processes, if any selected design feature or geometry is linked to
a design pattern, this pattern is taken as selected geometry.
4. Select the geometry to be machined. This may be either a design feature or a machining pattern.
Selecting a design feature

Note that the design feature can be a design hole or a hole pattern.
The design geometry is added on the machining pattern referenced by the machining operation.
Note that all the parameters (such as Jump Distance, Tool axis strategy, Projection mode, and
Ordering mode) defined on the machining pattern at machining process creation time are kept.
Selecting a machining pattern
The selected machining pattern replaces the one defined on the operation at machining process
creation time.
Note that the parameters of the selected machining pattern are taken into account. They replace
the parameters (such as Jump Distance, Tool axis strategy, Projection mode, and Ordering mode)
defined on the machining pattern referenced by the operation at machining process creation time.
The selected machining pattern is shared by all machining operations created in the program by
the application of the machining process.
5. Click OK in the Insert Object dialog box.
6. The program is updated with the operations contained in the machining process:
● Spot Drilling
● Drilling
● Tapping.
These operations reference the selected geometry and make use of the formula and checks
defined in the machining process.
In addition, the tool queries are resolved so that each operation references the desired tool.
Apply Machining Processes Automatically
This task shows how to apply all the machining processes of a catalog on a set of selected features.
Open the HoleMakingOperations.CATPart document, then select Machining > Prismatic Machining from
the Start menu.
1. Select Machining Processes Application . The Machining Processes Instantiation Manager

appears.
2. Select the features to be machined. You can do this using the Manufacturing View, Edit Search
facilities, and so on. The Machining Processes Instantiation Manager is updated.
3. Specify the insertion level in the program. This is usually the Manufacturing Program where you
want the machining operations to be added.
4. Select the machining process catalog.
All the machining processes are listed. Select the machining processes to be applied.
Note that selecting a chapter (component family) in the Chapters List highlights all the machining
processes in that chapter in the Machining Processes List. You can then apply all of these
machining processes.
Highlighted lines in the list can be deselected (using the Cntl key for example).
5. Click OK to apply all the machining processes of the catalog to the selected features. The
Manufacturing Program is updated with the created machining operations.
Please note the behavior of the command buttons of the Machining Processes Instantiation
Manager:
Apply: Apply the machining processes and keep dialog box open
OK: Apply the machining processes and quit the dialog box
Close: Quit the dialog box without applying the machining processes. However, if machining
processes have already been applied they will remain applied.
This section shows you how to insert auxiliary operations in the NC manufacturing program.
Insert Tool Change: Select Tool Change then select the tool type to be referenced in the tool
change.
Insert Machine Rotation: Select Machine Rotation then specify the tool rotation characteristics.
Insert Machining Axis Change: Select Machining Axis Change then specify the characteristics of the
new machining axis system.
Insert PP Instruction: Select PP Instruction then enter the syntax of the PP instruction.
Insert COPY Operator (P2 functionality): Select COPY Operator then select the sequence of
operations to be processed. You can then specify the number of copies and the characteristics of the
transformation.
Insert TRACUT Operator (P2 functionality): Select TRACUT Operator then select the sequence of
operations to be processed. You can then specify the characteristics of the transformation.
Insert Copy-Transformation Instruction (P2 functionality): Select Copy-Transformation then
select the list of operations you want to process. You can then specify the number of copies and the
characteristics of the transformation.
Opposite Hand Machining: for machining symmetrical parts.
Choosing between TRACUT and COPY Operators and the Copy-Transformation

Instruction
The essential differences are as follows:
A TRACUT operator is used to apply a transformation to a delimited sequence of activities in the program.
The sequence is delimited by TRACUT-TRACUT/NOMORE type instructions.
A COPY operator is used to copy and apply a transformation to a delimited sequence of activities in the
program.
The sequence is delimited by COPY-INDEX type instructions.
To compute the COPY all the referenced operations must:
- be Up to date or Locked
- have a Tool Path.
A Copy-Transformation instruction is used to copy and apply a transformation to selected list of operations
(not a delimited sequence).
To compute the Copy-Transformation all the referenced operations must:
- have the same tooling
- be Up to date or Locked
- have a Tool Path.
Tool path edition is possible with the Copy-Transformation instruction.
In addition:
TRACUT and COPY operators are very similar to their counterparts in APT NC language.
Also the same instructions were part of the CATIA Version 4 NC products, so V5 migration of V4 programs
with COPY-INDEX and TRACUT-TRACUT/NOMORE sequences is possible.
Tool path edition is not possible with TRACUT and COPY operators.
Insert a Tool Change

This task shows how to insert tool changes in the program. You can either add tool changes locally or
generate all necessary tool changes automatically in the program.
To add a tool change locally:
1. In the specification tree, select the program entity after which you want to add the tool change.
2. Select the desired icon in the Tool Change toolbar. The corresponding dialog box appears for defining
the tool change.
3. Select the Tool tab page in order to specify the tool to be referenced by the tool change. You
can do this by either:
● creating a new tool
● selecting another tool that is already used in the document
● selecting another tool either in the document or in tool catalogs by means of a query.
This is the same procedure as described in Select or Create a Tool.

4. Select the Tool Assembly tab page if you want to:
● create a new tool assembly. In this case a tool assembly is added to the Resource List.
Please refer to Edit a Tool Assembly in the Resource List for more information about how to specify
the geometric and technological characteristics of the a tool assembly.
● select a tool assembly that is already used in the document.
5. Select the Syntax tab page .
● Select the Initialize from PP words table checkbox to consult the tool change syntax defined in
the PP table that is referenced by the Part Operation.
● Otherwise, enter a PP instruction for your tool change. This user-defined syntax has no link with
the PP table and its validity is not checked by the program.
● If the PP Instruction comprises a sequence of PP word syntaxes, you can choose the sequence to
be used by means of the Sequence number spinner.
6. Click OK to create the tool change in the program.
You can click Replay Tool Path to visualize the tool at the tool change point.
This point is specified in the current Part Operation.
To generate tool changes automatically:
1. Right-click the Manufacturing Program entity in the specification tree and select Generate Tool
Changes.
The program is updated with all necessary tool changes. Each generated tool change is inserted just
before the first machining operation in the program that requires the tool change.
Initial program: Program after tool change generation:
MO1 using Tool1 Generated Tool change1
PP instruction MO1 using Tool1
MO2 using Tool2 PP instruction
PP instruction Generated Tool change2
MO3 using Tool2 MO2 using Tool2
MO4 using Tool3 PP instruction
MO3 using Tool2
Generated Tool change3
MO4 using Tool 3
To delete tool changes that were automatically generated:
1. Right-click the Manufacturing Program entity in the specification tree and select Delete Generated
Tool Changes.
All tool changes that were automatically generated are removed from the program.
Insert a Machine Rotation

This task shows how to insert a machine rotation in the program.
You can either add machine rotations manually or generate all necessary machine rotations
automatically in the program.
Note: For machines created using NC Machine Tool Builder, automatic generation of machine rotations
is not possible.
Either the program or a program entity must be current in the specification tree.
To add a machine rotation manually:

1. In the specification tree, select the program entity after which you want to add the machine
rotation, then select Machine Rotation .
For a default machine (see Machine Editor), the following Machine Rotation dialog box appears.
For a generic machine (that is, a machine created using NC Machine Tool Builder - see Machine
Editor), the dialog box has two extra attributes:
● Rotary Axis: Name of the rotary axis A, B or C
● Category: Table or Head, depending on the selected rotary axis.
Note that these attributes are taken into account in tool path computation.
This provides the possibility to manually create machine rotations on generic machines and allows
transitions to be managed between machining operations.
2. Select the Properties tab page to specify the characteristics of the machine rotation.
3. Specify the Rotary angle.
If the Definition combo is set to Manual, you can enter the angle value directly in the Rotary
angle field.
If the Definition combo is set to Selected, you can specify the angle value using the graphic
area in the dialog box:
1. Click the axis symbol in the graphic area then select an axis system in the 3D viewer.
2. Click the vector symbol in the graphic area then select a line or cylinder in the 3D viewer.
In this case the angle between the z-axis of the selected axis system and the line or
cylinder axis specifies the Rotary angle.
or
Click the point symbol in the graphic area then select a point in the 3D viewer.
In this case the angle between the z-axis of the selected axis system and the line through
the selected point and the axis system origin specifies the Rotary angle.
The machine table is rotated by this angle about the rotary axis (A, B or C).
The rotary axis is defined:
● on the default machine is set on the Part Operation
● in the Machine Rotation dialog box is a generic machine is set on the Part Operation.
4. Select the Rotary direction:

● Clockwise
● Counter-clockwise
● Shortest.
The Rotary type is set to Absolute in this version.

● Select the Initialize from PP words table checkbox to consult the machine rotation syntax
defined in the PP table that is referenced by the Part Operation.
● Otherwise, enter a PP instruction for your machine rotation. This user-defined syntax has no
link with the PP table and its validity is not checked by the program.
6. Click OK to accept creation of the machine rotation in the program.
To generate machine rotations automatically:

1. Right-click the Manufacturing Program entity in the specification tree and select Generate
Machine Rotations.
The program is updated with all necessary machine rotations.
Note: this capability is available when a default machine (see Machine Editor) is set on the Part
Operation.
To delete machine rotations that were automatically generated:

1. Right-click the Manufacturing Program entity in the specification tree and select Delete
Generated Machine Rotations.
All machine rotations that were automatically generated are removed from the program.
Insert a Machining Axis Change

This task shows how to insert a machining axis change in the program.
Output coordinates are computed in the current machining axis system as shown in the example
below.
Tool path computed in machining axis system AXS1 with origin (0,0,0):
$$*CATIA0
$$*AXS1
$$ 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000
GOTO/ -40.00000, -30.00000, 20.00000
GOTO/ -40.00000, 30.00000, 20.00000
Same tool path computed in machining axis system AXS2 with origin (0,0,20):
$$*CATIA0
$$*AXS2
$$ 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 20.00000
GOTO/ -40.00000, -30.00000, 0.00000
GOTO/ -40.00000, 30.00000, 0.00000
1. Select Machining Axis Change . The corresponding dialog box is displayed directly at the
Geometry tab page .

You can define your axis system with the help of the sensitive icon in the dialog box.
2. In the Axis name field, you can enter a name for the machining axis system being created. This
name will be displayed beside the representation of the axis system in the 3D view.
3. Select the symbol representing the origin in the sensitive icon, then select a point or a circle to
define the origin of the machining axis.
In addition to point selection, you can also specify a point by means of its coordinates as follows:
● right-click the symbol representing the origin in the sensitive icon
● select the Coordinates contextual command
● enter the point coordinates in the dialog box that appears.
Coordinates are expressed in the absolute axis system.

4. Select one of the axes (Z, for example) in the sensitive icon to specify the orientation of that axis.
The following dialog box appears.
The Z axis is the privileged axis. You should define it first, then specify the X axis. The XY plane is
perpendicular to the Z axis.
5. Select the desired method to specify the axis orientation using the combo:
● Manual. In this case, choose one of the following:
❍ Components to define the orientation by means of I, J and K components
❍ Angles to define the orientation by means of a rotation specified by means of one or two
angles:
Angle 1 about X, Angle 2 about Y
Angle 1 about Z, Angle 2 about X
Angle 1 about Y, Angle 2 about Z
● Selection. In this case just select a line or linear edge to define the orientation.
● Points in the View. In this case just select two points to define the orientation.
Just click OK to accept the specified orientation.

6. Repeat this procedure to specify the orientation of another axis (X, for example).
The specified origin along with the X and Z axes are sufficient to define the machining axis
system.
You can also define a machining axis by selecting one of the triangular areas in the sensitive icon.
In this case you must select an existing axis system and position it by selecting a point in the 3D
view.
7. You can click the Origin checkbox if you want to specify an origin statement in the NC data
output.
For certain machine types it may be useful to specify an origin number and group. This will result
in the following type of output syntax:
$$*CATIA0
$$Origin.1
$$ 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000
ORIGIN/ 0.00000,0.00000,0.00000, 1, 1
This output is for an origin with coordinates (0,0,0) and whose origin number and group are both
equal to 1.
● Select the Initialize from PP words table checkbox to consult the Machining Axis Change
syntax defined in the PP table that is referenced by the Part Operation.
● Otherwise, enter a PP instruction for your machining axis change. This user-defined syntax
has no link with the PP table and its validity is not checked by the program.
9. Click OK to create the machining axis change in the program. A feature representation of the
corresponding Machining Axis System is created in the 3D view.
Please note the following:
● It is possible to analyze the geometry referenced by a machining axis system. This geometry
may be a point, line, surface, or an axis defined in the design part. Right-click any sensitive
area in the dialog box, and select the Analyze. The Geometry Analyser dialog box appears
giving the referenced geometry, its name and status.
● A machining axis system can be shared by several machining axis change operations.
Machining axis systems can be listed in Manufacturing View using the Sort by Features
command.
Insert a PP Instruction
This task shows how to insert a PP instruction in the program.
1. In the specification tree, select a reference program entity. The PP instruction will be added after this
entity in the program.
2. Select Post-Processor Instruction .
The Post-Processor Instruction dialog box appears, allowing you to enter the syntax of a PP instruction.
3. Enter one or more PP word syntaxes directly in the text area as shown below.
4. Click to access the PP Words Selection Assistant dialog box.

The content of the PP words table that is referenced in the current part operation is available for
selection in this dialog box.
5. Select the desired major word. If syntaxes are defined for this major word in the table, they are also
available for selection.
Your selection is displayed in the Current Selection area. If the selected syntax contains parameters
(&RVAL, for example ), you will be prompted to complete the syntax with numerical values. Pease refer
to PP Tables and Word Syntaxes for more information.
Click Apply to add the selected syntax to the PP instruction.

6. Click OK to create the PP instruction in the program.

● You can display the syntax of the PP instruction in a larger, resizable dialog box (16 lines of 72
characters) by clicking on the Larger View icon.
● A default contextual menu providing edition facilities is available by right-clicking in the text area
(Undo/Cut/Copy/Paste/Delete/Select All).
● A Refresh icon is available to refresh the PP word syntax to take into account parameter
modification in the other tab pages of the editor.
● You can define a PP instruction that references user parameters created in a design part, and output
the result in the APT source when the PP instruction is processed.
● The program does not check the validity of your syntax.
Insert a COPY Operator
This task shows how to apply a COPY Operator to a delimited sequence of operations in the program.
The sequence is delimited by COPY-INDEX type instructions.
Open the CopyTransfoSample.CATPart document.
1. Create a first Pocketing operation on the first square cut-out. Create a second Pocketing
operation using a different tool on the first triangular cut-out. To create these pockets, make
sure that the Island Detection contextual command is not active when define the pocket
bottom.
2. Right-click the Manufacturing Program and select Compute Tool Path. Select the Compute if
necessary option in the pop-up that appears.
3. Select the second Pocketing operation in the program.
Select COPY Operator .
A COPY Operator is inserted in the program after Pocketing.2 and the COPY Operator dialog box
appears.
4. Select to create an INDEX instruction.

Select an entity in the program to specify the insertion level.
In this scenario, select Tool Change.1 to insert the INDEX instruction before that tool change.
The COPY Operator will apply to the two tool changes and the two pocketing operations.
5. Set the desired number of copies to 3.
6. Set the Transformation type to Translation.
Choose the Translation type to Absolute Coordinates.
Specify the translation by setting the Distance along X to -100mm.
7. Click Tool Path Replay to visualize the tool path resulting from the defined COPY Operator.
The possible transformation types are as follows.

● Translation: choose the desired translation type then specify the translation by:
❍ either giving X, Y, Z components in the absolute or the current machining axis system
❍ or clicking the Direction area to select a linear geometric element for the direction and
giving a length.
● Rotation: click the Axis area to select a linear geometric element as the axis of rotation then
give a rotation angle. If a circular edge is selected, the normal axis of the circle is used.
● Mirror: click the Mirror area to select a planar geometric element as the axis of symmetry.
● Axis to axis: click the From area to select a first machining axis system then the To area to
select a second machining axis system. The first axis system will be transformed into the
second axis system.
● Affinity: select a Machining Axis System and define 3 scale factors to be applied along each
of its axes: x,y,z. The transformation matrix in the selected Machining Axis System will be:
● Scale: select a planar surface or a point and a scale factor to be applied along the normal
projection on the selected element.
● Matrix: This transformation will be defined by the matrix definition of the transformation in
the absolute Axis System, the current Machining Axis System, or a selected Machining Axis
System.
In case of definition of the matrix in the absolute Axis System or in the current Machining
Axis, the matrix of the transformation is stored in the model in the absolute Axis System (it is
invariant in this Axis System).
Choosing one or the other mode only changes the display of the coordinates of the matrix.
Out of a current Machining Axis System context, the Absolute Axis System will be used to
display the matrix.
In case of definition of the matrix in a selected Machining Axis System, the matrix of the
transformation is stored relatively to this selected Machining Axis System.
You can create an INDEX/NOMORE instruction in the program by clicking .
You can select an existing INDEX to be associated to the COPY operator by clicking .
8. If needed, select the Syntax tab page to consult the syntax that will be applied for the
COPY operator.
9. Click OK to create the COPY Operator in the program.
Status Management
COPY Operator will show an Exclamation mask in standard cases:
● a reference geometry has been deleted

● INDEX and INDEX/NOMORE are inconsistent.
COPY Operator will show an Update mask in standard cases:
● reference geometry has been modified

● a parameter has been modified.
COPY Operator can be computed if all the referenced operations:
● are Up to date or Locked

● have a Tool Path.
Deactivated Operations
Deactivated operations in the reference sequence are not taken into account when the Copy is
processed.
Insert a TRACUT Operator
This task shows how to apply a TRACUT Operator to a delimited sequence of operations in the
program.
The sequence is delimited by TRACUT-TRACUT/NOMORE type instructions.
1. Create a first Pocketing operation on the first square cut-out. Create a second Pocketing
operation using a different tool on the first triangular cut-out. To create these pockets, make
sure that the Island Detection contextual command is not active before you define the pocket
bottom.
2. Right-click the Manufacturing Program and select the Compute Tool Path contextual menu.
Select the Compute if necessary option in the pop-up that appears.
3. Select Tool Change.1 in the program.
Select TRACUT Operator .
A TRACUT Operator is inserted in the program before Tool Change.1 and the TRACUT Operator
dialog box appears.
4. Select to create a TRACUT/NOMORE instruction.

Select an entity in the program to specify the insertion level.
In this scenario, select Pocketing.2 to insert the TRACUT/NOMORE instruction after that
operation.
The TRACUT Operator will apply to the two tool changes and the two pocketing operations.

giving a length.
● Mirror: click the Mirror area to select a planar geometric element as the axis of symmetry.
second axis system.
● Affinity: select a machining axis system and define 3 scale factors to be applied along each
of its axes: x,y,z. The transformation matrix in the selected machining axis system will be:
● Scale: select a planar surface or a point and a scale factor to be applied along the normal
projection on the selected element.
● Matrix: This transformation will be defined by the matrix definition of the transformation in
the absolute axis system, the current machining axis system, or a selected machining axis
system.
In case of definition of the matrix in the absolute axis system or in the current machining axis
system, the matrix of the transformation is stored in the model in the absolute axis system (it
is invariant in this axis system).
Out of a current machining axis system context, the absolute axis system will be used to
display the matrix.
In case of definition of the matrix in a selected machining axis system, the matrix of the
transformation is stored relatively to this selected machining axis system.
6. If needed, select the Syntax tab page to consult the syntax that will be applied for the
TRACUT operator.
7. Click OK to create the TRACUT Operator in the program.
8. To visualize the tool path resulting from the defined TRACUT Operator, select the first tool change
in the program then click the Replay Tool Path .
Make sure that the TRACUT display mode is active in the Tool Path Replay dialog box.
Replay the tool changes and pocketing operations.

Close the dialog box at the end of the replay.

Status management
TRACUT Operator will show an Exclamation mask in standard cases:
● a reference geometry has been deleted.
TRACUT Operator will show an Update mask in standard cases:

Insert a Copy-Transformation Instruction
This task shows how to apply a Copy-Transformation instruction to a selected list of operations in the
program. The selected list does not necessarily correspond to a sequence in the program. However, the
operations must have the same tooling.
1. Create a first Pocketing operation on the first square cut-out, then a second Pocketing operation on
the first triangular cut-out. To create these pockets, make sure that the Island Detection
contextual command is not active when define the pocket bottom.
2. Select the second Pocketing operation in the program.
Select Copy-Transformation Instruction .
A Copy-Transformation instruction is inserted in the program after Pocketing.2 and the Copy-
Transformation dialog box appears.
3. Click Add Operations then select the two Pocketing operations in the program.
The Copy-Transformation will apply to these two operations.

Selected operations must have the same tooling.
Move Up and Move Down allow you to move the selected operation up or down in the
list. Delete allows you to delete selected operations.

4. Set the desired number of copies to 3.
5. Set Ordering to Each operation N times.

7. You can click Replay to visualize the tool path resulting from the defined Copy-Transformation.
With the Each operation N times Ordering setting, the transformation is applied to the 3 square
cut-outs first then to the 3 triangular cut-outs.
With the All operations N times Ordering setting, the transformation is applied to the first set of
square and triangular cut-outs, then the second set, and finally the third set.

giving a length.
● Mirror: click the Mirror area to select a planar geometric element as the axis of symmetry
second axis system.
● Scale: select a Machining Axis System and define 3 scale factors to be applied along each of its
axes: x,y,z. The transformation matrix in the selected Machining Axis System will be:
● Affinity: select a planar surface, a linear edge, or a point and a scale factor to be applied along
the normal projection on the selected element.
● Matrix: This transformation will be defined by the matrix definition of the transformation in the
absolute Axis System, the current Machining Axis System, or a selected Machining Axis System.
In case of definition of the matrix in the absolute Axis System or in the current Machining Axis,
the matrix of the transformation is stored in the model in the absolute Axis System (it is
invariant in this Axis System).
Out of a current Machining Axis System context, the absolute Axis System will be used to
display the matrix.
In case of definition of the matrix in a selected Machining Axis System, the matrix of the
transformation is stored relatively to this selected Machining Axis System.
8. Click OK to create the Copy-Transformation instruction in the program.
NC Data Output Considerations

Copy-Transformation allows you to produce NC data that takes into account the specificities of the
selected machining operations (Cycle syntax or Goto statements, Compensation, Profile, Tip/Axis,
Contact/Norm, PQR, and so on).
During NC data generation, the tool path of the Copy-Transformation of an ordered list of machining
operations will, for each of its sub-paths corresponding to a specific machining operation, read the
complementary information on this machining operation to associate to the particular treatment of this
sub-path.
If the Cycle syntax is ON in a selected machining operation, the sub-path will be output is this mode.
The tolerance and discretization step of the selected machining operation are taken into account to
process double points for this sub-path.
If profile data exists on an operation, the sub-path will be output in this mode.
Compensation data will be read for this sub-path on the selected machining operation.
The Copy-Transformation output will take into account data available in the tool path and in the elected
machining operations.
If a Copy-Transformation references various machining operations with specific data that differs from
one operation to another, each sub-path of the Copy-Transformation will be processed individually.
Machining operations using CYCLE syntaxes and GOTO statements can be mixed in a Copy-
Transformation: the output will be composed of CYCLE syntaxes and GOTO statements.
Deactivated machining operations are taken into account for the computation of a Copy-
Transformation.
Status Management
Copy-Transformation will show an Exclamation mask in standard cases:
● a reference geometry has been deleted

● all referenced operations have been deleted.
Copy-Transformation will show an Update mask in standard cases:

● a referenced operation has been modified or deleted
Copy-Transformation can be computed if all the referenced operations:
● have the same tooling

● are Up to date or Locked
● have a Tool Path.
Copy-Transformation and the Tool Path Editor

You can create a Copy-Transformation in the program when using the Tool Path Editor.
Before cutting an area of the tool path, you can choose to copy the area in the specification tree as
follows:
● Select the Area Selection Option icon in the Tool Path Editor toolbar.
● Select the Copy-Transformation checkbox in the Selection Options dialog box that appears.
● Select the Cut icon and select an operation in the specification tree.
The Copy-Transformation is created after the selected operation.
In this case the Copy-Transformation dialog box includes a Tooling tab page .
This allows you to change the tool or tool assembly of the Copy-Transformation created with the Tool
Path Editor's Cut command.
Double-click the Copy-Transformation instruction and select the Tool tab in the dialog box that
appears. Modify the tool as desired.
Click OK to accept the tool modification and update the PPR tree.
Previous Version Instruction

A Copy-Transformation instruction created in R9 which has lost its reference operation (operation
deleted or replaced by a tool path by means of Add Tool Paths command in R9) behaves like a Copy-
Transformation instruction created using the Tool Path Editor and the Cut command.

This task shows how to easily and quickly define the complete manufacturing program of a
symmetrical workpiece, when a symmetrical half of the workpiece is already programmed.
More information can be found in the Methodology section.

Open the ProcessDEMO.CATProcess document. The associated part is Left_Hand_Part.CATPart. The Left
Program contains 3 machining operations for machining a left hand part.
To machine the symmetrical right hand part, proceed as follows.

1. Copy the Left Program in the Part Operation using Edit > Copy and Paste commands.
Rename the new program as Right Program (using Edit > Properties).
2. Select the Right Program node in the tree and click TRACUT Operator .
3. In the TRACUT Operator dialog box, select the Transformation type to Mirror.
Click the Mirror selection field then select the YZ plane as the symmetrical plane.
Click OK to create the TRACUT operator.

4. Select the Right Program node in the tree and click Opposite Hand Machining Options .
In the dialog box that appears, make sure that Reverse Machining Conditions command can be
applied to all the operations types in the program.
5. Click Reverse Machining Conditions .
A message box appears giving the result of the command: numbers of operations processed and
number of operations updated.
6. Right-click the Right Program node in the tree and select Compute Tool Path.
The tool paths of the Right Program are recalculated.
7. Right-click the Right Program node in the tree and select Replay Tool Path. Make sure that the
TRACUT display mode is active in the Replay dialog box.
The replay shows the result of the opposite hand programming.
8. Save your document (ProcessDEMOResult.CATProcess, for example).

In most cases, your program may need to be finalized by means of some local editing. You can
use:
● Reorder Operations List to reverse the order of one or more groups of operations
● Inverse Macros to inverse the approach and retract macros on an operation.

Machining Entities
This section deals with creating and managing the specific entities of the machining environment (other than
machining operations and auxiliary commands).
Resources:
● Edit the Tool of a Machining Operation: Double-click the machining operation in the program and select the
Tool tab page to edit the tool characteristics or search for another one.
● Edit a Tool in the Resource List: Double-click a tool in the resource list and edit the tool characteristics in
the Tool Definition dialog box.
● Edit the Tool Assembly of a Machining Operation: Double-click the machining operation in the program and
select the Tool Assembly tab page to edit the tool assembly characteristics or search for another one.
● Edit a Tool Assembly in the Resource List: Double-click a tool assembly in the resource list and edit the tool
characteristics in the Tool Definition dialog box.
● Create a Tool Catalog from the Resource List: Right-click a tool in the resource list then select Send to
Catalog
● Replace Tools in Resource List: Click Replace Tools to rename tools already used in your document.
● Manage Tools in the Resource List and TDM:

❍ access TDM and import a pre-defined tool list to the resource list
❍ create a tool list in TDM from selected tools in the resource list.
● Use Tooling Resources from TDM:

❍ define feeds and speeds on tools using the TDM database
❍ retrieve tool correctors for tools from the TDM database.
● Specify Tool Compensation Information: Double-click a tool referenced in the program or resource list and
specify the tool compensation information in the Compensation tab page of the Tool Definition dialog box .
● Define the Tool Axis: Select the Tool axis symbol in the machining operation editor, then use one of the
available modes to specify the orientation of the tool axis.
Machining Features:
● Create and Use a Machining Pattern: Select Insert > Machining Feature > Machining Pattern then select a
pattern of holes to be machined.
● Manufacturing View: Select a feature using the Manufacturing view and create operations based on this
feature.
Macros:
● Define Macros on a Milling Operation: Select the Macros tab page when creating or editing a milling
operation, then specify the transition paths of the macros to be used in the operation.
● Define Macros on an Axial Machining Operation: Select the Macros tab page when creating or editing an
axial machining operation, then specify the transition paths of the macros to be used in the operation.
● Define Macros on a Turning Operation: Select the Macros tab page when creating or editing a turning
operation, then specify the transition paths of the macros to be used in the operation.
● Build and Use a Macros Catalog.
General capabilities:
● Manage the Status of Manufacturing Entities: Use the status lights to know whether or not your operation
is correctly defined.
● Design or User Parameters in PP Instruction and APT Output.

Edit the Tool of a Machining Operation

This task shows you how to edit the tool of a machining operation. A machining operation always has a tool assigned to it (default
tool, for example).
You can modify this tool in several ways:
● edit its characteristics, thereby creating a new tool
● replace it by selecting another tool that is already used in the document
● replace it by selecting another tool by means of a query.
1. Double-click the operation in the program. The machining operation dialog box appears. Select the Tooling tab page
then select the Tool tab .

2. To create a new tool:
If you want to change tool type, select the icon corresponding to the desired tool type. In this case the corresponding tool
representation appears in the 2D viewer.
● Double-click the geometric parameter that you want to modify in the 2D viewer, then enter the desired value in the Edit
Parameters dialog box that appears. Modify other parameters in the same way. The tool representation is updated to take
the new values into account.
● Click More to expand the dialog box to access all the tool's parameters.
Modify the values as desired.
● Use the spinner to increment the Tool number.
● Enter a name for the new tool.
3. To select a tool that is already used in the document:

● Select the button opposite Name.
● Select the desired tool from the list of tools already used in your document.
● The tool representation is displayed in the 2D viewer. It can be edited as described above.
4. To select another tool by means of a query:

● Click the Select a tool with query icon opposite Name. The Search Tool dialog box appears.
● Use the Look in combo to specify where you want to search for the tool:
❍ in the current document
❍ in a tool catalog
❍ in an external tool database such as the TDM (Tool Data Management) or CATIA Version 4 Manufacturing database.
● If you want to change tool type, select the icon corresponding to the desired tool.
● You can do a quick search in the Simple tab page by means of a character string on the tool name or a value for the tool's
nominal diameter. The tools meeting the simple search criteria are listed.
● Select the desired tool from the list and click OK.
The tool representation is displayed in the 2D viewer. It can be edited as described above.
● You can search a tool using finer constraints by selecting the Advanced tab page.
The example below shows the result of a search for a tool with body diameter between 8mm and 12mm in the catalog
ToolsSample02.
5. Click OK to confirm using this new tool in the operation.

Cutting conditions (feeds and speeds) can be included in a tool catalog and in the TDM. Please refer to Feeds and Speeds for
more information.
The TDB can allow several cutting speed and feedrate data for each tool. This information is displayed at tool selection time.
The feed and speed information of the selected tool is used in the machining operation definition.
Realistic DXF user representation of tools can be selected from the TDB. These can be used in tool path replay as well as Photo
and Video simulations.
Edit a Tool in the Resource List

This task shows you how to edit a tool that is already used in your document.
1. To edit a tool in the resource list, right-click it and select Edit NC Resources.
The Tool Definition dialog box is displayed allowing you to edit the tool's geometric, technological,
cutting condition, and compensation characteristics.
2. If needed, enter a new name for the tool. You can also assign a comment.
3. If needed, use the spinner to increment the Tool number.
4. Click More to expand the dialog box to access the Geometry, Technology, Feeds & Speeds, and
Compensation tab pages.
2. If needed, enter a new name for the tool assembly.
You can also assign a comment.

3. If needed, use the spinner to change the Tool number.
4. Click More to expand the dialog box to access the Geometry and Technology tab pages.
5. You can specify the tool assembly geometry in two ways:
● double-click a parameter in the 2D viewer and enter the desired value in the Edit Parameter
dialog box that appears
● or enter the desired values in the Geometry tab page.

In both cases the 2D viewer is refreshed after each modification to a geometric parameter.
You can use the Tool holder stages spinner to define between two and five stages on the tool
holder of the assembly.
For two stages, specify the two tool holder diameters (D2 and D3) and two cone
diameters (d1 and d2). Suitable values for the cone diameters allow the stages to be
tapered.
For five stages, specify the five tool holder diameters (D2 to D6) and five cone
diameters (d1 to d5). Suitable values for the cone diameters allow the stages to be
tapered.
6. Click the Technology tab and enter the desired values for the tool assembly's technological
parameters.
7. Click OK to accept the modifications made to the tool assembly.

A CATPart or CATProduct representation can be assigned to the tool assembly by means of the
Add User Representation contextual command in the Resource List. In this case, if a
component (tool, for example) of the assembly has a user representation, it will not be taken into
account.
Edit the Tool Assembly of a Machining Operation

This task shows you how to create and edit the tool assembly of a machining operation.
You can modify this tool assembly in several ways:
● edit its characteristics, thereby creating a new tool assembly
● replace it by selecting another tool assembly that is already used in the document
● replace it by selecting another tool assembly by means of a query.
1. Double-click the operation in the program. The machining operation dialog box appears. Select the
Tooling tab page then select the Tool Assembly tab .
2. To create a new tool assembly:

● Enter a name for the new tool assembly. A tool assembly representation appears in the 2D
viewer.
● Double-click the geometric parameter that you want to modify in the 2D viewer, then enter the
desired value in the Edit Parameters dialog box that appears. Modify other parameters in the
same way. The tool assembly representation is updated to take the new values into account.
● Click More to expand the dialog box to access all the tool assembly parameters.
Modify the values as desired.
● Use the spinner to increment the Tool number.
3. To select a tool assembly that is already used in the document:

● Select the button opposite Name.
● Select the desired tool assembly from the list of tool assemblies already used in your document.
● The tool assembly representation is displayed in the 2D viewer. It can be edited as described
above.
4. To select another tool assembly by means of a query:

● Click the Select a tool assembly with query icon opposite Name. The Search Tool Assembly
dialog box appears.
● Use the Look in combo to specify where you want to search for the tool:
❍ in the current document
❍ in a tool catalog
❍ in an external tool database such as the TDM (Tool Data Management) or CATIA Version 4
Manufacturing database.
● If you want to change the tool type associated with the tool assembly, select the icon
corresponding to the desired tool.
● You can do a quick search in the Simple tab page by means of a character string on the tool
assembly name. The tool assemblies meeting the simple search criteria are listed.
● Select the desired tool assembly from the list and click OK.
The tool assembly representation is displayed in the 2D viewer. It can be edited as described
above.
You can search a tool assembly using finer constraints by selecting the Advanced tab page.
The example below shows the result of a search in the TDM catalog for a tool assembly whose tool
has a nominal diameter greater than 5mm.
5. Click OK to confirm using this new tool assembly in the operation.

Edit a Tool Assembly in the Resource List

This task shows you how to edit a tool assembly that is already used in your document.
1. To edit a tool assembly in the Resource List, right-click it and select Edit NC Resources.
The Tool Assembly Definition dialog box is displayed allowing you to edit the tool assembly's
geometric and technological characteristics.
2. If needed, enter a new name for the tool assembly.
You can also assign a comment.

3. If needed, use the spinner to change the Tool number.
4. Click More to expand the dialog box to access the Geometry and Technology tab pages.
5. You can specify the tool assembly geometry in two ways:
● double-click a parameter in the 2D viewer and enter the desired value in the Edit Parameter
dialog box that appears
● or enter the desired values in the Geometry tab page.

In both cases the 2D viewer is refreshed after each modification to a geometric parameter.
You can use the Tool holder stages spinner to define between two and five stages on the tool
holder of the assembly.
For two stages, specify the two tool holder diameters (D2 and D3) and two cone
diameters (d1 and d2). Suitable values for the cone diameters allow the stages to be
tapered.
For five stages, specify the five tool holder diameters (D2 to D6) and five cone
diameters (d1 to d5). Suitable values for the cone diameters allow the stages to be
tapered.
6. Click the Technology tab and enter the desired values for the tool assembly's technological
parameters.
7. Click OK to accept the modifications made to the tool assembly.

A CATPart or CATProduct representation can be assigned to the tool assembly by means of the
Add User Representation contextual command in the Resource List. In this case, if a
component (tool, for example) of the assembly has a user representation, it will not be taken into
account.
Create a Tool Catalog from the Resource List

This task shows you how to create a tool catalog from selected tools in the resource list.
A tool catalog can contain tool assemblies, tools and tool inserts.
1. Select tools in the resource list, then right-click to select Send to Catalog.
The Save in Catalog dialog box is displayed allowing you to create a new tool catalog or overwrite an existing one..
2. To create a new tool catalog, click the [...] button to navigate to the desired folder and enter a name for the catalog.
To overwrite an existing tool catalog, click the [...] button to navigate to the desired catalog.
3. Click OK to create the new or updated catalog. The resulting tool catalog appears in a new Catalog Editor window.
You can also build a tools catalog by customizing an Excel file and a VB macro file.
Replace Tools in the Resource List

This task shows you how to rename tools already used in your document. You can do this:
● automatically by means of new references listed in a tool replacement catalog
● manually by entering new names in a dialog box.
1. Click Replace Tools .
The Replace Tools dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Tool Table combo choose either Manual Mode or a tool replacement catalog.
You must have previously prepared this catalog with the desired names. A sample catalog is delivered in
.../Startup/Manufacturing/Tools/ToolsReplacement.catalog.
3. Using the manual mode:

● select a tool to be renamed in the list then enter the new name in the To area
● if needed, change other tool references in the same way
● click OK to update all the tools in the document with the new references.
4. Using the tool replacement catalog:

● when you select the desired catalog, all the new tool references are listed opposite the old references
● click OK to update all the tools in the document with the new references.
An example of the PPR tree before and after the update is shown below:
Note that tool path storage information is not modified by this update.
Manage Tools in the Resource List and TDM

This task shows you how to:
● access TDM and import a pre-defined tool list to the PPR Resource List
● create a tool list in TDM from selected tools in the PPR Resource List.
Import a tool list from the TDM to the Resource List
1. Open a Machining workbench (no CATPart or CATProduct document is needed at this stage). The
manufacturing document is initialized as follows.
2. Select Import/List Tools in the Auxiliary Commands toolbar.
The Search Tool dialog box appears. Select TDM from the combo list.
3.
Select Tool List Mode Access that appears at the end of the line of icons.
The Tool List Selection dialog box appears showing the tool lists currently in the TDM database.
4.
5. Filter the list. The example below shows how to enter a string to display the tool lists referenced
by a given machine (the % character represents a character string).
6. Select the desired tool list and click OK. The Search Tool dialog box is updated.
If Tool preview after selection is set in Tools > Options > Machining > Resources, an image is
displayed of any tool selected in the Search tool list. Please refer to Resource settings.
7. Select the tools that you want to import to the resource list and click OK. The PPR Resource List is
updated with the selected tools.
Create a tool list in the TDM from tools selected in the Resource List
1. Select the tools in the PPR Resource List that you want to include in a TDM tool list.
2. Right-click the selected tools and select Create TDM Tool List from the NC Resources menu.
3. The Tool List Definition dialog box appears. Enter an identifier for the new tool list. Also enter
names for the NC program, part, and NC machine. Click Create.
4. Select Import/List Tools in the Auxiliary Commands toolbar.
The Search Tool dialog box appears. Make sure TDM and Tool List Mode Access are
selected.
Click the [...] button opposite Tool List ID. The tool List Selection dialog box appears.
5. If needed, enter the % character in the Tool List ID field to display all the existing tool lists.
6. Select the tool list that you have just created (identifier A_TOOL_LIST) to check that this list
contains the tools that you selected from the PPR tree.
Use Tooling Resources from TDM

This task shows some of the capabilities available when the TDM connection is available:
● defining feeds and speeds on tools using the TDM database. Feeds and speeds can be selected according to a
specified machine tool and material.
● retrieving tool correctors for tools from the TDM database.
Defining feeds and speeds on tools
1. Double-click a Tool Change activity in the program. The Tool Change dialog box appears at the Tool tab .
2. Select the Tool Assembly tab .
3. Click the Select a tool assembly with query icon opposite Name. The Search Tool Assembly dialog box appears.
Select a machine. This filters the displayed lists to the tool assemblies and tools of that machine.
Note that a material can also be selected to further reduce the lists.
4. Select the desired tool assembly and associated tool.
5. As multiple feeds and speeds can be defined in TDM for an assembly, you must choose on from the displayed list.
The Tool Change dialog box is updated with the selected tooling.
Select the More button then select Feeds and Speeds tab to see the feedrate, cutting speed and other information of
the selected tool.
Retrieving tool correctors from the TDM
6. In the Tool tab select the More button. Select the Compensation tab to display the list of tool correctors
retrieved from TDM.
Specify Tool Compensation

This task shows you how to specify tool compensation information.
1. Select the Compensation tab page of the Tool Definition dialog box.
2. Right-click the desired compensation site to either edit or add tool compensation data.
The Compensation Definition dialog box is displayed allowing you to specify the tool's compensation characteristics.
3. You can associate the following information to each compensation site on a tool:
● corrector identifier
● corrector number
● radius number (if Radius compensation is allowed on the machine referenced by the part operation)
● tool diameter in order to specify the exact location of the compensation site (if allowed for the tool). Site P2 of a drill, for
example.
The following tool types have only one compensation site. This is the site P1 located at the extremity of the tool.
End mill Face mill Boring tool

Tap Reamer
Thread mill
The following tool types have more than one compensation site. Some sites are defined by means of a diameter value.
Drill Multi-diameter drill Center drill
Spot drill Boring and chamfering tool T-slotter

Conical mill Countersink Two sides chamfering tool
4. Click OK to update the tool with the desired compensation information.

It is possible to define tool compensation site numbers for all machining operation types, if tool compensation numbers are
already defined on the tool used by the machining operation.
In general, the tool compensation site number used by the operation can be specified.
For operations such as Boring and Chamfering, Chamfering Two Sides or Contouring (when a T-slotter is used), two tool
compensation site numbers can be used during machining.
For turning operations, tools (that is, insert holder and insert) have nine compensation sites P1 to P9. Their position depends on
the type of insert used. Please refer to the Lathe Machining User's Guide for more information about cutter compensation.
Define the Tool Axis

This task shows how to define the tool axis orientation by means of the Tool Axis dialog box.
1. Select the tool axis symbol in the machining operation editor.
The Tool Axis dialog box appears.

2. Select one of the modes that are proposed for defining the tool axis.
Manual
Select Manual from the combo, then choose one of the following:
● Components to define the tool axis orientation by means of I, J and K components.
● Angles to define the orientation by means of a rotation specified by means of one or two angles.
❍ Angle 1 about X, Angle 2 about Y

the tool axis is a rotated an Angle 1 about the x-axis, then rotated an Angle 2 about the y-axis
Machining pattern nodes are also displayed in the Manufacturing View sorted by Machining Features.
If the Part Operation contains parameters, relations or formula, these will be displayed in the
Manufacturing View sorted by Features.
Parameters can be added on machining operations and features in the Knowledge Advisor
workbench. In this case the Manufacturing View sorted by Machining Features displays a generic
node named Parameters under the machining object node. Under this node the parameter node
appears with its name, its value and/or its formula (depending on the Knowledge parameter display
setting).
In the Machining workbench, you can edit a parameter by double-clicking it. If a formula has been
added on the parameter, you can edit it by double-clicking the parameter, then clicking the f(x)
button.
Select one of the design features and close the dialog box. The points in this design pattern will
be used to create the machining pattern.
You can also select points in the 3D view to be included in the machining pattern.
It is possible to reference in a machining pattern one or more 3D Wireframe features (that is,
Projection, Symmetry, Rotation and Translation operators) containing at least one point.
2. The Machining Pattern dialog box is updated with the number of selected points.
3. Click OK to create the machining pattern.
Use a machining pattern in a machining operation
1. Select Drilling . The Drilling dialog box appears directly at the Geometry tab page.
This tab page includes a sensitive icon to help you specify the geometry of the hole or hole
pattern to be machined.
2. Select the red hole depth representation then select the machining pattern from the combo list.
The pattern is highlighted in the model.
3. Click OK to create the drilling operation: the holes of the machining pattern will be drilled by this
operation.
Manufacturing View
This task shows you how to use the Manufacturing View for feature based NC programming.
You can display the Manufacturing View sorted by Features, Operations, Patterns, Tooling or Machining
Features. Just right-click the Manufacturing View to access the following menu:
You can delete unused machining features from the Manufacturing View using the following contextual
commands:
1. Select Manufacturing View to display the Manufacturing View.

2. Select a feature in the View (Hole5, for example).
The operations to be created will be attached to this feature.

3. To attach a spot drilling operation to the feature, select Spot Drilling . The Spot Drilling dialog
box appears.
Select the Geometry tab page. This tab page includes a sensitive icon to help you specify the
geometry of the hole or hole pattern to be machined.
4. Click the 1 Point sensitive text in the dialog box, then select the points to be included along with
Hole5 in the machining pattern (Hole6, Hole7, Hole8, for example).
The icon is updated with this information.

5. Click OK to create the Spot Drilling operation, which is created with Machining Pattern.1 comprising
4 holes. The Manufacturing View is updated.
6. Select Drilling .
In Geometry tab page of the Drilling dialog box, click the No Points sensitive text in the dialog box,
then select Machining Pattern.1 from the displayed list.
7. Click OK to create the Drilling operation, which is created with Machining Pattern.2, which
references Machining Pattern.1 for the position of the four holes in the pattern. The Manufacturing
View is updated.
8. Replay the two operations in the program to check that they both use the selected machining
pattern based on the initial feature selection.
If you edit the Machining Pattern.1 (to include more points, for example) both the Spot Drilling and
Drilling operations will be updated.
You can use the contextual menu to sort the Manufacturing View by Patterns.
The machining pattern nodes can be expanded to show machining pattern geometry, machining
pattern technology, and axial operation information. Right-clicking the machining pattern gives
access to contextual commands for copying and creating new patterns.
Machining pattern nodes are also displayed in the Manufacturing View sorted by Machining Features.
If the Part Operation contains parameters, relations or formula, these will be displayed in the
Manufacturing View sorted by Features.
Parameters can be added on machining operations and features in the Knowledge Advisor
workbench. In this case the Manufacturing View sorted by Machining Features displays a generic
node named Parameters under the machining object node. Under this node the parameter node
appears with its name, its value and/or its formula (depending on the Knowledge parameter display
setting).
In the Machining workbench, you can edit a parameter by double-clicking it. If a formula has been
added on the parameter, you can edit it by double-clicking the parameter, then clicking the f(x)
button.
Define Macros on a Milling Operation

This task shows you how to define macros on a milling operation.
This is done using the Macros tab page of the machining operation editor. In this example you will
add circular approach, circular retract, and linking macros to a Profile Contouring operation.
Predefined Macros
You can use predefined macros. These are made up from one or more paths in a specific order. Just select
the desired mode in the Current Macro Toolbox. You can then adjust parameters of the macro (such as path
length and feedrate).
User-Built Macros
You can also build your own macros using the Build by user mode.
Depending on the context, you can use the following icons to specify macro paths:
tangent motion
normal motion
axial motion
circular motion
ramping motion
PP word
motion perpendicular to a plane
axial motion to a plane
motion perpendicular to a line
distance along a given direction
tool axis motion
motion to a point.
In addition, the following icons allow you to:
remove all macro paths
remove current macro paths
copy the paths defined on the Approach macro on to the approach paths of other macros or
copy the paths defined on the Retract macro on to the retract paths of other macros.
Macro Edition
A sensitive icon representing the elementary paths of the macro will help you to build or edit your macro.
The current macro path is colored violet. Right-clicking a macro path gives you access to a contextual menu.
● Deactivate: Deactivates the selected macro path.

● Activate: Activates a path that was previously deactivated.
● Feedrate: Allows you to modify the feedrate type associated to the selected macro path by making a
selection in the sub-menu. If local is selected, you can assign a local feedrate value.
● Parameter: Gives access to parameters of the selected macro path.
● Delete: Deletes the selected macro path.
● Insert: Inserts a macro path depending on the type chosen in the sub-menu.
Inherited Macros
If you create a machining operation and there are other operations of the same type in the program, the
new operation will inherit the macros used in the most-recently edited operation of the same type. An
operation is considered edited when you click OK to quit the operation definition dialog box.
Create a Profile Contouring operation as described in the Prismatic Machining User's Guide.
1. Double-click the Profile Contouring operation in the specification tree to edit that operation.
2.
Select the Macros tab page in the operation definition dialog box. The initial status of all the
macros in the Macro Management list is Inactive.
3. Right-click the Approach macro line and activate the macro by means of Activate.
In the Current Macro Toolbox select the Circular horizontal axial mode.
A sensitive icon representing the 3 elementary paths of this macro appears.
4. Double-click each elementary path to display a dialog box that allows you to specify the exact
characteristics the path.
The following dialog box allows you to specify the exact characteristics of the circular path.
Set the values of the circular approach paths so as to have a 10mm vertical path followed by a 15mm
radius circular path.
5. You can then click Replay to check the circular approach. The status of the macro becomes Up to
date.
6. Activate the Retract macro in the Macro Management list and create a circular retract macro in the
same way.
7. Select the Linking Retract macro line in the Macro Management list, then in the Current macro Toolbox
select the Axial mode.
8. Double-click the displayed value, then assign a 20mm value to the retract path.
9. Select the Linking Approach line in the Macro Management list, then select the Axial mode. Assign a
20mm value to the approach path.
10. In the Options tab, click the Cornerized clearance with radius checkbox, then enter a corner radius
value of 3mm.
11. Click Replay to validate the tool path.

In the Replay dialog box select the By colors mode in order to visualize feedrate changes. The tool path
is displayed with the following colors:
● Yellow: approach feedrate
● Green: machining feedrate
● Blue: retract feedrate
● Red: Rapid feedrate
● White: user-defined feedrate.
Please note that transition paths are represented by dashed white lines.
The status of the macros are now Up to date.
12. Click OK to accept the modifications made to the operation.
The operation is updated with the specified macros.
PP Words in Macros
You can insert PP words in macros by double-clicking the green X symbols in the sensitive icons.
The PP Words Selection dialog box is displayed. You can enter the syntax in the following ways:
● enter one or more PP word syntaxes directly in the text field
● click to access the PP words table that is referenced in the current part operation. You can then
select predefined syntaxes from this table using the dialog box that appears.
For Pocketing and Profile Contouring operations, you should select the NC_CUTCOM_ON instruction in the list
of available syntaxes if you want the program to interpret cutter compensation automatically (that is, by a
CUTCOM/LEFT or CUTCOM/RIGHT instruction). If you choose different syntax in the list, it will be used as
selected.
The methodology for this is described in the section "How to Generate CUTCOM Syntaxes" in the Prismatic
Machining User's Guide.
Default Linking Macros in Case of Collision

If a user-defined linking macro is not collision free, a default linking macro is applied.
Macro Motion Tangent to Tool Path and Parallel to Tool Axis
When the tangent to the tool path is parallel to the tool axis, the following macro motions are replaced by an
axial motion:
● tangent motion
● normal motion
● circular motion
● ramping motion.
Define Macros on an Axial Machining Operation

This task shows you how to define macros on an axial machining operation.
This is done using the Macros tab page of the machining operation editor.
Macro Types
The following macro types can be defined on axial machining operations:
● Approach, which is used to approach the operation start point

● Retract, which is used to retract from the operation end point
● Linking, which is generally used to link points of a pattern
● Clearance, which can be used to define the feedrate on the horizontal path between two machining
positions.
Some specific axial machining operations support additional macro types:
● Global approach and Global retract (Circular Milling and Thread Milling)
The Approach macro is used to approach each drilled point in the pattern, and the Global approach
macro is used in the approach of the first drilled point only. For the first point, the Global approach
is added before the Approach macro.
Similarly, the Retract macro is used to retract from each drilled point, and the Global retract macro
is used in the retract from the last drilled point only. For the last point, the Global retract is added
after the Retract macro.
● Return between levels (predefined macro in Circular Milling in Standard machining mode only,
which is used link two consecutive levels). A special feature of this macro is the capability to specify
a feedrate value on the approach motion between levels.
● Return in a level (predefined macro in Circular Milling in Standard machining mode only, which is
used to link two consecutive paths in a given level).
User-Built Macros
You can use the following icons for specifying your macro paths:
axial motion
PP word
tool axis motion
motion to a point.
remove all macro motions
remove current macro motion
copy the motions defined on the Approach macro on to the approach motions of other
macros or copy the motions defined on the Retract macro on to the retract motions of other
macros.
Macro Edition
A sensitive icon representing the elementary paths of the macro will help you to build or edit your
macro. The current macro path is colored violet. Right-clicking a macro path gives you access to a
contextual menu.

● Activate: Activates a path that was previously deactivated
● Feedrate: Allows you to modify the feedrate type associated to the selected macro path by making
a selection in the sub-menu. If local is selected, you can assign a local feedrate value.
● Insert: Inserts a macro path depending on the type chosen in the sub-menu
Inherited Macros
If you create a machining operation and there are other operations of the same type in the program, it
will inherit the macros used in the most-recently edited operation of the same type. An operation is
considered edited when you click OK to quit the operation definition dialog box.
Create a Drilling operation as described in the Prismatic Machining User's Guide.
1. Double-click the Drilling operation in the specification tree to edit that operation.
2.
Select the Macros tab page in the operation definition dialog box. The initial status of all
the macros in the Macro Management list is Inactive.
In the Current Macro Toolbox, select Add Axial Motion . A sensitive icon representing the
elementary paths of the macro appears.
4. Double-click the displayed value in order to edit it. A dialog box appears to allow you to specify
the desired distance (30mm, for example).
5. You can then click Replay to check the axial approach. The status of the macro becomes Up
to date.
6. Activate the Retract macro in the Macro Management list, and create a 30 mm axial retract
motion in the same way.
7. Activate the Linking Retract macro in the Macro Management list, and create a 25mm axial
retract motion for the linking macro.
In the same way create a 25mm axial motion for the approach portion of the linking macro.
You can then click Replay to check the defined motions. The status of the macros change to
Up to date.
Note that if a jump distance is defined on the operation, it will be used in preference to the
linking macro. Similarly if local entry/exit distances are defined on the operation, they will be
used in preference to the linking macro.
8. Click Replay to validate the tool path.
In the Replay dialog box select the By colors mode in order to visualize feedrate changes. The
tool path is displayed with the following colors:
● Yellow: approach feedrate

● Red: Rapid feedrate
● Purple: plunge feedrate
● White: local feedrate.

PP Words in Macros
● click to access the PP words table that is referenced in the current part operation. You can
then select predefined syntaxes from this table using the dialog box that appears.
For Circular Milling operations, you should select the NC_CUTCOM_ON instruction in the list of available
syntaxes if you want the program to interpret cutter compensation automatically (that is, by a
CUTCOM/LEFT or CUTCOM/RIGHT instruction). If you choose different syntax in the list, it will be used
as selected.
The methodology for this is described in the section "How to Generate CUTCOM Syntaxes" in the
Prismatic Machining User's Guide.
Define Macros on a Turning Operation

This task shows you how to define macros on a turning operation.
This is done using the Macros tab page of the machining operation editor. In this example you
will add approach and retract macros to a Longitudinal Rough Turning operation.
Predefined Macros
You can use predefined macros such as Direct or Axial-Radial approach. These are made up from one
or more paths in a specific order. Just select the desired mode in the Current Macro Toolbox.
You can then adjust parameters (such as feedrate) of the macro.
User-Built Macros
tangent motion
normal motion
circular motion
PP word
motion to a point.
remove all macro paths
remove current macro paths
copy the motions defined on the Approach macro on to the approach motions of other
macros or copy the motions defined on the Retract macro on to the retract motions of other
macros.
Macro Edition
A sensitive icon representing the elementary paths of the macro will help you to build or edit your
macro. The current macro path is colored violet. Right-clicking a macro path gives you access to a
contextual menu.

● Activate: Activates a path that was previously deactivated.
● Feedrate: Gives access to feedrates for the selected macro path.
● Insert: Inserts a macro path depending on the type chosen in the sub-menu.
Inherited Macros
If you create a machining operation and there are other operations of the same type in the program,
the new operation will inherit the macros used in the most-recently edited operation of the same type.
An operation is considered edited when you click OK to quit the operation definition dialog box.
Interruptible Macros
Linking macros, which are available for Rough, Groove, Recess, Ramp Rough and Ramp Recess Turning
operations, can be interrupted. Interrupt conditions are defined in the Options tab of the Current Macro
Toolbox.
Interrupt modes for Linking macros are:
● No: macro is not interrupted

● Start of path: interrupt macro at the start of the path where the specified time is reached
● End of path: interrupt macro at the end of the path where the specified time is reached
● On time: interrupt macro as soon as the specified time is reached
● Number of paths: interrupt macro at the end of the number of specified paths.
The specified time may correspond to the expected lifetime of the insert, for example. This allows you
to interrupt an operation in order to change a worn insert. This is useful when machining very hard
materials.
Create a Longitudinal Rough Turning operation as described in the Lathe Machining User's Guide.
1. Double-click the Longitudinal Rough Turning operation in the specification tree to edit that
operation.
2.
Select the Macros tab page in the operation definition dialog box. The initial status of all
the macros in the Macro Management list is Inactive.
In the Current Macro Toolbox, select the Axial radial mode.
A sensitive icon representing the paths of the approach macro appears.
4. Select the point symbol in the sensitive icon then select a point in the 3D window.
The radial and axial paths of the macro are calculated from the selected point to the start point of
the operation.
5. You can then click Replay to check the approach motion. The status of the macro becomes
Up to date.
6. Right-click the Retract macro line and activate the macro by means of Activate.
In the Current Macro Toolbox, select the Radial axial mode.

7. Select the point symbol in the sensitive icon then select a point in the 3D window.
The axial and radial paths of the macro are calculated from the end point of the operation to the
selected point.
8. Click Replay to validate the tool path. The status of the macro becomes Up to date.
In the Replay dialog box select the By colors mode in order to visualize feedrate changes. The
tool path is displayed with the following colors:
● Yellow: approach or lead-in feedrate
● Red: Rapid or lift-off feedrate
● White: user-defined feedrate.
Please note that transition paths are represented by dashed white lines.
PP Words in Macros
● click to access the PP words table that is referenced in the current part operation.
You can then select predefined syntaxes from this table using the dialog box that appears.
Build and Use a Macros Catalog

This task shows you how to build a macros catalog from the sample catalog MACRO_Settings.catalog
delivered with the product in the folder
\Startup\Manufacturing\Macros.
You will then assign macros from the new catalog to a machining operation.
Create a Profile Contouring operation as described in the Prismatic Machining User's Guide.
1. Double-click the Profile Contouring operation in the specification tree.
2. Select the Macros tab page in the operation definition dialog box. The initial status of all the
macros in the Macro Management list is Inactive.
3. Click Read macro from catalog . The Catalog Browser dialog box appears. If needed, navigate
to \Startup\Manufacturing\Macros\MACRO_Settings.catalog to make it the current catalog.
4. Double-click the Approach family. The AppSTD macro is listed.

Double-click the AppSTD macro. The Macros tab page in the Profile Contouring dialog box is
initialized with the AppSTD macro.
5. Edit the AppSTD macro as shown below and rename it Modified AppSTD.
6. Click Save macro in catalog . The Save in Catalog dialog box appears. To create a new catalog,
click the [...] button and create a new catalog (MACRO_Settings_User.catalog in
\Startup\Manufacturing\Macros, for example)
7. Repeat this procedure to create user macros in MACRO_Settings_User.catalog for Retract and Return
in a Level macros.
Please note that macro types such as Return in a Level, Linking, Return between Levels, and Return
to Finish Pass include both approach and retract motions. The approach and retract motions of these
macro types can be similar (for example, a circular approach and a circular retract) or different (for
example, an axial approach and a circular retract).
When this type of macro is read from a catalog, the entire macro entity comprising the approach and
retract components is retrieved.
8. Double-click Pocketing to create a Pocketing operation, then select the Macros tab in the
Pocketing dialog box.
9. Click Read macro from catalog . The Catalog Browser dialog box appears. Navigate to
\Startup\Manufacturing\Macros\MACRO_Settings_User to make it the current catalog.
10.Double-click the Retract family. The Modified RetSTD macro is listed.

Double-click Modified RetSTD. The Macros tab page in the Pocketing dialog box is initialized with
the Modified RetSTD macro.
Keep the Catalog Browser dialog box open and repeat this procedure to assign the Approach and
Linking in a level macros to the Pocketing operation.
11.Click OK to update the Pocketing operation with the macros from the user-defined catalog.
To assign a catalog macro to an operation, you can:
● select the operation in the specification tree
● select Open Catalog from the Auxiliary Commands toolbar
● select the desired macros from the Catalog Browser.
Whenever a macro catalog is created, an associated CATProcess document with the same name is
also created in the same folder. It contains data about macro features and so it must not be deleted.
Status Management
This task shows you how the status of manufacturing entities is managed.
1. Select Pocketing .
The Pocketing Definition dialog box appears directly at the Geometry tab page.
The status light on the tab is red indicating that you must specify the geometry to be
machined by the operation.
A symbol on the Pocketing entity in the specification tree also indicates that the operation
definition is incomplete.
2.
Select the required pocket geometry. The status light switches to green on the tab .
The status lights on the Strategy , Feeds and Macros tab are all green
indicating that default values are already set for operation creation.
You can of course modify these values. Just select the corresponding tab to access these
parameters.
The status lights on the Tooling tab is orange. This indicates that, although default tooling
is set for the operation, you may want to modify or change the tool or tool assembly for a more
suitable one.
3. When all the status lights are green you generally have sufficient conditions to create the
operation.
Just click OK to create the operation.

Remember that you should always check the operation's tool path by means of a replay.
The symbol on the Pocketing tree entity is removed when the operation definition is
complete.
The operation name in the specification tree is appended with the text Computed after a replay
is done on the operation.
User Parameters in PP Instructions

This task shows how to define a PP instruction that references user parameters created in the design
part, and output the result in the APT source during the PP instruction processing.
1. Create PP instruction
The PP instruction created in the NC program will contain the name of the parameters to be
processed. To be able to identify these parameters, there is a syntax rule.
For example, it is not easy to identify the parameters to process if the PP instruction contains:
INSERT GLengthZHeight
To be consistent with the other NC parameters, the %( characters are used to identify the
beginning of the parameter and the ) character is used to identify the end of the parameter.
Refer to PP Tables and Word Syntaxes for more information.
Select PP Instruction . Enter the syntax in the Post-Processor Instruction dialog box that
appears.
Click OK to create the PP instruction in the program.

2. Generate APT source
During APT code generation, when the PP instruction is processed, the batch program will retrieve
the parameters to process.
Then a search is done in the design parts related to the Part Operation being processed to find the
user parameters and corresponding values. These values will be output in the APT source code.
The APT source file generated corresponding to this example (if Length is 80.5mm and Height
75.8mm) will be the following:
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Post-Processor Instruction.1

$$ Start generation of : Post-Processor Instruction.1
INSERT G80.5 Z75.8
$$ End of generation of : Post-Processor Instruction.1
The name of the parameter to be retrieved during the processing is the name of the parameter
that is created or displayed with the f(x) function. In the case of a Product referencing several
parts, the parameter Length of Part1 is identified by Part1\Length. This name will have to be used
in the PP instruction definition.
The main advantage of this is that the user parameters can be added in the PP table in order to
reuse them later, or in other NC commands.

This section shows you how to use the Machining verification and simulation tools.
Replay Tool Path: Select Replay Tool Path then specify the display options for an animated tool
path display of the manufacturing program of machining operation.
Simulate Material Removal in Photo Mode: Select Photo in the Tool Path Replay dialog box to run a
photo simulation of the material removal.
● Simulate Material Removal in Video Mode Using Tool Path Data: Select Video in the Tool Path
Replay dialog box to run a video simulation of the material removal.
● Simulate Material Removal in Video Mode Using NC Code: Double-click the Manufacturing
Program in the PPR tree to access a dialog box in order to run a video simulation of the material
removal using NC code.
Check Machine Accessibility at Tool Axis Definition: Select a generic machine, define the machining
axis system, then use Workpiece Automatic Mount command in the Machine Management
toolbar.
Check Accessibility on a Generic Machine or a VNC Machine.

Replay a Tool Path

You can replay the tool path of a complete manufacturing program or one or more operations of a program.
This task shows you how to replay a machining operation.
Please note that a number of settings for customizing Tool Path Replay are available in the Tools > Options >
Machining > General tab.
1. Select an operation in the specification tree, then select Replay Tool Path . You can also right-click
the operation and select Replay Tool Path.
The operation's tool path is computed interactively and a progress bar appears giving the status of the
computation. You can interrupt the computation by clicking Cancel.
The following dialog box appears at the end of the computation. It contains a number of command icons for
managing the tool path replay and material removal simulation. The name of the current operation appears
in the title bar.
Information that appears in this dialog box includes:
● current feedrate
● current tool tip position (X, Y, Z) and tool axis orientation (I, J, K)
● machining time and total time
Total time is machining time plus non-machining time (that is, time spent in transition paths and so on).
These times are displayed in hh:mm:ss format.
2. Choose the desired Replay mode by selecting one of the drop down icons:
Point to Point
Continuous
Plane by Plane:
The tool path is displayed by plane. This is suitable for multi-level operations such as Pocketing or
Roughing.
Note that consecutive portions of the tool path are displayed at each click on the forward (or
backward) control button. All parts of the tool path on the same level may not be displayed
together.
Transition paths may be displayed as you click forward (or backward).

Approach and retract paths are displayed in a lower intensity.
Sectioning:
Replay by sectioning plane. This is suitable for multi-level operations such as Pocketing or
Roughing.
In this mode the tool path of the operation is sectioned at each level.
The program selects a suitable direction to define the normal to the sectioning planes.
The replay progresses level by level along this normal at each click on the forward (or backward)
control button.
All the portions of the tool path are displayed in a given sectioning plane.
In Sectioning replay mode, you can choose to display the machined surface with or without the
tool axes (see the Tool Visualization modes below).
Feedrate by Feedrate.
Syntax by Syntax:
The replay stops each time a PP instruction is met and the syntax of the instruction is displayed
on the trajectory (for example, CYCLE/DRILL,0.000,1.000).
3. Choose the desired Tool Visualization mode by selecting one of the drop down icons:
Tool displayed at last position only
Tool axis displayed at each position
Tool displayed at each position
Machined surface is displayed in Sectioning replay mode.
Machined surface and tool axes are displayed in Sectioning replay mode.
4. Choose the desired Color mode by selecting one of the drop down icons:
Tool path displayed in same color (green by default)
Tool path displayed in different colors for different feedrates. The colors are initialized as
follows but they can be customized under the Tools > Options > Machining > General tab.
Yellow: approach or lead-in feedrate

Green: machining feedrate
Blue: retract or lift-off feedrate
Red: Rapid feedrate
Cyan: finishing feedrate
Magenta: plunge feedrate
Cyan: chamfering feedrate
Magenta: air cutting feedrate.
Please note that a transition path from operation A to operation B is represented by a dashed line
whose color depends on the feedrate. This feedrate is determined as follows:
● If a clearance macro is activated operation B, the feedrate of the clearance path is used for
the transition path.
● If no clearance macro is activated on operation B, the feedrate depends on the setting of the
Set Rapid feedrate at start of operations option in the Generate NC Output dialog box.
❍ If the option is set, a Rapid feedrate (red) is used for the transition path
❍ If the option is not set, the first feedrate defined on operation B is used for the transition
path (for example, yellow for approach or green for machining).
5. For surface machining type operations only, choose the desired Point Display mode by selecting one of
the drop down icons:
Trajectory of the contact point is displayed
Trajectory of either the tool tip or the tool center point is displayed
Trajectories of the contact point and either the tool tip or the tool center point is displayed
Trajectory of either the contact point or either the tool tip or the tool center point is
displayed.
6. Choose the desired TRACUT Display mode by selecting one of the drop down icons:
TRACUT instructions are taken into account to display the tool path
TRACUT instructions are not taken into account to display the tool path.
7. You can control the tool path replay using the following control buttons and keyboard shortcuts:
or F5 key to position the tool at the operation start point
or F6 key to run the replay backward
or F4 key to request a pause in the replay
or F7 key to run the replay forward
or F8 key to go to the operation end point.
If the F7 or F6 key is kept pressed:
● for point by point, plane by plane, feedrate by feedrate, and syntax by syntax, replay steps are done
continuously one after the other
● for continuous replay, the animation speed increases at each refresh.
You can customize the function keys to the replay buttons in the CATMfgReplayToolPathPanel.CATRsc
resource file.
8. Click OK to quit the replay mode.
Tool Path Replay Considerations

● If the operation has been deactivated by means of the Deactivate command, it cannot be replayed. If you
want to replay the operation, you must reactivate it using the Activate command.
Similarly, if the manufacturing program has been deactivated, it cannot be replayed. If you want to replay
the program, you must reactivate it.
● If a Profile Contouring operation was created with the cutter profile output option, both the cutter profile
and tip trajectory will be displayed in the replay.
● If a user-defined tool representation is related to the operation, that tool will be displayed in the replay.
● You can also access the Replay capability directly from the machining operation editor or from the
Manufacturing Program dialog box.
● You can select several machining operations in the specification tree in order to simultaneously replay the
tool paths associated to these operations.
● When replaying large tool paths, you can control the animation speed using the Animation speed slider:
❍ in the first half of the slider, speed goes from one point to 10 points
❍ in the second half of the slider, speed goes from 10 points to N/10 (where N is the total number of
points).
Tool Path Computation when Hidden Geometry is Present
The following rules summarize the tool path computation behavior depending on the Hide/Show status of
selected elements.
● Rule 1: If you select a Body or OpenBody, and use it as Part, Check or Fixture in a machining operation,
the tool path will use the Body or OpenBody, regardless of whether it is in Show or Hide status.
● Rule 2: If you select a Body or OpenBody, and use faces (which are sub-elements of this Body or
OpenBody) as Part, Check or Fixture in a machining operation, then only the sub-elements which are in
Show status will be used during tool path computation. Hidden sub-elements will be ignored in the
computation.
● Rule 3: If you select explicitly a set of faces and use them as Part, Check or Fixture in a machining
operation, the tool path will use these faces, regardless of whether they are in Show or Hide status.
You can use the Photo commands to simulate the material removed by machining operations in Photo
mode (this is a P2 functionality).
You can use the Video commands to simulate the material removed by machining operations in Video
mode (this is a P2 functionality).
Machine Accessibility
You can use Check Reachability to check the accessibility of the part on a machine.
Please refer to Accessibility on a Generic Machine (this is a P2 functionality).
Start Machine Simulation
If the NC Machine Tool Simulation product is installed, you can use this icon to switch to the NC Machine
Tool Simulation workbench. Please refer to the NC Machine Tool Simulation User's Guide for more information.
Photo Mode for Material Removal Simulation
This task shows you how to simulate the material removed by a machining operation in Photo mode.
For more information about this mode please refer to:
● Tools > Options > Machining > Photo/Video tab for information about the available customizing facilities
● Material Removal Simulation for information about the methodology to employ for user representation of tools, stock
considerations, and so on.
Select an operation in your program, then select Tool Path Replay . You can also right-click the operation in the tree
and select Tool Path Replay. A dialog box appears for managing the replay and simulation.
1. Select Photo . The Setup Editor window switches to a window entitled Photo that shows the result of the material
removal.
If needed, you can update the program data and the display by clicking on Photo again.
At any time you can pick on the surface of the workpiece. A dialog box appears giving information about the pick point.
● The operation used for removing material.

● The normal deviation between the workpiece and the design part.
● The X, Y, and Z coordinates of the pick point.
● The tool used for machining.
2. Zoom in the rounded corner of the Photo, and right-click Closeup.
The Closeup shows a more precise Photo of the rounded corner.

Just right-click anywhere on the stock to return to the original Photo.

3. Select Analyze to analyze the result of the simulation. This is done by comparing the machined part with the design
part. The Analysis dialog box appears.
4. Select the desired fault types to be analyzed and specify the Tolerance for the comparison.
The fault filter setting permits three types of faults:
Remaining Material: areas where the tool has left behind material on the workpiece.
Gouge: areas where the tool has removed excess material from the workpiece.
Tool Clash: areas where the tool collided with the workpiece during a rapid move.
Remaining material, tool clashes and gouges will be displayed as colored zones according to the specified tolerances.
5. Click the Apply button.
The machined part is compared with the design part based on the specified settings.
Any point on the machined surface of the workpiece is considered to be part of a fault if the normal distance (normal
deviation) to the design part surface is greater than the specified tolerance.
Results of the comparison are reflected on the workpiece, based on the extent of severity of the fault and the customized
color settings.
The list of detected faults are listed in the Fault combo box.
The faults are ordered in such a way that Tool Clashes appear at the top of the list followed by Gouges then Remaining
Material. The gouges and remaining material are in turn sorted on the basis of decreasing fault area.
On selecting a fault from the Faults combo box, the region corresponding to the fault is indicated by a "Fault Indicator"
bounding box on the workpiece.
Other detailed information about the selected fault is displayed.

6. Click Cancel to quit the Analysis mode and return to the dialog box for managing the replay and simulation.
7. Click OK to quit the dialog box.
Photo Mode Considerations

Please note the following points.
● Turning operations and multi-axis machining operations are not supported.
● Boring Bars and Two Sides Chamfering tools are not supported for Photo mode.
● If you select a Body (which may be in Show or Hide mode) as Stock, Design or Fixture then only sub-elements of the
Body that are in Show mode will be used during material removal simulation. Hidden sub-elements will be ignored in
the simulation.
● Check surfaces are not taken into account in Photo mode.
● When a Photo mode analysis is performed on vertical walls (walls parallel to the Z-axis of the Part Operation's
machining axis system), the results of the analysis such as Pick Point Information, Analysis, Fault will not be accurate.
This is a program limitation.
● Photo simulation is possible along any fixed axis.
This means that you can simulate machining operations (MO) whose tool axis is different from the Z-axis of the Part
Operation's machining axis system.
Case1: All MOs have constant identical axis not equal to Setup Z-axis.
Photo simulation can be done on any one or all of these MOs.
Case 2: All MOs have constant but different axes not equal to Setup Z-axis.
Photo simulation can be done on any one of these MOs.
● If a multi-axis machining operation is selected, an error message is issued indicating that these operations are not
supported. The Photo simulation will be done on the first operation previous to the selected operation (going from the
selected operation to the PO) that has a non-changing tool axis.
Video Mode for Material Removal Simulation Using

Tool Path Data
This task shows you how to simulate the material removed by machining operations in Video mode using tool
path data.
For more information about this mode please refer to:
● Tools > Options > Machining > Photo/Video tab for information about the available customizing facilities
● Material Removal Simulation for information about the methodology to employ for user representation of
tools, stock considerations, and so on
● the NC Manufacturing Verification User's Guide for more information about the additional capabilities
available if the NC Manufacturing Verification product is installed.
Note: It is also possible to simulate material removal in Video mode using NC code. See Video Mode for
Material Removal Simulation Using NC Code.
1. Open the Processfinal.CATProcess document. The Setup Editor window appears showing the PPR tree with
the Manufacturing Program.
The part is displayed held in place by fixtures. The stock is in Hide mode.
2. Right-click the Facing.1 operation in the tree, then select Tool Path Replay . The Replay dialog box
appears.
There are three Video simulation modes:
Full Video: Video simulation for complete program or part operation (depending on
setting)
Video from Last Saved Result: Video simulation from saved result of the previous Video
simulation.
Mixed Photo/Video: Photo simulation is up to the operation just before the selected
operation, then Video simulation is done on the selected operation.
The rest of the scenario illustrates how to use Full Video and Video from Last Saved Result.
3. Select Full Video . The Setup Editor window switches to a window entitled Video.
4. Select Video Options to display the Video Options dialog box.
● Select the Stop at tool change checkbox if you want the simulation to stop each time a tool change
is encountered in the program.
● Select the desired Collisions detection option to either:
❍ ignore collisions during the Video simulation
❍ stop the Video simulation at the first collision
❍ continue the Video simulation even when collisions are detected. In this case, you can consult the
list of collisions at the end of the simulation.
● Select the Touch is collision checkbox if you want touch (or contact) type of collision to be detected.
● Select the Video simulation in protected mode checkbox to continue the Video simulation by
skipping any cuts that cause errors.
5. Press the control button to run the material removal simulation of the Facing.1 operation.
You can use the Tool animation replay buttons or keyboard shortcuts to control the material simulation
Video:
or F5 key to position the tool at the start of the simulation
or F6 key to run the simulation backward
or F4 key to request a pause in the simulation
or F7 key to run the simulation forward
or F8 key to run forward up to the end of simulation. No intermediate graphics update is

made to save on rendering time. A progress indicator shows the computation progression and
the final machined stock appears.
If the Replay mode is set to:
● Point to Point, the number of points value specifies the number of points to be run through at each
step of the replay.
● Continuous, the slider position is taken into account for adjusting the speed of the simulation. For
improved performance, intermediate graphics are not updated when the slider is used to increase
simulation speed.
6. Click Associate Video Result to Machining Operation to associate the Video result to the
operation. Please note that Video results are stored in the NC Code output directory.
A check-mark appears on the Facing.1 operation in the tree.
Click OK to quit the Replay dialog box.

7. Right-click the Pocketing.2 operation, then select Tool Path Replay .
8. Select Video from Last Saved Result . A material removal is displayed starting from the previous
saved result.
The figure below shows the state of the replay at the end of the Pocketing.1 operation.
The figure below shows the state of the replay at the end of the Pocketing.2 operation.
9. Repeat the sequence of steps described above to associate the Video result to the Pocketing.2 operation.
A check-mark now appears on the Pocketing.2 operation in the tree.
Then run the simulation up to the last operation in the program.

10. Click Video Collision Report to display a dialog box showing any collisions detected during the
Video simulation.
Note that:
● the Collision detection setting must be set to Continue.

● the tool holder is taken into account during collision checking.
11. If needed, save the result of the Video simulation in a CATProduct. This result can be used as initial stock
in another Part Operation or as stock in a Roughing operation.
Click Save Video Result in a CATProduct .

A dialog box appears allowing you to save the Video result in a CATProduct.
Please note the following points about this capability.
● It combines previous version Save Video Result in CGR (CATIA graphic representation) and Associate
Video Result to Machining Operation (WPC information).
This helps to avoid open stock problems when used in another Setup thanks to precision of the WPC
data.
● Result can be saved in interactive (as shown above) or batch mode (see Generate a CATProduct in
Batch Mode).
● You can add the CATProduct to the PPR tree using Insert > Existing Component or the Product
Context contextual command.
12. Click OK to quit the Replay dialog box.
Video Mode Considerations

● Reduced Video simulation performance may be experienced in the following cases:

❍ When a Non cutting diameter is specified on an end mill or a face mill. To improve Video
performance, if possible, try setting the value of this parameter to zero.
❍ When a user representation (CATProduct or CATPart) is associated to the tool. To improve Video
performance, if possible, try running the Video without the user representation.
● The Video result may become incoherent if operations used in its creation are modified. Incoherent
Video results should be removed by the user.
● The Remove Video Result contextual command allows you to remove a Video result that is
associated an operation. An operation that has an associated Video result is indicated by a check-
mark in the tree.
● For turning operations:
❍ Any collisions between the part and the 2D profile of the lathe insert and insert holder are
detected.
❍ For user representations of lathe tools, the insert holder does not participate in material removal
(regardless of Rapid or Feed mode) and is used only in collision detection.
● Boring Bars and Two Sides Chamfering tools are not collision checked in Video mode.
● If you select a Body (which may be in Show or Hide mode) as Stock, Design or Fixture then only sub-
elements of the Body that are in Show mode will be used during material removal simulation. Hidden
sub-elements will be ignored in the simulation.
Video Mode for Material Removal Simulation

Using NC Code
This task shows you how to simulate the material removed by machining operations in Video mode using NC
code.
Note: It is also possible to simulate material removal in Video mode using tool path data. Please refer to Video
Mode for Material Removal Simulation Using Tool Path Data for specific information about that operating mode
and general information about Video material removal simulation.
1. Open the Processfinal.CATProcess document. The Setup Editor window appears showing the PPR tree with the
Manufacturing Program.
Please note that the machine referenced in the Part Operation uses a default 3-axis machine. This type of
machine is not suitable for simulating material removal in Video mode using NC code and so must be changed.
It must be a CATProduct representation built using the NC Tool Machine Builder application, for example.
Select a Suitable Machine Tool and Set NC Parameters

2. Double-click Part Operation.1 in the tree, then click Machine in the Part Operation dialog box.
In the Machine Editor:
● Click then select the Mill_5axis.CATProduct machine in the
..\startup\Manufacturing\Samples\NCMachineToollib\DEVICES folder.
● Select a suitable Controller Emulator and Post Processor: Note that a Controller Emulator/Post Processor
vendor must be set in the Tools > Options > Machining > Output tab.
● Select a suitable Post Processor words table: Sample PP word tables are delivered with the product in the
..\startup\manufacturing\PPTables folder.
● Select ISO (that is, NC code) as NC data type.
● Click OK to assign the machine to the Part Operation.
Position the Workpiece on the Machine

3.
Position the part on the machine table using Workpiece Automatic Mount of the Machine
Management toolbar.
Note: You may also need to re-position the Machining axis system. To do this, double-click the green
machining axis in the 3D view, and re-position the axis using the dedicated dialog box.
Generate Program Tool Path Data and Generate NC Code

4. Right-click Manufacturing Program.1 in the tree and select Compute Tool Path. Select the Force
computation option in the pop-up that appears.
Right-click Manufacturing Program.1 in the tree and select Generate NC Code Interactively. Set the
following options in the dialog box that appears.
Simulate the Program Using NC Code

5. Double-click Manufacturing Program.1 in the tree. In the Manufacturing Program dialog box, select the NC
Code Based Simulation check box and select the NC code file that you generated in the previous step.
See Manufacturing Program for more information about this dialog box.
6. Select Video . The Setup Editor window switches to a window entitled Video.
Two dialog boxes appear for running the simulation:
● Replay dialog box containing tool animation control buttons and other command icons.
The capabilities are described in Video Mode for Material Removal Simulation Using Tool Path Data and
Replay a Tool Path.
● ISO Panel dialog box containing information about the NC code.
Click the control button to run the material removal simulation of the first machining operation
(Facing.1).
As the ISO panel highlights each line of the data while the video simulation represents the code graphically,
the Machine Operation field shows the operation associated with the line of code. Conversely, you can select a
single line of code, and the geometric data shows the simulation at that point in the code.
7. Continue the Video simulation for the remainder of the program using the control buttons.
The ISO Panel is displayed, It has two parts:
● ISO code area, which contains the line number, a collision icon (if collision is detected), and the ISO data.
This part also has a search function and lists the machining operation associated with each ISO line
number.
● Collision Information area, which gives information about any detected collisions.
Please refer to NC Machine Tool Path User's Guide for more information about this panel.
Check Machine Accessibility at Tool Axis

Definition
This task shows how to check machine accessibility when defining the tool axis of a machining operation.
This can be done on a generic machine with 1 or 2 rotary axis on the head.
1. Open the AccessibilityChecking.CATPart document, then select NC Manufacturing > Surface
Machining from the Start menu.
2. To assign a machine the Part Operation:
● Double-click the Part Operation in the tree.
● Click Machine in the Part Operation dialog box.
● In the Machine Editor dialog box, click then select the XYZCA.CATProduct machine in the
..\startup\Manufacturing\Samples\NCMachineToollib\DEVICES folder.
● Click OK in the Machine Editor dialog box.
3. In the Part Operation dialog box click Machining Axis . Select the axis system on the part as
the machining axis system.
4. Click OK in the Part Operation dialog box: the machine is added to the Resource List. The machine
and the part are displayed together in the 3D window.
5.
Select the Workpiece Automatic Mount in the Machine Management toolbar. The part snaps
onto the machine table as follows.

Note that you can use the contextual menu in the 3D window to hide parts of the machine (for
example, to display the machine head only).
6. Select Sweeping . In the Sweeping dialog box that appears, select the Strategy tab page
. Click on the tool axis symbol in the sensitive icon.
The Tool Axis dialog box appears.

7. Select the Manual mode and activate the Machine rotary axis checkbox.
Select the Display tool and Display machine checkboxes.
Click the User-defined position [...] button and select a position on the face to be machined. This
is the position that the machine will try to reach.
The machine is positioned according to the current tool axis definition.
8. Enter values for the rotary axis 4 and 5 to vary the machine head position.
9. Continue to enter values for the rotary axis 4 and 5 to find the best position for machining. Note
that the I, J, K components of the tool axis are updated in accordance with the entered angle values.
You can check visually that the position is collision free.

10. Click OK in the dialog box to return to the Sweeping operation editor to continue definition of the
machining operation.
The machine head returns to its original position.

Generic Machine Accessibility (CATProduct)
This task shows how to check accessibility on a generic machine. This involves:
● loading part and opening the desired NC workbench
● using the command of the Machine Management toolbar for automatically mounting the part on the
machine
● checking accessibility at the current tool position by means of a replay.
1. Open the AccessibilityChecking.CATPart document, then select NC Manufacturing > Prismatic
2. Double-click the Part Operation in the tree.
In the Part Operation dialog box click Machine .
In the Machine Editor dialog box, click then select the Mill_5axis.CATProduct machine in the
..\startup\Manufacturing\Samples\NCMachineToollib\DEVICES folder. Click OK to assign the
machine to the Part Operation.
3. In the Part Operation dialog box click Machining Axis . Select the axis system on the part as
the machining axis system.
5.
Select Workpiece Automatic Mount . The part (child object) snaps onto the machine table
(parent object) as follows.

You can use Fit All In to reframe the part in the 3D window
6. Create a machining operation (a pocketing operation, for example).

7. Activate the Replay dialog box, then click Check Reachability to verify that the machine can
effectively reach the part at the current tool position.
A Check pop-up appears indicating whether the position is reachable:
● If reachable, then the tool, part and machine are displayed at that position.
● If the position is out of limits or unreachable, then the part and machine are displayed with the
tool at the home position.
8. Click OK in the Check dialog box to return to the replay mode.

VNC Machine Accessibility (*.dev device)
This task shows how to check accessibility on a VNC machine. This involves:
● customizing the machine tool environment
● loading part and opening the desired NC workbench
● using the commands of the Machine Management toolbar for:
❍ importing resources
❍ positioning the part on the machine table
❍ attaching the part on the machine table
● checking accessibility at the current tool position by means of a replay.
1. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar. Select the Compatibility category in the tree to the left.
In the Root Libraries field of the DELMIA D5 tab page, enter the path of a library that will allow
importing DELMIA/Deneb device files (for example,
..\startup\Manufacturing\Samples\NCMachineToollib).
Click OK to validate this choice.

2. Open the AccessibilityChecking.CATPart document, then select NC Manufacturing > Prismatic
3. Select the Resource Context to import a VNC machine.
In the dialog box that appears, select Files of type: (*.dev) Deneb devices then open the machine
3_2_axis.dev in the NCMachineToollib\Devices folder.
This machine is added to the Resource List.
4. Double-click the Part Operation in the tree, then select Machine .
In the Machine Editor dialog box, click then select the Makino_5.1 VNC machine in the tree.
Click OK to assign the machine to the Part Operation.
6. Select Snap then position the part on the machine table as follows.
● Select the part in the 3D window. A square symbol appears.
● Use the mouse to move the symbol and click when the square is located on the underside of
the part.
● An orientation symbol and the Define Reference Plane dialog box appear. Click OK in the dialog
box.
● Select the machine table in the 3D window. A square symbol appears.
● Use the mouse to move the symbol and click when the square is located on the center of the
table.
● An orientation symbol and the Define Reference Plane dialog box appear. Click OK in the dialog
box. The part is then snapped onto the table.
● Click Select to exit the Snap command.
7. Select Attach then attach the part and the machine as follows.
● Select the table (parent object) then the part (child object).
● Click OK in the Child Selection dialog box.
You can use Fit All In to reframe the part in the 3D window.
8. Create a machining operation (a pocketing operation, for example).

9. Activate the Replay dialog box, then click Check Reachability to verify that the machine can
effectively reach the part at the current tool position.
A Check pop-up appears indicating whether the position is reachable:
● If reachable, then the tool, part and machine are displayed at that position.
● If the position is out of limits or unreachable, then the part and machine are displayed with the
tool at the home position.
10. Click OK in the Check dialog box to return to the replay mode.
Program Output
This section shows you how to use the various tools provided with Machining Solutions for producing output
data.
Generate NC Output in Interactive Mode: Select Generate NC Code Interactively then select the
manufacturing program to be processed and define processing options.
● Generate APT Source Code in Batch Mode: Select Generate NC Output in Batch Mode then
select the manufacturing program to be processed and define the APT source processing options.
● Generate Clfile Code in Batch Mode: Select Generate NC Output in Batch Mode then select
the manufacturing program to be processed and define the Clfile processing options.
● Generate NC Code in Batch Mode: Select Generate NC Output in Batch Mode then select the
manufacturing program to be processed and define the NC code processing options.
● Generate a CATProduct In-Process Model in Batch Mode: Select Generate NC Code in Batch
Mode then select the manufacturing program to be processed and specify the processing options
for generating a CATProduct in-process model.
● MfgBatch utility program that allows you to generate NC data files from a manufacturing
program by means of an executable program under Windows or a shell under UNIX.
Batch Queue Management: Manage tool path computation outside the interactive CATIA session,
with the possibility of scheduling the execution of several batch jobs.
Generate NC Documentation: Select Generate Documentation to produce shop floor
documentation in HTML format.
Import an APT Source into the Program: Select the APT Import contextual command to insert an
existing APT source into the current manufacturing program.
Batch Mode Commands and Shareable Licenses

Please note that it is not possible to use batch mode commands with product licenses that are shareable.
Therefore, it is not possible to generate a tool path using the Manage Batch Queue or Generate NC Code in
Batch Mode command if the product license is shareable.
Generate NC Output Interactively

This task shows you how to generate NC data from the program in interactive mode.
For best results, you should first verify the operations of your program by means of a replay or
simulation. There should be no operations to be updated or in an undefined state.
The procedure for generating NC data in interactive mode is the same as in batch mode.
However, in interactive mode:
● it is the current CATProcess document that is processed

● Save input CATProcess means Save As
● Lock operations checkbox can be set even if Save document is not activated.
1. Select the Manufacturing Program entity in the tree, then select Generate NC Code Interactively
. You can also use the right mouse key on the Manufacturing Program entity to select
Generate NC Code Interactively.
The Generate NC Output Interactively dialog box appears.

You can choose to process one part operation or one or more machining programs in the current
CATProcess document.
2. Depending on the desired NC data type the procedure is the same as that described in:
● Generate APT Source Code in Batch Mode
● Generate Clfile Code in Batch Mode
● Generate NC Code in Batch Mode
● Generate a CATProduct in Batch Mode.
3. Click the Output File [...] button to select the folder where you want the file to be saved and
specify the name of the file.
4. Click Execute to generate the NC data.
Generate APT Source File in Batch Mode

This task shows you how to generate NC code in APT format from the manufacturing program or part
operation in batch mode.
For best results, you should first verify the machining operations of your program by means of a replay
or simulation. There should be no operations to be updated or in an undefined state.
Always save your program modifications before generating the NC code.
1. Select Generate NC Code in Batch Mode in the NC Output Management toolbar.

The following dialog box appears.
In the In/Out tab page...
2. Select the manufacturing document to be processed using the Input CATProcess [...]
button. The current document is proposed by default.
3. Select the type of NC entity to be processed.
● Part Operations: Select one part operation in the input CATProcess. In this case all the
manufacturing programs of the selected part operation will be processed.
● Manufacturing Programs: Select one or more manufacturing programs in the input
CATProcess.
4. Select APT as the NC data type that you want to generate.

5. Select the desired One file... option.
● For all selected programs to generate a single APT source for all the selected
manufacturing programs.
● By program to generate a single APT source for each selected manufacturing program.
● By Machining operation to generate a single APT source for each machining operation in
the selected manufacturing programs.
Note that this option is not supported in programs containing Copy or Tracut Operators.
6. To store the resulting NC data file at the same location as the input CATProcess, select the
Store at same location as the CATProcess check box.
Otherwise, specify the Output file where you want the NC data to be written using the [...]
button.
A default name is proposed for the output file (for example,

Process1_Manufacturing_Program_1.aptsource). This name can be modified directly in the
Output File text field.
7. To authorize overwriting an existing like-named APT source, select the Replace like-named
file check box.
8. To write the CATProcess document after processing, select the Save Input CATProcess
check box.
Specify where you want to save this document using the [...] button.
9. To authorize overwriting an existing like-named CATProcess document, select the Replace
like-named CATProcess check box.
10. To attach the generated output file to the first selected manufacturing program, select the
Associate output NC file to the program check box.
To access the output file, right-click the manufacturing program and select Display NC File.
11. Select the Lock operations check box to lock all the machining operations after processing.
Refer to Locked Machining Operations for more information.
In the Tool Motions tab page...
12. Specify the options to be used for processing the tool motions.
Some of these options can be set to take machine characteristics into account: set the option
to From Machine.
Refer to NC Data Options for more information.
In the Formatting tab page...

13. Specify the formatting options. These options determine how information is to be presented
on the output file (for example, general information statements to be presented with the
PPRINT syntax).
Refer to NC Data Options for more information.

14. Click Execute to generate the APT source file.
Refer to Syntax of Generated APT Instructions for more information about the NC data output.
A log file is also generated in the resulting NC data folder. It contains machining time information
similar to that obtained during the interactive tool path replay.
Generate Clfile Code in Batch Mode

This task shows you how to generate NC code in Clfile format from the program in batch mode.
Always save your program modifications before generating the NC code.
In order to generate clfile output, the PP table associated to the machine must be accessible in read
mode. Otherwise an error message is issued in the log file.
1. Select Generate NC Code in Batch Mode . The following dialog box appears.
2. Select the manufacturing document to be processed using the Input CATProcess [...] button.
The current document is proposed by default.
Select the type of NC entity to be processed. This can be:
● one part operation in the input CATProcess. In this case all the manufacturing programs of
the selected part operation will be processed.
● one or more manufacturing programs in the input CATProcess.
3. Select CLF as the NC data type that you want to generate.

4. Select the desired One file... option to generate a single clfile:
● for all the selected manufacturing programs
● for each selected manufacturing program
● or for each machining operation in the selected manufacturing programs.
Please note that this option is not supported in programs containing Copy or Tracut
Operators.
5. To store the resulting NC data file at the same location as the input CATProcess, just select the
Store at same location as the CATProcess checkbox.
button.

Process1_Manufacturing_Program_1.clfile). This name can be modified directly in the Output File
text field.
6. Select the Replace like-named file checkbox if you want to authorize overwriting an existing
like-named clfile.
7. If needed, you can choose to write the CATProcess document after processing. Just select the
Save Input CATProcess checkbox and specify where you want to save it using the [...] button.
8. Select the Replace like-named CATProcess checkbox if you want to authorize overwriting an
existing like-named CATProcess document.
9. You can attach the generated output file to the first selected manufacturing program by selecting
the Associate output NC file to the program checkbox.
The output file can be accessed by right-clicking the manufacturing program and selecting
Display NC File.
10. You can select the Lock operations checkbox to lock all the machining operations after
processing. Please refer to Locked Machining Operations for more information.
In the Tool Motions tab page...
11. Specify the options to be used in the processing.
Some of these options take machine characteristics into account (for example, Circular
Interpolation).
Please refer to NC Data Options for more information.
In the Formatting tab page...

12. Specify the formatting options. These options determine how information is to be presented on
the output file (for example, information statements to be presented with the PPRINT syntax).
Please refer to NC Data Options for more information.

13. Click Execute to request computation of the Clfile code.
Please refer to Clfile Formats for more information about the NC data output.
A log file is also generated in the resulting NC data folder. It contains machining time information
similar to that obtained during the interactive tool path replay.
Generate NC Code in Batch Mode

This task shows you how to generate NC code from the manufacturing program or part operation in
batch mode.
Post Processors are provided by Cenit, Intelligent Manufacturing Software (IMS), and ICAM
Technologies Corporation.
For information about how to acquire Post Processor parameters files that provide machine specific NC
code output, please contact your IBM representative.
Select the type of Post Processor solution using Tools > Options > Machining > Output tab. If the
output option is set to None, you will not be able to generate NC code.
Cenit Post-Processor Solution
Sample Cenit Post Processor parameter files are delivered with the product in the folder
\Startup\Manufacturing\PPPar
which provides NC output for various machine types. To execute your own PP you must copy it into this
folder.
You can use PPs that include external macros. In this case, you should define them in the PP in:
Modify postprocessor // Define NC-blocks // Index : MACRO APT WORDS
and then copy these macros in the same folder as the PP.
IMS Post-Processor Solution
Sample IMS Post Processor parameter files are delivered with the product in the folder
\Startup\Manufacturing\IMSPar
folder.
The IMSPar folder must be accessible in Read/Write mode.
ICAM Post-Processor Solution
Sample ICAM Post Processor parameter files are delivered with the product in the folder
\Startup\Manufacturing\ICAMPar
folder.
Always save your program modifications before generating NC code.
1. Select Generate NC Code in Batch Mode . The following dialog box appears.

● one part operation in the input CATProcess. In this case all the manufacturing programs of the
selected part operation will be processed.
3. Select NC Code as the NC data type that you want to generate.

4. Select the desired One file... option to generate a single NC code file:
● for each selected manufacturing program
● or for each machining operation in the selected manufacturing programs.
Please note that this option is not supported in programs containing Copy or Tracut Operators.
button.

Process1_Manufacturing_Program_1.CATNCCode). This name can be modified directly in the
6. Select the Replace like-named file checkbox if you want to authorize overwriting an existing like-
named NC code file.
Save Input CATProcess checkbox and specify where you want to save it using the [...] button.
9. You can attach the generated output file to the first selected manufacturing program by selecting
the Associate output NC file to the program checkbox.
The output file can be accessed by right-clicking the manufacturing program and selecting Display
NC File.
In the Tool Motions and Formatting tab pages...
Certain option settings may have an influence on the generated NC code. Please refer to NC Data
Options for more information.
In the NC Code tab page...
11. Use the combo to select the desired Post Processor parameters file.
12. Click Execute to request computation of the NC code.

Generate a CATProduct In-Process Model in

Batch Mode
This task shows you how to generate a CATProduct in-process model from the program in batch
mode.
Always save your program modifications before running a batch execution.
The batch report includes a log file. In Tools > Options > Machining > Photo/Video, if Collision
Detection is set to Continue, the log file will contain the list of detected collisions. For example:
Collision number 1
Dynamic Solid : T1 End Mill D 10.CUT

Static Solid : Stock
Collision Point 23.388212 7.778961 15.000000
Machining Operation :Pocketing.2
The CATProduct can be useful when the result of a previous process is to be used as the stock of the
next process.
1. Select the Manufacturing Program entity in the tree, then select Generate NC Code in Batch
Mode . The following dialog box appears.

● one part operation in the input CATProcess. In this case all the manufacturing programs of
the selected part operation will be processed.
3. Select In Process Model (CATProduct) as the NC data type that you want to generate.
4. Select the desired One file... option to generate a single CATProduct:
● or for each selected manufacturing program.
Please note that this option is not supported in programs containing Copy or Tracut
Operators.
button.

Process1_Manufacturing_Program_1.CATProduct). This name can be modified directly in the
6. Select the Replace like-named file checkbox if you want to authorize overwriting an existing
like-named CATProduct.
Save Input CATProcess checkbox and specify where you want to save it using the [...]
button.
In the Tool Motions and Formatting tab pages...
Certain option settings may have an influence on the generated CATProduct. Please refer to NC
Data Options for more information.
The NC Code tab page is not useful for generating CATProducts.

10. Click Execute to request computation of the CATProduct.
MfgBatch Utility for Generating NC Data

MfgBatch is a utility program that allows you to generate NC data files from a manufacturing program
referenced by a CATProcess.
You can run this program using one of the Generate NC Data commands in your NC workbench. This is
described in the following user tasks:
● Generate APT Source Code in Batch Mode
● Generate Clfile Code in Batch Mode
● Generate NC Code in Batch Mode
● Generate APT Source Code in Interactive Mode.
You can also run MfgBatch as an executable program under Windows or a shell under UNIX. In this
case MfgBatch uses an input text file called FT05 containing a set of keywords similar to the keywords
of the equivalent Version 4 utility.
This document describes how to define the FT05 input file and run MfgBatch.
1. Defining the FT05 file
MfgBatch uses an input text file containing keywords that describe the processing to be done. It is
largely derived from the CATIA Version 4 FT05 file. The available keywords are described below.
Sample FT05 for generating an APT file:
*REA E:\tmp
*MOD Processinfra1.CATProcess
*PRG Manufacturing Program.1
*WRI E:\tmp
*MEM aptcub1.aptsource
*APT 1
*REP Y
*PPR 3
*RUN
Sample FT05 for generating an NC Code file:
*REA E:\tmp
*MOD Processinfra1.CATProcess
*PRG Manufacturing Program.1
*WRI E:\
*MEM test1.CATNCCode
*ISO CNT
*REP Y
*PPR 3
*PPN NUM1060_5X
*STX N
*RUN
Do not use the character $ in path names, as this character may be interpreted as an environment
variable.
2. Running MfgBatch
A CATIA V5 environment is needed in order to run MfgBatch. The entry point is the MfgBatch.exe
executable program (under Windows) or MfgBatchCmd.sh shell (under UNIX).
You should create a RunMfgBatch.bat file under Windows or a RunMfgBatch.sh file under UNIX. The
three arguments required for running the utility are:
environment name: -env environment_name

environment directory or folder: -direnv environment_location
full name of the FT05 file: -ft05 file_name
Running MfgBatch under Windows
Here is an example of the RunMfgBatch.bat file you need to create. It must be accessible in your
user path.
"C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B15\intel_a\code\bin\mfgbatch.exe"

-env CATIA.V5R16.B16
-direnv "C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\CATEnv"
-ft05 %1
In this example, CATIA Version 5 is installed at C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B15.

You will find this information in the Properties menu of the icon that is used to start CATIA.
The executable program is run by specifying the required arguments. The %1 parameter
represents the FT05 file name.
How to use it:
RunMfgBatch FT05_file_name
Example:
RunMfgBatch e:\users\myself\Drilling_1_ft05.txt
Running MfgBatch under UNIX
Here is an example of the RunMfgBatch.sh file you need to create. It must be accessible in your
user path.
#!/bin/ksh
set -x
/home/data/TESTR9164/aix_a/code/command/catstart
-env CATIA_P1.V5R16.B16
-direnv /CATEnv
-run "MfgBatchCmd.sh -ft05 $1"
In this example, CATIA Version 5 is installed at /home/data/TESTR9164. This is followed by a

reference to the Operating System which can be:
● aix_a
● hpux_a
● irix_a
● solaris_a.
You will find this information in the /CATEnv directory in the environment_name.txt files.
The shell is run by specifying the required arguments. The $1 parameter represents the FT05 file
name.
How to use it:
RunMfgBatch.sh FT05_file_name
Example:
RunMfgBatch.sh /u/users/myself/Drilling_1_ft05.txt
3. Results
For the command:
RunMfgBatch d:\dir\fichierFT05.txt
with:
*WRI E:\tmp
*MEM aptcub1.aptsource
results are:
● a first LOG file: d:\dir\fichierFT05.txt.LOG

● a result file: E:\tmp\aptcub1.aptsource
● a second LOG file: E:\tmp\aptcub1.LOG
If an error occurs, you should first look at the LOG files which give a diagnostic about the problem
encountered (for example, syntax error or file not found).
The following keywords can be used in the FT05 file. Note that, compared with a CATIA Version 4
FT05 file, only 3 letter keywords can be used in Version 5.
Please refer to NC Data Options for more information about these keywords.
APT output:
*REA CATProcess read directory (required keyword).
*MOD CATProcess name (required keyword).
*PRG Manufacturing program to be processed (required keyword).
*WRI Write directory for the generated file.
*MEM Generated file name.
*APT 1 Generate APT source. Copy and/or Tracut instructions will not be processed. In this
case there will be Copy or Tracut statements remaining in the generated APT source.
*APT 2 Generate APT source. Copy and/or Tracut instructions will be processed. In this case
there will be no Copy or Tracut statements remaining in the generated APT source.
*REP If output file already exists with same name, allows replacing it (Y/N)
*PPR n Display mode for general information (such as tool names), Part operation comments,
or and Machining operation names (1: PPRINT, 2: no comments, 3: $$).
*PPR nnn
For example:
*PPR 1 will give general information, Part operation comments, and Machining
operation names as PPRINT
*PPR 121 will give general information, and Machining operation names as PPRINT and
Part operation comments as $$
*PPR 333 will give general information, Part operation comments, and Machining
operation names as $$.
*RUN Command to start processing (required keyword).
Clfile, NC code or CATProduct output:
*CLF Generate Clfile (replaces *APT)
*ISO Generate NC code (replaces *APT)
*CGR Generate CATProduct in-process model (replaces *APT).
In previous releases, a CGR in-process model is generated with this keyword.
Possibility to write CATProcess after processing:
*FLW CATProcess write directory.
*MDW CATProcess name.
*MRP If CATProcess already exists with same name, allows replacing it (Y/N).
*AOF Associates the NC output file with the CATProcess after processing (Y/N).
Other keywords:
*CIR Circular interpolation mode (0: no circle, 1: CIRCLE only, 2: CIRCLE or CYLINDR).
*FGO 3 axis or 5 axis (POINT/AXIS)
*PPN Post-processor name
*STX Syntax to be used or not for Cycles (Y/N)
*TPS Compute only, no generation of APT, NC code or Clfile.
*FCP Force compute.
*TOM Tool Output Management (1: Tip, 2:Tool center).
*FOM File Operation Management (1: output one file per program, 2: output one file per
operation, 3: output one file for all programs).
*HPM Home Point Management (2: write home point of the machine in FROM or GOTO
according to the machine parameter).
*LCK Lock operations.
*SRP 1 Rapid feedrate at start of each operation.
*RAP 1 Rapid defined according to the value defined on the machine feedrate.
*RMT 1 No GOTO statement is to be included before each tool change.
*GBC 1 Remove GOTO statements before axial machining operations.
*PAC 1 Remove double points after PP commands.
*ALP 1 Remove aligned points.
*SPC Split circle into two circular arcs.
0: No split.
1: If the circle angle is greater than 179 degrees, it is split into two equal circular arcs
(this is known as the V5 mode).
2: If the circle angle between 179 and 181 degrees, or between 359 and 361 degrees,
it is split into two circular arcs.
The first arc has an angle of 90 degrees, the second has an angle of "circle angle-90"
degrees (this is known as the V4 mode).
If the keyword if not used, the circle is not split.

*NDX N.D Format for point coordinates
N=total number of digits for each point coordinate
D=number of digits after the decimal point for each point coordinate.
*NDI N.D Format for axial components
N=total number of digits for tool axis vector component
D=the number of digits after the decimal point for tool axis vector component.
Manage Batch Queue

This task shows how to use the batch queue management functionality.
You have the possibility of managing tool path computation outside the interactive session, with the possibility of scheduling the execution
of several batch jobs.
Capabilities include:
● possibility to select machining operation, manufacturing program or Part Operation

● immediate or differed execution mode
● management and edition of the list of computations to be done
● batch monitoring during execution
● possibility to an output NC file (APT, clfile, or NC code) with your job.
Always save your program modifications before computing NC data.
For best results, you should first verify the operations of your program by means of a replay or simulation. There should be no operations
to be updated or in an undefined state.
1. Click Manage Batch Queue .
The NC Batch Management dialog box appears.
2. Click Create a Job .
The Job Definition dialog box appears allowing you to select either a program or part operation in the Process List by means of the [...]
button.
Two options are possible:
● Compute tool path and synchronize:

Click OK to add the defined job to the list in the NC Batch Management dialog box.
Only the tool path will be computed.
● File generation:
Click the File Generation button. This allows you to request an output NC file (APT, clfile, or NC code) with your job. The NC file
parameters are defined in a similar way to that described in Generate APT Source File in Batch Mode. A different output type can be
requested for each job.
The figure below shows the NC Batch Management dialog box when two programs have been selected for processing. Note that an APT
output file has been requested for each job. The status column shows that the two programs are waiting to be computed.
Properties allows you to modify the selected job.
Delete Current Job allows you to delete the selected job
Move Up and Move Down allow you to move the selected job up or down in the list.
Delete All allows you to delete all the jobs in the list.
3. Select the desired batch mode:
● Deferred: the computation will start at the designated time
● Immediate: the computation will start as soon as you click the Activate button.
4. Click the [...] button to specify the desired location of the log file.
5. When the job list is defined, click Activate to execute the jobs in the specified order.
When a job is finished, you can click Synchronize to synchronize the computed tool path with the CATProcess.
Clicking the Stop button stops the execution of the job list.
A job may have one of the following statuses: Waiting, Started, Computed or Synchronized. To know the status of the jobs, just select
a job in the list.
In the figure below the status column shows that the first program has been computed.
The second program has also been computed and the resulting tool path is synchronized with the CATProcess. The operations in the
program now have Computed status in the specification tree:
6. You can consult the log file using the Log button.
7. Click OK to quit the NC Batch Management dialog box.
Generate NC Documentation
This task shows how to generate NC documentation in HTML format.
You can use the following scripting languages, depending on the platform you are running on:
● BasicScript 2.2 SDK for UNIX (BasicScript is a registered trademark of Summit Software Company)
● VBScript, short for Visual Basic Scripting Edition, for Windows (Visual Basic is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation).
Users on Windows must have Windows Scripting Host installed.
You should have previously customized a CATScript file that defines the layout of the document you
want to generate.
Samples are delivered with the product in \Startup\Manufacturing\Documentation.
1. Select Generate Documentation .
The Process Documentation dialog box appears.
2. Select the CATScript file by clicking the Browse button on the right of the Script field.
In this version, just leave Process as the Process name.

3. Specify the folder and file where the documentation is to be generated by clicking the Browse
button on the right of the Path field.
4. Click OK to generate your documentation.
An extract from a Sample Shop Floor Documentation delivered with this User's Guide is given
below.
Please note that the documentation can include machining times for machining operations and
manufacturing programs.
Import APT Source File

You can import an existing NC data file into a manufacturing program. This task shows how to import
an APT source file. This creates an ordered sequence of operations in the program from information in
the imported file.
For more information about importing NC data files, please refer to:
● Syntaxes Interpreted by APT Import
● NC Data Import to Support Legacy Data.
1. Right-click the Manufacturing Program entity in the specification tree and select Import APT,
Clfile or NC Code File.
The NC File Import dialog box appears allowing you to select the type of NC data file to be
imported:
● APT
● Clfile
● NC code.
Note that in this case the Post Processor type must be set in the Tools > Options > Machining
> Output tab.
Select APT using the combo, then click the Input File button.
If the selected NC data type is NC Code, a combo field appears in the dialog box for selecting the
desired Post Processor file.
2. The Read NC File dialog box appears.
Navigate to the desired APT file and click the Open button.
3. The NC File Import dialog box is updated with the selected input file. Click OK to import this file in
the program.
The PPR tree is updated with the machining information of the imported file.
NC data objects appear in the Manufacturing Program for each tool change in the imported file.
A Tool path object is associated to each computed APT Import entity.
All necessary PP instructions are added to the program. Typical content is shown below:
● Post-Processor Instruction.1:
$$ -----------------------------------------------------------------
$$ Generated on Monday, December 13, 2004 05:39:06 PM
$$ CATIA APT VERSION 1.0
$$ -----------------------------------------------------------------
$$ Manufacturing Program.1
$$ Part Operation.1
PARTNO PART TO BE MACHINED

COOLNT/ON
CUTCOM/OFF
$$ Start generation of : Tool Change.1
TOOLNO/1, 10.000000
TPRINT/T1 End Mill D 10
LOADTL/1
$$ End of generation of : Tool Change.1
All tools referenced in the imported NC file appear in the Resources List.
● You can import an NC file anywhere in the Manufacturing program:
❍ If you select a machining operation, the file will be imported just after the operation.
❍ If you select the Manufacturing Program, the file will be imported at the start of the program.
● You can right-click the APT Import entity in the tree to access a contextual menu that allows you
to:
❍ replay the APT source
❍ replace the associated tool
❍ rename or assign a comment to the APT source file.
● The machining time displayed after replaying an imported APT source may not be the exact value.
This is because there is no distinction between machining and transition feedrates in the APT
source. For an imported APT source, machining time is computed by taking the smallest feedrate
value as machining feedrate and bigger feedrate values as transition feedrates. If this is the case
for the APT source under consideration, the machining time will be correct.
● Limitation for turning operations processed on a milling center machine.
When you import an APT source file (or clfile) generated from a program containing turning
operations processed on a milling center machine, data concerning axial and radial axes for the
turning operations is missing from the imported file. The imported NC data will not be correctly
replayed or simulated in Video mode because the turning tool cannot be correctly oriented.
Note that a milling center machine is any machine different from a lathe machine or multi-turret
machine.
This section contains the description of the menu commands and toolbars that are common to the Machining products. The Advanced
Machining workbench below is shown as an example.
Menu Bar
Toolbars
Specification Tree
NC Manufacturing Menu Bar

The various menus and menu commands that are common to NC Manufacturing products are described below.
Start File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help
Tasks corresponding to general menu commands are described in the Version 5 Infrastructure User's Guide.
Edit Menu
Please note that most of the commands in the Edit menu are common facilities offered by the Version 5
Infrastructure. The NC Manufacturing edit commands available depend on the type of object being edited:
Manufacturing Program or other entity.
Edit > Manufacturing Program.x object
Note that you can access the same menu contextually by right-clicking the object in the PPR tree.
Command... Description...
Definition Opens the Manufacturing
Program dialog box for
consultation, edition, replay or
simulation.
Deactivate/Activate Deactivates the program for
replay or NC output. It can be
made active again with
Activate.
Hide/Show Children Hides the child nodes of the
program. They can be visualized
again with Show.
Start Video Simulation Allows direct access to Video
using NC Code material removal simulation
using NC code.
Simulate Machine using If the NC Machine Tool
NC Code Simulation product is installed,
you can simulate the machine
using NC code. See NC Machine
Tool Simulation User's Guide for
more information.
Replay Tool Path See Replay the Tool Path.
Start Video Simulation Allows direct access to Video
using Tool Path material removal simulation
using tool path data.
Simulate Machine using If the NC Machine Tool

Tool Path Simulation product is installed,
you can simulate the machine
using tool path data. See NC
Machine Tool Simulation User's
Guide for more information.
Compute Tool Path Allows you to choose a tool path
computation mode for the
program:
either compute if not already
done
or force computation even when
tool path exists.
Remove Tool Path Removes computed tool paths
from the program.
Lock/Unlock Children Locks all the machining
operations of a program.
Locked operations can be
unlocked with Unlock
Children.
Lock/Unlock Tool Path Locks all the tool paths of a
program. Locked tool paths can
be unlocked with Unlock Tool
Path.
Remove Video Result Removes all saved material
simulation Videos from the
program.
Generate NC Code See Generate NC Code for the
Interactively Program.
If an NC file is associated to the
Display NC File program, allows the display of
that file. See Display NC File.
Generate Tool Changes See Tool Change.
Delete Generated Tool See Tool Change.
Changes
Generate Machine See Machine Rotation.
Rotations
Delete Generated See Machine Rotation.
Machine Rotations
Import APT, Clfile or NC See Import an APT file.
Code File
Deletes indices not used by a
Delete Unused Indices
Copy operator.
Process Table See Process Table.
Expand tree to Expands the PPR tree down to
machining operations MO level.
Edit > Part Operation.x object

Definition Opens the Part Operation dialog
box for consultation or edition.
Activate/Deactivate Deactivates the Part Operation.
It can be made active again.
Show/Hide Children Hides the child nodes of the
part operation. They can be
shown again.
Assign Machine from File Allows assigning a generic
machine (CATProduct) to the
Part Operation.
Assign Machine from Allows assigning a machine
PPR from the Resource List to the
Part Operation.
Expand tree to tool Expands the PPR tree down to
changes tool change level.
Edit > Machining Operation.x object
Definition Accesses the operation's
definition dialog box.
Deactivate/Activate Deactivates the operation for
replay or NC output. It can be
made active again.
Hide/Show Children Hides the child nodes of the
operation. They can be shown
again.
Replace Tool Allows replacing a tool on an
operation.
Replay Tool Path See Replay the Tool Path.
Compute Tool Path Allows you to choose a tool path
computation mode for the
operation:
either compute if not already
done
or force computation even when
tool path exists.
Remove Tool Path Removes computed tool paths
from the operation.
Pack/Unpack Tool Path Allows compressing an

operation's tool path information
in an external tpl-suffixed file.
Unpacking is also possible.
Several operations can be

selected for packing. In this case,
one tpl file is created for each
operation. In the PPR tree, a
mask symbol on the operation
indicates that it is packed.
Lock/Unlock Locks the computed machining
operation. It can be unlocked
using Unlock.
Lock/Unlock Tool Path Locks the tool path of a computed
machining operation. It can be
unlocked using Unlock Tool
Path.
Remove Video Result Removes a saved material
simulation Video from the
operation.
Starts Machine If the NC Machine Tool Simulation
Simulation product is installed, you can
switch from the Machining
workbench to the NC Machine
Tool Simulation workbench by
clicking this command.
Import APT, Clfile or NC See Import an APT file.
Code File
Start Video Simulation Run full Video from last Video
result.
Edit > Manufacturing View.x object
Note that you can access the same menu contextually by right-clicking the object in the Manufacturing View.
Sort by Features Sorts the view by features.
Sort by Patterns Sorts the view by patterns.
Sort by Operations Sorts the view by operations.
Sort by Tooling Sorts the view by tooling criteria.
Sort by Machining Sorts the view by machining
Features features.
Delete Unused Deletes unused machining
features. You can delete either all
unused machining features or all
unused machining features of a
given type.
View > Machining Menu


Manufacturing View See Manufacturing View.
Machining Process View See Machining Process View.
The Machining Gantt Chart can be
used to review machining
operations on multi-turret
Machining Gantt Chart
machines. Please refer to the
Multi-Slide Lathe Machining User's
Guide for more information.
Insert Menu
Creates Machining Operations in
the program. This is described in
Machining Operations
the User's Guides of the various
NC products.
See Insert > Auxiliary Operations,
below.
See Insert > Machining Features,
Machining Features
below.
Insert > Auxiliary Operations

Tool Change Creates a Tool Change.
Machine Rotation Creates a Machine Rotation.
Machine Instruction Available if NC Machine Tool
Simulation is installed.
See NC Machine Tool Simulation
User's Guide for more information.
Machining Axis Change Creates a Machining Axis Change.
Post-Processor Creates a PP Instruction.
Instruction
COPY Operator Creates a COPY Operator.
TRACUT Operator Creates a TRACUT Operator.
Copy Transformation Creates a Copy Transformation
Instruction Instruction.
Insert > Machining Features

Milling Features Creates Milling type Machining
Features in the program. This is
described in the User's Guides of
the relevant NC products.
Machining Pattern See Machining Pattern.
Machining Axis System Creates a Machining Axis System
feature, which is referenced in the
Machining Axis Change auxiliary
operation.
Tools Menu
Please note that most of the commands available in the Tools menu are common facilities offered by the
Version 5 Infrastructure. Specific Machining commands are described in the present document.
Formula Allows editing parameters and formula.
Image Allows capturing images.
Macro Allows recording, running and editing macros.
Utility Allows access to batch utilities.
Customize Allows customizing the workbench.
Visualization Allows management of visualization filters.
Filters
Options See Customizing Settings for Machining.
Standards Allows access to standards (general, drafting, and so on).

Conferencing Allows access to the Conferencing capability.
Machining Tools Allows creating a Process Template.
> Isolate
Process Data
NC Manufacturing Toolbars
The NC Manufacturing Infrastructure provides a number of toolbars that are common to all the NC machining
products. These are described below.
Manufacturing Program Toolbars

Measure Toolbar
Manufacturing Program Toolbar

The Manufacturing Program toolbar contains the following commands for creating manufacturing program and
part operation entities.
See Part Operation
See Manufacturing Program


This toolbar contains commands for creating auxiliary operations in the program.
See Machine Rotation
Machine Instruction, available if NC Machine Tool Simulation is installed.
Manages machine axes motion and/or lock machine axes in the machining program.
External/Peripheral axis position and/or lock.
Lock parallel axis.
Example: NC Machine with W axis.
Capability to influence machine simulation by positioning rotary axes at user defined positions.
Control over machine configuration.
Example: NC machine with 2 head positions.
Integration with Automatic Transition Path generation.
See Machine Rotation
See Post-Processor Instruction
See COPY Operator.
See TRACUT Operator.
See Copy-Transformation Instruction.
Opposite Hand Machining Options. See Opposite Hand Machining.
Reverse Machining Conditions. See Opposite Hand Machining.
Reorder Operations List. See Opposite Hand Machining.
Inverse Macros. See Opposite Hand Machining.
The following toolbar is accessed from the drop-down icon in the Auxiliary Operations toolbar.
It contains icons for creating and editing Tool Change operations as follows. Please note that the icon representing a Tool
Change operation in the tree looks like this: .

See Drill tool for more information about this resource
See Tap tool for more information about this resource
See Thread Mill tool for more information about this resource
See Countersink tool for more information about this resource
See Reamer tool for more information about this resource
See Spot Drill tool for more information about this resource
See Center Drill tool for more information about this resource
See Multi-Diameter Drill tool for more information about this resource
See Boring and Chamfering tool for more information about this resource
See Two-Sides Chamfering tool for more information about this resource
See Boring Bar tool for more information about this resource
See Counterbore Mill tool for more information about this resource
See End Mill tool for more information about this resource
See Face Mill tool for more information about this resource
See Conical Mill tool for more information about this resource
See T-Slotter tool for more information about this resource.


This toolbar contains the commands for automatically creating all necessary transition paths in the program
according to user-defined transition planes and necessary machine rotations.
See Generate Transition Paths in a Program.
Generate Transition Paths
Remove Transition Paths
Update Transition Paths.


This toolbar contains the following tools to help you validate the tool path and generate NC output.
See Replay Tool Path
See Generate NC Code in Batch Mode
See Generate NC Code Interactively
See Manage Batch Queue
See Generate NC Documentation
Screen capture for associating a JPEG image to an activity (that is, part operation,
manufacturing program, machining operation, and so on).
During NC Documentation generation, an IDL interface can be called in order to read the
image associated to the activity. A URL link must be made from the HTML documentation to
the image in order to retrieve it in the generated HTML documentation.
Starts Machine Simulation
This icon is added to the toolbar if the NC Machine Tool Simulation product is installed. You
can use this icon to switch from a Machining workbench to the NC Machine Tool Simulation
workbench.
Please refer to the NC Machine Tool Simulation User's Guide for more information.

This toolbar contains commands for managing machining features. The commands available depend on the
Machining workbench (the figure below illustrates the toolbar for Prismatic Machining).
The commands that are common to all workbenches are:
See Machining Patterns
Machining Axis System
See Manufacturing View.
Commands that are specific to a Machining workbench are described in the user's guide of the corresponding
product.

This toolbar contains a number of auxiliary commands.
Open Catalog.
See procedure for Applying machining processes.
Import/List Tools.
See procedure for searching tools described in Select or Create a Tool.
Replace Tools.
See procedure described in Replace Tools.
The Activity Selection sub-toolbar offers a choice between:
No Display of Tool path or Geometry of selected operation
Display Tool Path of selected operation
Display Geometry of selected operation.
Display Status of Selected Activities.

Allows display of activity status in tree. This command is available when the Update Activity Status
Automatically checkbox is not selected in the Tools > Options > Machining > General tab.
Synchronize Process.
See methodology dealing with NC Synchronization in Manufacturing Hub Context.
Process Table.
See procedure dealing with Process Table.
NC Gantt Chart
This command is available for machines that have multiple turrets. For more information, please refer
to the Multi-Slide Lathe Machining User's Guide.
For machining operations that use part and check surfaces, you can now choose to show or hide that
geometry using commands of the Hide/Show Geometry as follows:
Hide/Show part elements
Hide/Show check elements


A number of geometry selection commands are available for selecting parts, check surfaces, drives, and so on.
Please note that any hidden geometry selected using these commands is not taken into account in subsequent
tool path computations. For more information, please refer to the rules described in Tool Path Computation
when Hidden Geometry is Present.
Edge Selection Toolbar

The Edge Selection toolbar contains commands to help you select edges of contours when specifying geometry
in machining operations. Please note that only some of the following commands and options are available for
some operations (5-axis Flank Contouring, for example).
Display options panel allows you access to the following dialog box for specifying Link
types, propagation domains, and propagation parameters.
Link types: You can apply a global link type for managing gaps during contour
selection by choosing one of the following:
● Automatic: contour selection is propagated up to a selected edge

● No link: gaps are not filled
● Line insert: a line segment is used to fill a gap
● Linear extrapolation: two extrapolated line segments are used to fill a gap
● Radial axial: for geometry in turning operations, a radial-axial transition is inserted
● Axial radial: for geometry in turning operations, an axial-radial transition is inserted.
Reverse Propagation: During edge selection, you can click this button to reverse the
direction in which the following edges are to be selected.
Propagation Domains: By default, only the edges included in the current Body (or
OpenBody) can be selected. You can add other bodies by clicking the Add button and
selecting new bodies in the 3D viewer. You can remove selected bodies by right-clicking
the Propagation Domains area and selecting Reset.
During automatic propagation, if there are more that one possible edges for selection,
the best candidate is selected according to the following criteria:
● the gap between the last selected edge and the candidate edge must be less than
the Maximum gap
● the angle between the tangent of the candidate edge and the tangent to the last
selected edges must be less than the Maximum angle. If there still more that one
candidates, the one that makes the smallest angle is preferred.
Max Steps forward: When navigating on a belt of edges, propagation stops when the
number of steps (or edges) forward is reached. In this case the label Next? appears at
the end of the last selected edge to prompt a user action.
Steps Back: When resetting previous edge selections, this parameter specifies the
number of edges (or steps) that will be reset.
Navigate on Belt of Edges allows you to select all edges that are tangent to the one
you have selected.
● Select an edge and then click the icon.
Navigate on Edges Until an Edge allows you to select all edges that are tangent
between start edges and a stop edge.
● Select two edges that are tangent (to give the direction of selection) and then click
the icon.
● Select a third edge where you want selection to end.
Close Contour with Line.

● Select a contour or series of lines to form a contour and click on this icon. A straight
line is inserted from the beginning of the contour to the end of it.
Insert Lines on Gaps allows you to create a line between two points.
● Click the icon then select one point as the beginning of the line and then select a
second point for the end of the line.
Reset Selection to Step Back resets the previous edge selections. The number of
edges that are reset is determined by the number of Steps Back given in the Options
dialog box.
Reset Selection to Stop Edge resets the last edge selections up to the last stop edge.
Reset All Selections resets all selections made with the Edge Selection toolbar.
Accept Geometry Selections allows you to accept selected geometry and exit the
selection mode.
Cancel Geometry Selections allows you to refuse any selected geometry and exit
selection mode.
Face Selection
The Face Selection toolbar and Tools Palette appear when face selection is necessary for machining operations.
Face Selection Toolbar
The Face Selection toolbar contains commands to help you select faces when specifying geometry in machining
operations.
Navigate on Belt of Faces allows you to select all faces that are adjacent to the one
you have selected.
● Select two adjacent faces and click the icon. All adjacent face are selected.
Navigate on Faces Until a Face allows you to select all faces that are adjacent
between start faces and a stop face.
● Select two faces that are adjacent (to give the direction of selection) and then click
the icon.
● Select a third face where you want selection to end.
Navigate on Faces allows you to select all faces which are tangent to a selected face.
● Select a face and then click this icon.
Preview the Contour allows you to highlight the contour of selected faces.
Select Faces in a Polygon Trap allows you to select all faces that are situated entirely
within a polygon.
● Select the icon.
● Click the places in the viewer where you want the corners of the polygon to be.
Double-click to end corner definition.
Select Normal Faces lets you select faces that are:

● normal to a main axis.
● parallel or perpendicular to a face that you select as reference.
The Define Normal Faces dialog box appears when you click the icon.
The By Axis tab allows you to select all of the flat faces that are normal to a main axis.
● The Reference body is No selection. Make sure it is selected (as in the image) and
click on the part to machine in the viewer.
● Choose an axis then click OK.
The faces normal to the axis you chose in the viewer are selected.
● Click OK in the Face Selection toolbar to confirm your selection.
The By Face tab allows you to select flat faces with reference to a face that you choose.
● Select a part as the Reference body.

● Click in the Reference face box the select the face on the part that you want to use
as reference.
● Choose whether you want to select faces that are perpendicular or parallel to that
face.
● Click OK to select these faces.
● Click OK in the Face Selection toolbar to confirm your selection.
Retrieve Faces of Same Color allows you to select all faces of a given color.
● Select a face of a given color and then click the icon. All faces of that color are
selected.
Note that you can define the color of a face via the Edit/Properties menu item when the
face is selected.
Selection Sets allows you to select faces belonging to previously created selection
sets. This action is a shortcut to the Selection Sets item in the Edit menu.
● Click on the icon and select the selection set you want to use in the displayed dialog
box.
● Press Close.
Reset All Selections.

● Click the icon to reset all selections made with the Face Selection toolbar.
Accept Geometry Selections allows you to accept selected geometry and exit
selection mode.
Cancel Geometry Selections allows you to refuse any already geometry and exit
selection mode.
Tools Palette
The Tools Palette toolbar contains commands to help you multi-select face elements.
Select enables you to select elements or deselect elements in the 3D geometry or in the
specification tree.
Use the Ctrl key to select several elements, and the Shift key to deselect already selected
elements.
Selection Trap enables you to select elements by drawing a trap.
Elements must be entirely located inside the trap to be selected.
Intersecting Trap enables you to select elements by drawing a trap.
Elements can either be located inside the trap or be intersected by the trap to be selected.
Polygon Trap enables you to select elements by drawing a closed polygon.
Any element inside the polygon will be selected.
Paint Stroke Trap enables you to select elements by drawing a paint stroke across them.
Outside Trap Selection enables you to select elements outside the trap.
Any object strictly outside the trap will be selected.
Intersecting Outside Trap Selection enables you to select elements outside the trap.
Any object strictly outside or partially outside the trap will be selected.
Interruption Feedback
In some cases when automatic propagation is interrupted, a label appears at the extremity of the last selected
edge. For example:
● Next?
This means that the maximum number of steps forward has been reached.
● Angle
This means that the maximum angle is not respected or there is an ambiguity.
● Tolerance
This means that the maximum gap is not respected.
● Closed Loop
This means that the contour is closed.

The Machining Process toolbar is available for P2 products and contains the following tools for creating and viewing
machining processes.
Displays the Machining Process View. See procedure described in Create a Machining Process.
See Create a Machining Process.
The Standard Machining Processes toolbar contains the following commands.
Machining Processes Application:

Applies all the machining processes of a catalog on a set of selected features.
Standard Drilling:
Inserts a Drilling operation in the program with a pre-selected tool according to the selected geometry.
Axial Process for Design Holes

Applies a generic drilling process dedicated to all design holes with operations according to the hole type.
Standard Multi-Axis Flank Contouring:
Inserts a Multi-Axis Flank Contouring operation in the program with a pre-selected tool according to the selected
geometry.

This toolbar contains the commands for optimizing the order of operations in the program according to pre-
defined sequencing rules.
See Auto-sequence operations of a program according to pre-

defined rules.

This toolbar is available for P2 products and contains the following tools for checking accessibility on the NC
machine.
Resource Context.
Imports resources such as an NC machine.
Workpiece Automatic Mount.
Automatically mounts the workpiece on the machine for current part operation.
Snap.
Snaps resources together.
Align on Machine commands.
Aligns objects using various methods:
● Align Side: aligns the side of a selected object with respect to a reference plane.
● Align Center: aligns the center of a selected object with respect to a reference plane.
● Distribute: evenly distributes 3 or more elements with respect to a reference line or plane.
● Rotate to Align: rotates a selected object with respect to a reference plane.
Attach.
Attaches selected objects together and creates Child/Parent link between them.
Measure Toolbar
This toolbar contains the following tools for measuring.
Measure Between measures between two elements. For more information please refer to
the procedure described in Measuring Properties.
Measure measures an element. For more information please refer to the procedure described
in Measuring Distances and Angles between Geometrical Entities.
Specification Tree
The Process Product Resources (PPR) specification tree is the same for all Machining workbenches.
Process List
Process List starts with a Root process node. It gives all the machining operations, associated tools, and
auxiliary operations that are required to transform a part from a rough to a finished state.
● Part Operation defines the manufacturing resources and the reference data.
● Manufacturing Program is the list of all of the operations and tool changes performed. The example
above shows that:
❍ Drilling.1 is complete and the tool path has not been computed
❍ Drilling.2 is complete and the tool path has been computed
❍ Drilling.3 does not have all of the necessary data (indicated by the Exclamation mask )
❍ Drilling.4 has been deactivated by the user (indicated by the Inactive mask )
❍ Drilling.5 has been modified and needs to be recomputed (indicated by the Update mask ).
Product List
Product List gives all of the parts to machine as well as CATPart documents containing complementary
geometry.
Resources List
Resources List gives all of the resources such as machines, tools, and tool assemblies that can be used in
the process. Contextual commands are available by right-clicking in the Resources List.
You can edit a tool or tool assembly by means of the Edit NC Resources contextual command. Note that a
resource in the list cannot be edited by double-clicking it.
You can save a tool or tool assembly in a catalog by means of the Save in Catalog contextual command.
You can assign a user-defined representation (CATPart or CATProduct) to the tool or tool assembly by means
of the Add User Representation contextual command.
You can delete unused resources from the list by:
● selecting all the resources of the same type (all the tools, for example)
● right-clicking and selecting the Delete Unused Resources contextual command.
You can duplicate a resource in the list using the Duplicate Resources contextual command. A name of the
duplicated resource is suffixed with '_n', where n is a number.
Expanding the Tree

The following behavior is aimed at improving performance:
● Only Part Operations and Programs are shown when you open your document.
● You can expand the tree level by level:
❍ Programs are shown when you expand the Part Operation level
❍ Tool changes are shown when you expand the Program level.
● You can expand the tree as follows using contextual menus:

❍ Expand Tree from Part Operation to Tool changes
❍ Expand Tree from Manufacturing Program to Machining operations
❍ Expand Tree from Tool Change to Tool paths.
The View > Tree Expansion menu provides a number of standard commands (such as expanding or
collapsing the entire tree).
Customizing
The tasks in this section describe ways in which you can customize your NC Manufacturing environment.
Machining
Access External Tool Catalogs
PP Word Syntaxes
NC Documentation
Customizing Settings for Machining

This section describes how to customize settings for Machining.
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the settings to suit your working habits. Your
customized settings are stored in permanent setting files: they will not be lost at the end of your session.
1. Select Tools > Options from the menu bar: the Options dialog box appears.
2. Select the Machining category in the tree to the left. The options for Machining settings appear, organized in tab
pages.
3. Select the tab corresponding to the parameters to be customized.
Parameters in this tab... Allow you to customize...

General general settings for all Machining products
Resources tooling, feeds&speeds and resource files
Operation machining operations
Output PP files and NC data output
Program manufacturing programs (sequencing, and so on)
Photo/Video material removal simulation
4. Set these options according to your needs.

5. Click OK to save the settings and quit the Options dialog box.
General
This document explains how to customize general settings for Machining products.
Select the General tab, which is divided up into areas.
Parameters in this area... Allow you to customize...

Performance settings for optimized performance
Tree Display display of the specification tree
Color and Highlight colors of displayed geometry and parameters
Tool Path Replay tool display during tool path replay
Complementary Geometry handling of geometry necessary for manufacturing
Design Changes use of the Smart NC mode and enhanced detection of design
changes.
Performance
Click the Optimize button in order to automatically set a number of the Machining options for optimized performance. These
options are listed in the Information dialog box that appears:
If you click Yes, these options will be set as described in the dialog box. Note that, if needed, you may locally reset any of
these options.
If you click No, the options will remain with their current settings.
The Information box also lists some recommendations for manually setting other options that have an influence on
performance.
Tree Display
● Select the check box if you want the status of activities in the tree to be updated automatically.
● If this check box is not selected, you can display the status of one or more selected activities in the tree using Display
Status of Selected Activities in the Auxiliary Commands toolbar.
If this check box is not selected, performance is improved.
By default, the check box is not selected.
Color and Highlight
● Select the colors to be used for identifying the various manufacturing entities by means of the combos.
Note that for Geometry that is not found or not up to date, you can select the colors used to display the valuated
parameters in the corresponding Operation or Feature dialog boxes.
● For certain entities, you can select the corresponding check box to use highlighting.
Performance is improved when all the Highlight check boxes are selected.
Tool Path Replay

Display tool near cursor position on tool path
Select this check box if you want to display the tool near your cursor position on the trajectory during a tool path replay.
You can display the tool at a specific point by clicking on the tool path. The tool will then be positioned on the nearest
computed point on the trajectory. To remove the tool from that position, just click anywhere on the tool or tool path.
Please note that, as from Release 15, this positioning capability is available even when the check box is not selected.
Display tool center instead of tool tip
Select this check box if you want to display the tool center point instead of the tool tip during a tool path replay.
Display circles
Select this check box if you want to display each circular trajectory as a circular arc instead of a set of discretization points.
The extremities of the circular arc are indicated by means of 'O' symbols.
This allows better control of the Point by Point replay mode, where it is necessary to make several interactions to replay a
circle (because of its representation by a set of points). With the graphic representation as a circle, only one interaction is
necessary to perform the replay.
By default, these check boxes are not selected.
Color of feedrates
Select the colors to be used for identifying the various feedrate types by means of the combos. The selected colors will be
displayed in the Different colors replay mode.
Complementary Geometry
Select the check box to create a CATPart dedicated to manufacturing-specific geometry in the Product List of the PPR tree.
By default, the check box is not selected.
Design Changes
Smart NC mode
Select this check box to activate the Smart NC mode. In this mode, an image of the geometry selected in machining
operations is kept to allow analysis of design changes.
Performance is improved when this check box is not selected.
Optimized detection of design changes
Select this check box to enable a geometrical comparison mode for detecting design changes.
This mode determines with more precision the design change status of machining operations when a product is replaced in
the Part Operation (using either the Part Operation editor or the Edit Links capability). This option has no effect on all other
design change methods such as direct modification in the Part.
By default, these check boxes are not selected.

Resources
This document explains how to customize resource settings for Machining products.
Select the Resources tab, which is divided up into areas.

Catalogs and Files the path name for resource files
Tool Selection the selection of tools
Automatic Compute from Tool Feeds and the update of feeds and speeds according to tooling data
Speeds
Tool Query Mode in Machining Processes tool queries in machining processes
Instantiation
Catalogs and Files
Enter the path of the folder containing tool catalogs, PP tables, macros, and machining processes. You can choose a folder by clicking
the [...] button.
You can concatenate paths using:
● a semi colon (;) character for Windows platforms

● a colon (:) character for UNIX platforms.
For example, if the concatenated folders E:\DownloadOfCXR12rel\intel_a\startup and e:\users\jmn\NC in the figure above contain PP
tables, then those PP tables will be available for selection in the Part Operation's Machine Editor dialog box.
Please note that:
● PP tables must be contained in folders named Manufacturing\PPTables

● tools must be contained in folders named Manufacturing\Tools.
Tool Selection
Automatic query after modification
Select this check box if you want to to activate an automatic query after each modification of a tool parameter. Performance is improved
when this check box is not selected.
Tool preview after selection
Select this check box if you want to preview the tool after selection.
By default, these check boxes are selected.
Automatic Compute from Tool Feeds and Speeds
Feedrate attributes of the operation
Select this check box if you want the Automatic Update of Feedrates option to be set by default in the Feeds and Speeds tab page of
This option allows feedrates of operations to be automatically updated whenever feedrate information on the tool is modified.
Spindle attributes of the operation
Select this check box if you want the Automatic Update of Speeds option to be set by default in the Feeds and Speeds tab page of
This option allows spindle speeds of operations to be automatically updated whenever speed information on the tool is modified.
Tool Query mode in Machining Processes Instantiation
Select the type of Tool Query to be executed when a Machining Process is instantiated:
● automatically computed Tool Query

● interactively defined Tool Selection in case of multiple results
● interactively defined Tool Selection if no tool is found.
Depending on the selected option, the Advanced tab page of the Search Tool dialog box shows the solved Tool Query for each operation
in the Machining Process.
By default, the Automatic Tool Query option is selected.

In the example below, you can choose one of the tools found in the ToolsSampleMP, or use the Look in combo to select a tool from
the current document or another tool catalog.
Operation
This document explains how to customize machining operation settings for Machining products.
Select the Operation tab, which is divided up into areas.

Default Values the use of default values
After Creation or Machining Process (MP) what happens after creating machining operations or machining
Instantiation processes
When Copying the duplication of geometry links

Display tool path displays of operations
User Interface dialog boxes of 3-axis surface machining operations
Start Feedrate the feedrate at the start of operation.
Default Values
Select the check box if you want operations to be created with the values used in the current program.
The values and units of attributes at the creation step of an operation are set to the values and units of the last edited and
validated operation whatever its type (that is, exit the operation definition dialog box using OK).
Otherwise the default settings delivered with the application are used.
By default, this check box is selected.
After Creation or Machining Process (MP) Instantiation
Select the desired check boxes to specify conditions to be applied when you create machining operations or machining
processes.
Sequence machining operation

Machining operations are automatically sequenced in the current program after creation.
Otherwise, sequencing can be managed in the feature view.
Search compatible tool in previous operations
When creating an operation, if a compatible tool exists in a previous operation of the current program, it will be set in the
new operation.
Otherwise, the operation will be incomplete.
Use a default tool
When creating an operation, a search is done in the document to find a compatible tool. If no compatible tool exists, a
default one is created in the document and set in the created operation.
If check box is not selected, no tool will be defined on the operation.
Start edit mode (not available for machining processes)
When creating a machining operation, Edit mode is automatically started to allow modifying parameters of the created
operation.
Otherwise, the operation is added to the program but the machining operation editor is not started.
MP instantiation: keep the absolute position of the tool axis
When a machining process is instantiated, the tool axes of the activities in the MP keep their absolute positions. Otherwise, if
the check box is not selected, these positions are changed in order to keep the relative components of the tool axis.
When Copying
Select the check box if you want geometry links to be duplicated in a copied operation.
Otherwise the geometry must be defined for the copied operation. Performance is improved when this check box is not
selected.
Display
Select the check box if you want to display tool paths of operations in the current Part Operation.
By default, this check box is not selected.
User Interface
Select the check box if you want to have the possibility of simplifying the dialog boxes of machining operations (that is, you
can display the minimum number of parameters necessary for a correct tool path). This setting is available for 3-axis surface
machining operations only.
Start Feedrate
If the checkbox is selected, the following paragraphs illustrate the expected behaviour.
Otherwise, the behaviour is the same as for V5R13 level.
If a clearance macro is defined and active on machining operation B (see figure below), the feedrate at the start of operation
B is the feedrate of the transition path in the plane of the clearance macro.
If there is no clearance macro defined on operation B (or if a clearance macro is defined but inactive), the feedrate at the
start of operation B in the figure below is:
● either rapid feedrate if the Set rapid feedrate at start of operations NC output option is set
● or the first feedrate of operation B (this may be the feedrate of the approach macro of operation B, for example).

Output
This document explains how to customize data output settings for Machining products.
Select the Output tab, which is divided up into areas.

Post Processor and Controller Emulator the type of Post Processor and Controller Emulator files to be used
Folder for generating and simulating NC code and the path where these
files are located
Tool Path Storage the tool path storage capability
Tool Path Edition the tool path edition capability
During Tool Path Computation contact point storage
Tool Output Point type of tool output point
Tool Output Files ... Location default paths for NC output files storage.
Post Processor and Controller Emulator Folder
Select the desired option:
● None: no Post Processor or Controller Emulator is defined. NC code output is not possible in this case
● Cenit: you can choose from among the Post Processor and Controller Emulator parameter files proposed by Cenit to
generate and simulate your NC code
● IMS: you can choose from among the Post Processor and Controller Emulator parameter files proposed by Intelligent
Manufacturing Software (IMS) to generate and simulate your NC code
● ICAM: you can choose from among the Post Processor and Controller Emulator parameter files proposed by ICAM
Technologies Corporation (ICAM) to generate and simulate your NC code.
Enter the path of the folder containing Post processors and Controller Emulators. You can choose a folder by clicking the [...]
button. File concatenation is possible.
By default, the None option is selected.
Tool Path Storage

Select the desired option to store tool path data either in the current document or in an external file (as a tpl file).
For operations with large tool paths (more than 100 000 points), tool path storage in an external file is recommended.
By default, the Store tool path in the current document option is selected.
Tool Path Edition
Select the check box if you want to be able to edit tool paths even when the operation is locked.
This capability is available only for activities with a tool path node in the specification tree.
During Tool Path Computation
Select the check box if you want to store contact points in the tool path.
Performance is improved when this check box is not selected.
Tool Output Point
Select the desired option to select one of the following as output point:
● tool tip
● tool center point
● tool center point for ball end tools (that is, any tool with the Ball-end tool attribute selected or an end mill whose nominal
diameter is equal to twice the corner radius).
Performance is better when the Tool Tip option is selected.
By default, the Tool Tip option is selected.
Default File Locations
Specify default locations for storing Tool Path files, NC Documentation, and NC Code output.
You can store tool paths files (tpl files) in the same folder as the CATProcess by selecting the check box. This allows you to
store these files according to your CATProcess context. Otherwise, you can choose another location by clicking the [...]
button.
For NC Documentation, and NC Code output you can choose a folder easily by clicking the [...] button.
You can customize the extension to be used for NC Code output (by default, the suffix used is CATNCCode).
Please note that Video results are stored in the NC Code output directory. This is done by using Associate Video Result to
Machining Operation in the Replay Tool Path dialog box.
By default, the Tool path: Store at same location as the CATProcess check box is not selected.
Program
This document explains how to customize manufacturing program settings for Machining products.
Select the Program tab to customize program auto-sequencing rules and priorities. These settings are mainly
intended for the administrator.
Make sure that the document in the sequencing rules path (AllSequencingRules.CATProduct in the example
below) is accessible in Read/Write.
Auto Sequencing
Access to sequencing rules settings
Select the Access to sequencing rules settings check box to authorize user access to sequencing rules.
You can then specify the path for the rules base
You can choose a rules base easily by clicking the [...] button.
Display sequencing rules and priorities
Select the Display sequencing rules and priorities check box to authorize the display of sequencing rules
and priorities in the user's view. In this case two more check boxes can be selected in order to:
● allow the user to filter rules

● allow the user to modify rule priorities.

Photo/Video
This document explains how to customize material removal simulation settings for Machining products.
Select the Photo/Video tab, which is divided up into areas.

Simulation at material removal simulation at program of Part Operation level
Video Video material removal simulation options
Photo Photo material removal simulation options
Performance settings that influence performance
Color color during material removal simulation
Positioning Move allowed tool axis variation between two operations
Simulation at
Select the desired option to perform material removal simulation at either Program or Part Operation level.
Depending on the selected level, simulation begins either from the start of the manufacturing program or from the start of
the Part Operation.
Best performance is obtained with Program level.
By default, the Program level option is selected.
Video
Stop at tool change
Select the Stop at tool change check box if you want the Video simulation to stop each time a tool change is encountered
in the program.

Collision detection
Select the desired Collisions detection option to:
● ignore collisions during the Video simulation

● stop the Video simulation at the first collision
● continue the Video simulation even when collisions are detected. In this case, you can consult the list of collisions at any
time during the simulation.
Best performance is obtained when collisions are ignored.
By default, the Ignore option is selected.
Touch is collision
Select the Touch is collision check box if you want touch (or contact) type of collision to be detected.
Multiple Video result on program
Select the Multiple Video result on program check box if you want to store video results on more than one operation in
the program.
Photo
Select the desired Fault box type for examining remaining material or gouges:
● Transparent: to display a transparent bounding box

● Wireframe: to display a wireframe bounding box
● None: if no bounding box is required.
By default, the Wireframe option is selected.
Select the check box to compute all information at the picked point.
Best performance is obtained when Fault box is set to None and the Compute all information at picked point check box
is not selected.
Performance
Tool and faceting
There are three methods of tool faceting used in Video simulation: Standard, Smaller and Larger.
The number of facets for a tool representation is determined by the chord deviation that is set for the tool diameter (0.005%
of the tool diameter).
● Smaller: The picture shows a rough approximation of a tool with six facets. Note that the chord deviation is always
inside the actual circle, and that the points are always on the circle (accurate).
This is the most accurate method for the Arc through Three Points command.
● Standard: The picture shows a rough approximation of a tool with six facets. Note that the chord deviation is partly
inside and partly outside the actual circle, and that the points are not always on the circle.
This is the best method for material removal simulation.

However, this is not suitable for the Arc through Three Points command.
● Larger: The picture shows a rough approximation of a tool with six facets. Note that the chord deviation is outside the
actual circle, and that the points are not on the circle.
This is not suitable for the Arc through Three Points command.
However, it can be useful for gouge detection.
By default, the Standard option is selected.
Photo resolution
Best performance is obtained when the Photo resolution is set to 0. In this case, a detailed simulation of a portion of the part
can be obtained using the Closeup command.
Increasing the resolution improves machining accuracy and gives a very detailed simulation. However, this requires
increased memory and computation time.
By default, this resolution is set to 0.
Tool axis interpolation angle (5-axis only)
Specify the maximum angle that the tool axis is allowed to vary between two consecutive points.
Best performance is obtained for an angle of 10 degrees. Decreasing the angle improves the precision of the simulation.
However, this requires increased memory and computation time.
By default, this angle is set to 1degree.
Optimized rendering for Video
Select the Optimized rendering for Video check box to obtain an optimized rendering that improves Video simulation
performance.
Otherwise, more realistic colors are obtained with a slightly degraded performance. Milling, drilling, and turning operations
are supported .
Color
Set the tool (and associated machined area) color to be the same as or different from the last tool, or have different colors
for all tools. Best performance is obtained with same colored tools.
By default, the All different option is selected.
Assign colors to the different tools using the associated color combo.
Assign colors to tool holders, parts, and fixtures using the associated color combos.
Positioning Move
Set the Maximum tool axis variation that is to be allowed between the end point of an operation and the start point of
the next operation. If the tool axis varies by an amount greater than the specified value, then the tool is positioned at the
start of the following operation.
By default, this angle is set to 1degree.


This task shows you how to build a customized tools catalog.
You will have to customize an Excel file and a VB macro file in order to build your tools catalog.
1. Edit an Excel file with the desired tool descriptions.
The characteristic attributes of each tool type are described in Tools.

You can include user-defined tool representations in your catalog. You do this by associating a CATPart
document containing this representation to the desired tool in the last column of the Excel file.
The user-defined tool representation will be displayed in the tool path replay.
2. Save the tool descriptions as a csv type file.
3. Edit the VB macro file to specify the input and output files. An example is shown below:
''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
'' VBScript for Manufacturing Tools catalog generation.
''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
Language="VBSCRIPT"
Sub CATMain()
csvFile ="MyCatalog.csv"
catalogFile ="MyCatalog.catalog"
'Get the outputDir and inputDir environment variables

inputDir = "HOME\Catalog"
outputDir = "HOME\Catalog"
'Creates a catalog document

Dim Catlg As Document
Set Catlg=CATIA.Documents.Add("CatalogDocument")
InitData1=inputDir & "\" & csvFile

Newcata1=outputDir & "\" & catalogFile
'Calls CreateCatalogFromcsv method on Catlg (ENDCHAPTER)
Catlg.CreateCatalogFromcsv InitData1 , Newcata1
Catlg.Close
End Sub
4. In your Version 5 session, select Tool >

Macro > Macros.
The Macro dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the VB macro file that you edited

previously, then click Run.
The tools catalog is created (MyCatalog.catalog) along with a report file (MyCatalog.report).
You can check this in the Search Tool dialog box.

Access to External Tool Catalogs

This task shows you how to customize access to the following external tool catalogs:
● CATIA Version 4 Manufacturing database under ORACLE or DB2/6000
● TDM (Tool Data Management) database under ORACLE .
CATIA Version 4 Manufacturing relational database (ORACLE)
Please note that the V4 database must be used as the server and the V5 session must be running in
client mode.
1. Declare the UNIX server on the client machine.
The client machine should have a client ORACLE installation (for example, on Windows it may be
installed on c:\orant).
The Unix server machine should be declared on the client machine, the tnsnames.ora file (for
example, in c:\orant\net80\admin) should be modified.
● The string MACHINE_NAME should be replaced by the name of the Unix server machine where
V4 database is installed.
● The string SID_NAME should be replaced by the name of the ORACLE SID name of V4
database installation.
● The string PORT_NUMBER should be replaced by the port number used for the ORACLE
installation.
Please contact the ORACLE administrator to locate the file.
Example:
MACHINE_NAME.SID_NAME =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST =
(ADDRESS =
(PROTOCOL = TCP)
(PORT = PORT_NUMBER )
(HOST = MACHINE_NAME)
)
)
(CONNECT_DATA = (SID = SID_NAME)
)
)
2. Customize the ...\intel_a\startup\Manufacturing\Database\CATIAV4NC.ini file of your CATIA V5

installation to define the default values for the connection.
● The string DatabaseType should be set to ORACLE.
● The string DatabaseName should be set to MACHINE_NAME.SID_NAME declared in the
tnsnames.ora file.
● The string User should be set to the Unix user who has access rights to the V4 database
● The string Password should be set to the password of the Unix user who has access rights to
the V4 database.
● The string ProjectName should be set to the name of the V4 database project to be
connected.
● The string CDMADictionary should be set to the name of the CDMA dictionary used for the V4
Example:
DatabaseType = ORACLE
DataBaseName =diva.AIX
User =catadm
Password =db2adm
ProjectName =MfgResources
CDMADictionary =CATIA
CATIA Version 4 Manufacturing relational database (DB2/6000)
Please note that the V4 database must be used as the server and the V5 session must be running in
client mode.
The client machine should have a DB2/6000 client installation.

The UNIX server machine should be declared on the client machine. The following commands
have to be executed by the db2 administrator of the client machine:
CATALOG TCPIP NODE nodename REMOTE hostname
CATALOG DATABASE database_name at NODE nodename AUTHENTICATION SERVER
nodename can be the name of the UNIX machine where server installation is done
hostname is the name of the UNIX machine where server installation is done
database_name is the name of the database on which the V4 database is installed.

2. Customize the ...\intel_a\startup\Manufacturing\Database\CATIAV4NC.ini file of your CATIA V5

● The string DatabaseType should be set to DB2.
● The string DatabaseName should be set to the name of the DB2 database used for the V4
● The string User should be set to the UNIX user who has access rights to the V4 database.
● The string Password should be set to the password of the UNIX user who has access rights to
the V4 database.
● The string ProjectName should be set to the name of the V4 database project to be
connected.
● The string CDMADictionary should be set to the name of the CDMA dictionary used for the V4
Example:
DatabaseType = DB2
DataBaseName =SAMPLE
User =catadm
Password =db2adm
ProjectName =MfgResources
CDMADictionary =CATIA
TDM (Tool Data Management) relational database (Oracle)
Please note that the TDM database must be installed and used as the server and the V5 session must
be running in client mode.
The client machine should have a client ORACLE installation (for example, on Windows it may be
installed on c:\orant).
The UNIX server machine should be declared on the client machine, the tnsnames.ora file (for
example, in c:\orant\net80\admin) should be modified.
● The string MACHINE_NAME should be replaced by the name of the UNIX server machine
where the TDM database is installed.
● The string SID_NAME should be replaced by the ORACLE SID name of the TDM database
installation.
● The string PORT_NUMBER should be replaced by the port number used for the ORACLE
installation.
Please contact the ORACLE administrator to locate the file.
Example:
MACHINE_NAME.SID_NAME =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST =
(ADDRESS =
(PROTOCOL = TCP)
(PORT = PORT_NUMBER )
(HOST = MACHINE_NAME)
)
)
(CONNECT_DATA = (SID = SID_NAME)
)
)
2. Customize the ...\intel_a\startup\Manufacturing\Database\TDM.ini file of your CATIA V5
● The string DatabaseName should be set to MACHINE_NAME.SID_NAME declared in the
tnsnames.ora file.
● The strings User and Password should be set to catia.
Example:
User =catia
Password =catia
DatabaseName =tdm.world
PP Word Syntaxes
This section shows you how to customize the following types of syntaxes in your PP word table:
● syntaxes associated to NC commands
● sequences of PP word syntaxes associated to NC instructions.
The Machining product will resolve the parameters of these syntaxes and syntax sequences and
generate the corresponding statements in the APT output.
A sample PP word table is delivered with the product in

\Startup\Manufacturing\PPTables\PPTableSample.pptable
It can be used as a basis for creating user-defined tables.
Please refer to PP Tables and Word Syntaxes for more information.
Some NC commands and NC instructions have default values. See NC Commands and NC Instructions
for syntaxes and default values.
Please note that this default value is output even when the NC command or NC instruction is
not present in the PP table.
The example below shows an NC command with explicit definition:
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_CHANGE_REF_PT
SWITCH/%MFG_QUADRANT
*END
If this output is not required, you must define an empty NC command or NC instruction.
For example:
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_CHANGE_REF_PT
*END
1. NC Commands
You can define for a given machine tool (i.e. post-processor) PP word syntaxes associated to
particular NC commands.
An NC command is a machine function such as feedrate declaration (NC_FEEDRATE) or spindle

activation (NC_SPINDLE_START).
A syntax comprises a major word and one or more syntax elements such as minor words,
numerical values, list values and parameters.
A syntax that includes lists or parameters is a parameterized syntax (see example below):
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_FEEDRATE
FEDRAT/%MFG_FEED_VALUE,&MFG_FEED_UNIT
*END
Note that the `&' character indicates a list and the `%' character indicates a parameter.
You can define only one syntax for each NC command.

The following example shows how the NC command NC_DELAY could be used in a Drilling Dwell
Delay operation.
2. Make sure that the PP word table is referenced by the machine used in the Part Operation and the
syntax associated with the NC_DELAY command is already created as follows:
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_DELAY
DELAY/&MFG_DELAY_UNIT,%MFG_DELAY_VALUE
*END
3. Create a Drilling Dwell Delay operation.

4. In the dialog box showing the available options, set the Dwell mode to Revolutions and enter a
numerical dwell value of `5'.
In this case the statement generated in the resulting APT source will be:
DELAY/REV,5.000
If the operation was created with the Dwell mode set to Time Units and a dwell value of `5', the
statement generated in the resulting APT source would be:
DELAY/5.000
1. NC Instructions
You can define for a given machine tool (i.e. post-processor) sequences of PP word syntaxes
associated to particular NC instructions.
NC instructions are either axial machining operations or auxiliary commands.
A syntax comprises a major word and one or more syntax elements such as minor words,
numerical values and standard parameters. A set of standard parameters is associated to each
NC instruction. Parameters may be combined in arithmetical expressions.
A syntax that includes parameters is a parameterized syntax (see example below):
*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_TOOL_CHANGE
*START_SEQUENCE
TOOLNO/%MFG_TOOL_NUMBER,%MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM
TPRINT/%MFG_TOOL_NAME
LOADTL/%MFG_TOOL_NUMBER
*END
*END
Note that the `%' character indicates a parameter.
You can define one or more syntax sequences for each NC instruction.
The following example shows how the NC instruction NC_DRILLING_DWELL_DELAY could be used
to generate a specific NC data output.
2. Make sure that the PP word table is referenced by the machine used in the Part Operation and the
syntax associated with NC_DRILLING_DWELL_DELAY instruction is already created as follows:
*START_SEQUENCE
CYCLE / DRILL, %MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH, %MFG_FEED_MACH_VALUE, &MFG_FEED_UNIT,
%MFG_CLEAR_TIP, DWELL, %MFG_DWELL_REVOL
*END
*END
3. Create a Drilling Dwell Delay operation.

4. In the dialog box showing the available options, set:
● hole depth to 25.0
● feedrate to 500.0
● approach clearance to 5.0
● Dwell mode to Revolutions and enter a numerical dwell value of `3'.
In this case the NC data output is as follows:
CYCLE/DRILL, 25.000000, 500.000000, MMPM, 5.000000, DWELL, 3

The PP word table is updated with your syntaxes when you save the file.
NC Documentation
This task shows you how to generate customized NC documentation.
You will have to customize a VBScript macro file according to the document that you want to generate.
You can use the following scripting languages, depending on the platform you are running on:
● BasicScript 2.2 SDK for UNIX (BasicScript is a registered trademark of Summit Software Company)
● VBScript, short for Visual Basic Scripting Edition, for Windows (Visual Basic is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation).
Users on Windows must have Windows Scripting Host installed.

1. Open a sample delivered with the product from \Startup\Manufacturing\Documentation.
2. Open the document delivered with the product in

\Startup\Manufacturing\Documentation\NCDocumentationReadMe.htm.
This document describes the interfaces to help you to produce NC manufacturing documentation.
3. Modify the sample according to the type of document you want.
4. Generate the documentation as described in Generate NC Documentation.

This task shows how to customize workbenches and tool bars from Machining Processes managed in catalog files.
You can define your own toolbars to create one or more operations in your program from the Machining Process instantiation
window.
1. In your catalog document (containing external feature links toward Machining Processes), select a component (an external
link).
2. Select Publish Catalog Object in the contextual menu (right-click) in the Keywords tab page.
3. The Publishing Catalog Alias window appears. Enter your Alias name.
Repeat this sequence for all Machining process links you want to use in a toolbar, then close your catalog document.
4. In your Machining workbench, select Tools > Customize.
The Customize window is appears.
If necessary, select the Toolbars tab page and create your toolbar.
5. In the Commands tab page, select Catalogs in the Categories list.
6. Select your command (corresponding to the Alias name) that you want to add in your toolbar.
7. Select the icon that you want to associate to the command (Hide/Show Properties button).
8. Drag and Drop the selected command line onto your toolbar.
Now you can use the command through its toolbar whenever necessary.
Reference Information
This section provides essential reference information on the following topics.
Machining Resources
NC Macros
Feeds and Speeds
NC Data Options
APT Formats
Clfile Formats
Feature Attributes for Tool Queries, Checks and Formula
PLM Integration
Machining Resources
All supported Machining resources are presented in this section:
● Machine tools:
❍ 3-axis machine
❍ 3-axis machine with table rotation
❍ 5-axis machine
❍ Horizontal lathe
❍ Vertical lathe
● Tool assemblies
❍ Mill and drill assembly
❍ Lathe assembly
● Tools for milling and drilling operations:
❍ Face Mill
❍ End Mill
❍ Center Drill
❍ Spot Drill
❍ Drill
❍ Countersink
❍ Reamer
❍ Boring Bar
❍ Tap
❍ T-Slotter
❍ Multi-Diameter Drill
❍ Two Sides Chamfering Tool
❍ Boring and Chamfering Tool
❍ Conical Mill
❍ Thread Mill
❍ Counterbore Mill
● Tools (that is, insert holders) for turning operations:

❍ External Insert Holder
❍ Internal Insert Holder
❍ External Groove Insert Holder
❍ Frontal Groove Insert Holder
❍ Internal Groove Insert Holder
❍ External Thread Insert Holder
❍ Internal Thread Insert Holder
● Inserts for turning operations:
❍ Diamond Insert
❍ Square Insert
❍ Triangular Insert
❍ Round Insert
❍ Trigon Insert
❍ Groove Insert
❍ Thread Insert
The described attributes are particularly useful for tasks such as Building a catalog of tools.
Tools for Milling and Drilling Operations

Face Mill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgFaceMillTool
This tool type has only one compensation site P1, which
is located at the extremity of the tool.
Manufacturing geometry attributes used in this resource are:
Nominal Diameter (D) MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM

Outside Diameter (Da) MFG_OUTSIDE_DIAM
Overall Length (L) MFG_OVERALL_LGTH
Length (l) MFG_LENGTH
Cutting Length (lc) MFG_CUT_LENGTH
Corner Radius (Rc) MFG_CORNER_RAD
Body Diameter (Db) MFG_BODY_DIAM
Cutting Angle (A) MFG_CUT_ANGLE
Non Cutting Diameter MFG_TOOL_CORE_DIAMETER
More information about the Geometry, Technology and Cutting Conditions attributes of this resource is
available in the Tool Resources section.
End Mill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgEndMillTool
This tool type has only one compensation site P1, which is located
at the extremity of the tool.

Non Cutting Diameter MFG_TOOL_CORE_DIAMETER
Center Drill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgCenterDrillTool.

This tool type has six compensation sites P1 to P6, which are
located on the tool as shown below.

Cutting Angle (a1) MFG_CUT_ANGLE
Taper Angle (Ach) MFG_TAPER_ANGLE
Spot Drill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgSpotDrillTool

This tool type has three compensation sites P1 to P3, which are

Cutting Angle (a) MFG_CUT_ANGLE
Drill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgDrillTool


Tool Tip Length (ld) MFG_TL_TIP_LGTH
Countersink
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgCountersinkTool


Entry Diameter (d) MFG_ENTRY_DIAM
Corner radius (Rc) MFG_CORNER_RAD
Reamer
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgReamerTool


Boring Bar
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgBoringBarTool

This tool type has three compensation sites P1, P2 and P3.
P1 is the most external point of the cutting flange projected onto the
tool axis.
P2 is the lower edge of the cutting flange (Boring Bars) projected

onto the tool axis.
P3 is the upper edge of the cutting flange (Back Boring Bars)

projected onto the tool axis.


Cutting Angle (A) MFG_CUT_ANGLE
Non Cut Diameter (dn) MFG_NON_CUT_DIAM
Tip Length (lt) MFG_TIP_LENGTH
Tip Angle (E) MFG_TIP_ANGLE
Tip Radius (Re) MFG_TIP_RADIUS
Tool Angle (B) MFG_TOOL_ANGLE
Minimum Diameter MFG_MIN_DIAMETER
Maximum Diameter MFG_MAX_DIAMETER
Tap
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgTapTool.


Nominal Diameter Location (Lnd) MFG_LENGTH_NOM_DIAM
Taps can have a tapered or straight flank. More information about the Geometry, Technology and Cutting
Conditions attributes of this resource is available in the Tool Resources section.
T-Slotter
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgTSlotterTool.
This tool type has two compensation sites P1 and P2, which are

Upper corner Radius (Rc2) MFG_CORNER_RAD_2
Multi-Diameter Drill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgMultiDiamDrillTool
This tool type has nine compensation sites P1 to P9, which are

Length (l1) MFG_LENGTH_1
Length (l2) MFG_LENGTH_2
Cutting Angle 2 (a2) MFG_ANGLE2
Chamfer Diameter 1 (Dc) MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM1
Chamfer Diameter 2 (Dc2) MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM2
Two Sides Chamfering Tool
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgTwoSidesChamferingTool
This tool type has seven compensation sites P1 to P7, which are

Cutting Angle (a2) MFG_ANGLE2
Boring and Chamfering Tool
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgBoringAndChamferingTool

This tool type has four compensation sites P1 to P4, which are

Chamfer Diameter (Dc) MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM1
Length 1 (l1) MFG_LENGTH_1
Conical Mill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgConicalMillTool


Thread Mill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgThreadMillTool

This tool type has only one compensation site P1,

which is located at the extremity of the tool.

Length 1 (l1) MFG_LENGTH_1
Counterbore Mill
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is MfgCounterboreMillTool

This tool type has only one compensation site P1, which is

Tools for Turning Operations

External Insert Holder
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this tool is

MfgExternalTool.
The main Manufacturing geometry attributes used in this

resource are:
MFG_SHANK_HEIGHT: h
MFG_SHANK_WIDTH: b
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_1: l1
MFG_SHK_CUT_WDTH: f
MFG_KAPPA_R: Kr
More information about the Geometry and Technology attributes of this resource is available in the Tool
Resources section.
Internal Insert Holder

MfgInternalTool.

resource are:
MFG_BODY_DIAM: db
MFG_BAR_LENGTH_1: l1
MFG_BAR_CUT_RAD: f
MFG_KAPPA_R: Kr
Resources section.
External Groove Insert Holder


MfgGrooveExternalTool.

resource are:
MFG_SHANK_HEIGHT: h
MFG_SHANK_WIDTH: b
MFG_SHK_CUT_WDTH: f
Resources section.
Frontal Groove Insert Holder

MfgGrooveFrontalTool

resource are:
MFG_SHANK_HEIGHT: h
MFG_SHANK_WIDTH: b
MFG_SHK_CUT_WDTH: f
Resources section.
Internal Groove Insert Holder


MfgGrooveInternalTool

resource are:
MFG_BODY_DIAM: db
MFG_BAR_CUT_RAD: f
Resources section.
External Thread Insert Holder

MfgThreadExternalTool

resource are:
MFG_SHANK_HEIGHT: h
MFG_SHANK_WIDTH: b
MFG_SHK_CUT_WDTH: f
Resources section.
Internal Thread Insert Holder


MfgThreadInternalTool

resource are:
MFG_BODY_DIAM: db
MFG_BAR_CUT_RAD: f
Resources section.
Lathe Inserts
Diamond Insert
The MFG_NAME_BAS attribute for this insert is

MfgDiamondInsert

resource are:
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM: IC
MFG_INSERT_LGTH: l
MFG_INSERT_THICK: s
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS: r
MFG_INSERT_ANGL: a
available in the Inserts section.
Square Insert

MfgSquareInsert

resource are:
MFG_INSERT_LGTH: l
MFG_INSERT_THICK: s
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS: r
Triangular Insert

MfgTriangularInsert

resource are:
MFG_INSERT_LGTH: l
MFG_INSERT_THICK: s
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS: r
Round Insert

MfgRoundInsert

resource are:
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS: r
MFG_INSERT_THICK: s
Trigon Insert

MfgTrigonInsert

resource are:
MFG_INSERT_LGTH: l
MFG_INSERT_THICK: s
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS: r
Groove Insert

MfgGrooveInsert

resource are:
MFG_INSERT_LGTH: l
MFG_INSERT_THICK
MFG_INSERT_WIDTH: la
MFG_NOSE_RAD_1: r1
MFG_NOSE_RAD_2: r2
MFG_BOTTOM_ANGLE: b
MFG_FLANK_ANG_1: a1
MFG_FLANK_ANG_2: a2
MFG_CUT_LENGTH: l1
Thread Insert
MfgThreadInsert

resource are:
MFG_INSERT_LGTH: l
MFG_INSERT_THICK
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS
MFG_THREAD_ANGLE
MFG_TOOTH_X
MFG_TOOTH_Z
MFG_TOOTH_H
Machine Tool Resources

All supported NC Machine resources are presented in this section:
● NC machines
❍ 3-axis machine
❍ 3-axis machine with table rotation
❍ 5-axis machine
❍ Horizontal lathe
❍ Vertical lathe
Mfg3AxisMachine (3-axis Machine)

Description
Describes the Mfg3AxisMachine resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
These attributes provide general information.
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Specifies the name of the resource.
MFG_COMMENT (Comment)
Type: String
Associates a comment to the resource.
Numerical Control Attributes
These attributes characterize the machine controller and have an impact on the output format.
MFG_PP_WORD_TBL (Post Processor words table)

Type: String
Specifies the name of the PP words table which is used for creating Post Processor word syntaxes.
MFG_OUTPUT_TYPE (NC data type)

Type: String
Possible values:
APT
CLF-3000
CLF-15000
ISO
Specifies the type of NC data output by the application. It can take the following values: APT (APT source, this
is the default), CLF-3000 (clfile record types 3000 and 5000 are output), CLF-15000 (clfile record type 15000
is output), ISO.
MFG_OUTPUT_FRMT (NC data format)
Type: String
Possible values:
POINT (Point (X,Y,Z))
AXIS (Axis (X,Y,Z,I,J,K))
Specifies the format of the NC data output. It can take the following values: POINT (X,Y,Z point coordinates,
by default), AXIS (X,Y,Z,I,J,K point coordinates and tool axis components).
MFG_STRT_PT_SYNT (Home point strategy)
Type: String
Possible values:
FROM (FROM)
GOTO (GOTO)
Specifies the type of trajectory on the start point: GOTO or FROM
MFG_MAX_FEEDRATE (Max machining feedrate)
Type: Real
Specifies the maximum machining feedrate. This is used in NC Manufacturing Verification product. Errors (tool
collision with the stock) will be reported if the feedrate exceeds this value.
MFG_RAPID_FEED (Rapid feedrate)
Type: Real
Specifies the rapid feedrate. This is used to compute the total machining time and may replace the RAPID
instruction in output APT files.
MFG_AXIAL_RADIAL_MOVE (Axial/Radial movement)
Type: Boolean (Yes/No)
Specifies the ability to generate automatically axial and radial movements to avoid collisions in axial
operations
MFG_INT_LIN_3D (3D linear interpol.)
Specifies if the machine is able to make a 3D linear interpolation between 2 points.
MFG_INT_CIRC_2D (2D circular interpol.)
Specifies if the machine is able to make a 2D circular interpolation between 2 points.
MFG_R_MIN_CIRC (Min interpol. radius)
Type: Real
Specifies the minimum radius of circular interpolation that the machine is able to achieve.
MFG_R_MAX_CIRC (Max interpol. radius)
Type: Real
Specifies the maximum radius of circular interpolation that the machine is able to achieve.
MFG_MIN_DISC (Min discretization step)

Type: Real
Specifies the minimum distance between two consecutive points that the machine is able to achieve.
Note:
The application compares the minimum discretization step and the machining tolerance. The larger of the two
values is taken to be the minimum distance between two points.
When you generate NC data, any points that are spaced at a distance less than this value are eliminated from
the output file.
MFG_MIN_ANGLE (Min discretization angle)
Type: Real
Specifies minimum angle between tool axis at two consecutive points that the machine is able to achieve. The
application eliminates points whose tool axis orientation does not meet this criteria.
MFG_NURBS_OUTPUT (3D Nurbs interpolation)
Specifies the ability to generate NURBS data in an APT output file.
Spindle Attributes
These attributes provide information on the spindle definition.
MFG_X_HOME_POS (Home point X)

Type: Real
Defines the X coordinate of the home point with respect to the reference machining axis system. Note that
this point is taken into account when replaying a table rotation if this rotation is located at the first position of
the program.
MFG_Y_HOME_POS (Home point Y)
Type: Real
Defines the Y coordinate of the home point with respect to the reference machining axis system. Note that this
point is taken into account when replaying a table rotation if this rotation is located at the first position of the
program.
MFG_Z_HOME_POS (Home point Z)
Type: Real
Defines the Z coordinate of the home point with respect to the reference machining axis system. Note that
the program.
MFG_X_INIT_SPNDL (Orientation I)
Type: Real
Specifies the I component of the initial spindle orientation with respect to the reference machining axis
system.
MFG_Y_INIT_SPNDL (Orientation J)
Type: Real
Specifies the J component of the initial spindle orientation with respect to the reference machining axis
system.
MFG_Z_INIT_SPNDL (Orientation K)
Type: Real
Specifies the K component of the initial spindle orientation with respect to the reference machining axis
system.
Mfg3AxisWithTableRotationMachine (3-axis With Rotary

Table Machine)
Description
Describes the Mfg3AxisWithTableRotationMachine resource attributes that are available in Machining

workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String

Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
APT
CLF-3000
CLF-15000
ISO
is output), ISO.
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
FROM (FROM)
GOTO (GOTO)
Type: Real
collision with the stock) will be reported if the feedrate exceeds this value

Type: Real
operations
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Note:
the output file.
Type: Real
MFG_ROTABL_OUTPUT (Rotabl output in cycle)
Specifies the ability to output Rotabl statement inside Axial operation cycle statement
Rotary Table Attributes
These attributes provide information on the rotary table and have an impact on table rotation capabilities.
MFG_X_ROT_CENTER (Center point X)

Type: Real
Defines the X coordinate of the center of rotation of the rotary table with respect to the reference machining
axis system.
MFG_Y_ROT_CENTER (Center point Y)

Type: Real
Defines the Y coordinate of the center of rotation of the rotary table with respect to the reference machining
axis system.
MFG_Z_ROT_CENTER (Center point Z)
Type: Real
Defines the Z coordinate of the center of rotation of the rotary table with respect to the reference machining
axis system.
MFG_INIT_ROT_POS (Initial position)
Type: Real
If the machine has a rotary table, specifies the initial angular position of the rotary table.
MFG_ROTARY_ANGLE (Rotary angle)
Type: Real
If the machine has a rotary table, specifies the rotary angle.
MFG_ROTARY_AXIS (Rotary axis)
Type: String
Possible values:
A
B
C
If the machine has a rotary table, specifies which axis (A, B or C) of the reference machining axis system is
parallel to the rotary axis.
MFG_ROT_DIR (Rotary direction)
Type: String
Possible values:
CLW (Clockwise)
CCLW (Counter-clockwise)
BOTH (Shortest)
Defines the rotary direction that the machine can accept: Clockwise, Counterclockwise, or Shortest.
MFG_ROT_TYP (Rotary type)
Type: String
Possible values:
ABS (Absolute)
Defines the rotary angle as absolute. This is the only option available in the current version.
Spindle Attributes

Type: Real
the program.
Type: Real
program.
Type: Real
the program.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
Mfg5AxisMachine (5-axis Machine)

Description
Describes the Mfg5AxisMachine resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String

Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
APT
CLF-3000
CLF-15000
ISO
is output), ISO.

Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
FROM (FROM)
GOTO (GOTO)
Type: Real
Type: Real
operations
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Note:
the output file.
Type: Real

Spindle Attributes

Type: Real
the program.
Type: Real
program.
Type: Real
the program.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
MfgHorizontalLatheMachine (Horizontal Lathe Machine)

Description
Describes the MfgHorizontalLatheMachine resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String

Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
APT
CLF-3000
CLF-15000
ISO
is output), ISO.
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
FROM (FROM)
GOTO (GOTO)
Type: Real
Type: Real
operations

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Note:
the output file.
Type: Real
Spindle Attributes
These attributes provide information on the spindle and have an impact on spindle capabilities.

Type: Real
axis system.
Type: Real
axis system.
Type: Real
axis system.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
CLW (Clockwise)
BOTH (Shortest)
Type: String
Possible values:
ABS (Absolute)
MFG_LATHE_RAD_AX (Radial axis)
Type: String
Possible values:
X
Y
Z
Defines the radial axis (X, Y or Z)
MFG_LATHE_SPN_AX (Spindle axis)
Type: String
Possible values:
X
Y
Z
Defines the spindle axis (X, Y or Z)
Turret Attributes
These attributes provide information on the turret definition.

Type: Real
the program.
Type: Real
program.
Type: Real
the program.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
MfgVerticalLatheMachine (Vertical Lathe Machine)

Description
Describes the MfgVerticalLatheMachine resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String

Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
APT
CLF-3000
CLF-15000
ISO
is output), ISO.
Type: String
Possible values:

Type: String
Possible values:
FROM (FROM)
GOTO (GOTO)
Type: Real
Type: Real
operations
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Note:
the output file.
Type: Real
Spindle Attributes
These attributes provide information on the spindle and have an impact on spindle capabilities.

Type: Real
axis system.
Type: Real
axis system.
Type: Real
axis system.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Possible values:
CLW (Clockwise)
BOTH (Shortest)
Type: String
Possible values:
ABS (Absolute)
MFG_LATHE_RAD_AX (Radial axis)
Type: String
Possible values:
X
Y
Z
Defines the radial axis (X, Y or Z)
MFG_LATHE_SPN_AX (Spindle axis)
Type: String
Possible values:
X
Y
Z
Defines the spindle axis (X, Y or Z)
Turret Attributes
These attributes provide information on the turret definition and have an impact on turret capabilities.

Type: Real
the program.

Type: Real
program.
Type: Real
the program.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
Type: Real
system.
Traverser Attributes
These attributes provide information on the lathe traverser definition.
MFG_TRAVERSE_NB (Traverse number)

Type: Integer
Defines the number of traverse
MFG_TRAV_PITCH (Traverse pitch)
Type: Real
Defines the pitch between two traverses
Tool Assembly Resources

All supported Tool Assembly resources are presented in this section:
● Lathe assembly
● Mill and drill assembly.
MfgLatheToolAssembly (Lathe Assembly)

Description
Describes the MfgLatheToolAssembly resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOL_NUMBER (Tool number)
Type: Integer
Defines the tool number. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOL_NUMBER.
MFG_TL_SETUP_ANG (Setup angle)
Type: Real
Defines the tool assembly setup angle. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TL_SETUP_ANG.
Geometry Attributes
These attributes characterize the assembly shape and have an impact on the collision detection capability.
MFG_TL_SET_X (Set X)
Type: Real
Specifies the X component of the total set length of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TL_SET_X.
MFG_TL_SET_Y (Set Y)
Type: Real
Specifies the Y component of the total set length of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TL_SET_Y.
MFG_TL_SET_Z (Set Z)
Type: Real
Specifies the Z component of the total set length of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TL_SET_Z.
MFG_TOOL_INVERT (Tool inverted)

Defines if the tool has been inverted. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOL_INVERT.
Technology Attributes
These attributes provide technological information without any impact on the tool path computation.
MFG_NB_OF_COMP (Number of components)

Type: Integer
Specifies the number of components of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NB_OF_COMP.
MFG_OUTP_PREF_1 (Pref. output point 1)
Type: String
Possible values:
MfgNone (None)
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P9R
Defines the first preferred output point. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_OUTP_PREF_1.
Type: String
Possible values:
MfgNone (None)
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P9R
Defines the second preferred output point. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_OUTP_PREF_2.

Type: String
Possible values:
MfgNone (None)
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P9R
Defines the third preferred output point. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_OUTP_PREF_3.
MfgMillAndDrillToolAssembly (Milling Assembly)

Description
Describes the MfgMillAndDrillToolAssembly resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes
These attributes characterize the assembly shape and have an impact on the collision detection capability.
MFG_DIAMETER_1 (Diameter 1 : D1)

Type: Real
Specifies the maximum diameter of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_DIAMETER_1.
Type: Real
Specifies the maximum diameter of the adapter or holder depending on the number of components on the tool
assembly. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_DIAMETER_2.
Type: Real
Specifies the maximum diameter of the tool assembly holder. It is valuated only if the number of components
is 3. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_DIAMETER_3.
MFG_TL_SET_LGTH (Total set length : ST)

Type: Real
Specifies the total set length of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TL_SET_LGTH.
MFG_TL_SET_X (Set X)
Type: Real
Specifies the X component of the total set length of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TL_SET_X.
MFG_TL_SET_Y (Set Y)
Type: Real
Specifies the Y component of the total set length of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TL_SET_Y.
MFG_TL_SET_Z (Set Z)
Type: Real
Specifies the Z component of the total set length of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TL_SET_Z.
MFG_ORIENT_ANGLE (Orientation)
Type: Real
If a boring bar is used, defines the angle between the boring bar and the tool assembly reference. The
manufacturing attribute is MFG_ORIENT_ANGLE.
MFG_NB_OF_COMP (Number of components)

Type: Integer
Specifies the number of components of the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NB_OF_COMP.
MFG_ASS_GAGE_1 (Gage 1 : G1)
Type: Real
Specifies the assembly gage between the tool and adapter or the tool and holder depending on the number of
components on the tool assembly. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_ASS_GAGE_1.
MFG_ASS_GAGE_2 (Gage 2 : G2)
Type: Real
Specifies the assembly gage between the adapter and holder, if there are three components on the tool
assembly. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_ASS_GAGE_2.
MFG_TOOL_ASS_POWER (Power)
Type: String
Possible values:
MFG_FIXED (Fixed)
MFG_POWERED (Powered)
Defines whether the tool assembly is powered or fixed: Powered means that the tool turns and the part is
fixed, Fixed means that the tool is fixed and the part turns. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TOOL_ASS_POWER.
Tool and Insert Holder Resources

All supported Tool resources are presented in this section:
● Tools for milling and drilling operations:
❍ Drill
❍ Center Drill
❍ Spot Drill
❍ Face Mill
❍ End Mill
❍ Countersink
❍ Reamer
❍ Boring Bar
❍ Tap
❍ T-Slotter
❍ Multi-Diameter Drill
❍ Two Sides Chamfering Tool
❍ Boring and Chamfering Tool
❍ Conical Mill
❍ Thread Mill
❍ Counterbore Mill.
● Tools (that is, insert holders) for turning operations:
❍ External Insert Holder
❍ Internal Insert Holder
❍ External Groove Insert Holder
❍ Frontal Groove Insert Holder
❍ Internal Groove Insert Holder
❍ External Thread Insert Holder
❍ Internal Thread Insert Holder.
MfgDrillTool (Drill)
Description
Describes the MfgDrillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes
These attributes characterize the tool shape and have an impact on the tool path computation.
MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM (Nominal diameter : D)

Type: Real
Defines the cutting diameter of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM.
MFG_OVERALL_LGTH (Overall length : L)
Type: Real
Defines the total length of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_OVERALL_LGTH.
MFG_CUT_LENGTH (Cutting length : Lc)
Type: Real
Defines the effective cutting length available on the tool's active part. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
MFG_LENGTH (Length : l)
Type: Real
Defines the length of the external envelope of the tool's active part. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_LENGTH.
MFG_BODY_DIAM (Body diameter : db)
Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the external envelope of the non-active part of the tool. The manufacturing attribute
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
MFG_CUT_ANGLE (Cutting angle : A)
Type: Real
Defines the cutting angle of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_CUT_ANGLE.
MFG_TL_TIP_LGTH (Tool tip length : ld)
Type: Real
Defines the part of the tool that cannot be used for cutting material at the correct diameter (non-functional
part of the tool). The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TL_TIP_LGTH.
MFG_NB_OF_FLUTES (Number of flutes)

Type: Integer
Defines the number of flutes on the tool. In case of tools with separate inserts, this is the number of inserts
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NB_OF_FLUTES.
MFG_WAY_OF_ROT (Way of rotation)
Type: String
Possible values:
RIGHT_HAND (Right hand)
LEFT_HAND (Left hand)
Defines the flutes orientation. It should be compatible with spindle rotation orientation. The manufacturing
attribute is MFG_WAY_OF_ROT with possible value RIGHT_HAND or LEFT_HAND
MFG_MACH_QUALITY (Machining quality)
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Defines the tool's ability to machine in roughing or finishing mode. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_MACH_QUALITY with possible value ROUGH, FINISH or EITHER.
MFG_TOOTH_MAT (Tooth material)
Type: String
Possible values:
HIGH_SPEED_STEEL (High speed steel)
COATED_HIGH_SPEED_STEEL (Coated high speed steel)
CARBIDE (Carbide)
COATED_CARBIDE (Coated carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Defines the tooth material type. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOTH_MAT with possible value:
HIGH_SPEED_STEEL, COATED_HIGH_SPEED_STEEL, CARBIDE, COATED_CARBIDE, OTHER.
MFG_TOOTH_DES (Tooth description)
Type: String
Allows the user to specify the tooth nature as a comment. For example, it could be the supplier reference of
the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOTH_DES.
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES (Tooth material desc.)
Type: String
Allows the user to specify the tooth material by means of a comment. For example, it could be the ISO
designation for cutting materials or the reference of the coating material. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
MFG_TL_RAKE_ANG (Tool rake angle )
Type: Real
Defines the tool rake angle. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TL_RAKE_ANG.
MFG_MAX_MIL_LENGTH (Max machining length)
Type: Real
Specifies the tool life in length units. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_MIL_LENGTH.
MFG_MAX_MIL_TIME (Max life time)
Type: Real
Specifies the tool life in time units. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_MIL_TIME.
MFG_COOLNT_SNTX (Coolant syntax)
Type: String
Specifies the coolant supply syntax. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_COOLNT_SNTX.
MFG_WEIGHT_SNTX (Weight syntax)
Type: String
Specifies the tool weight syntax. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_WEIGHT_SNTX.
Cutting Conditions Attributes
These attributes are used for feeds and speeds computation on the operation.
MFG_VC (Cutting speed)

Type: Real
Defines the Cutting speed of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_VC.
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Defines the Feedrate of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_SZ.
MFG_PP (Depth of cut)
Type: Real
Defines the Depth of cut of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_PP.
MfgTapTool (Tap)
Description
Describes the MfgTapTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
MFG_ENTRY_DIAM (Entry diameter : d)
Type: Real
Defines the smallest diameter of the head of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_ENTRY_DIAM.
Type: Real
MFG_TAPER_ANGLE (Taper angle : Ach)
Type: Real
Defines the taper angle on the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TAPER_ANGLE.
MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM (Nominal diameter location : Lnd)
Type: Real
Defines where the nominal diameter of the tool is measured from. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM.

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String

Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
MFG_THREAD_FORM (Thread form)
Type: String
Possible values:
METRIC (Metric)
INCH (Inch)
OTHER (Other)
Defines the standard of the thread used on a tap. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THREAD_FORM with
possible value METRIC, INCH or OTHER.
MFG_THREAD_CLASS (Thread class)
Type: String
Possible values:
1B
2B
3B
5H
6H
7H
OTHER (Other)
Defines the dimensional tolerances of the thread and can take the following values: 1B (consistent with INCH
thread form), 2B (consistent with INCH thread form), 3B (consistent with INCH thread form), 5H (consistent
with METRIC thread form), 6H (consistent with METRIC thread form), 7H (consistent with METRIC thread
form), OTHER The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THREAD_CLASS.
MFG_THD_FRM_DESC (Thread form desc.)
Type: String
Specifies the thread form as a comment. For example, it could be some other thread form like Round thread.
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THD_FRM_DESC.
MFG_THD_CLS_DESC (Thread class desc.)
Type: String
Specifies the thread class as a comment. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THD_CLS_DESC.
MFG_PITCH_OF_THREAD (Pitch of thread)
Type: Real
Describes the thread pitch. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_PITCH_OF_THREAD.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgThreadMillTool (Thread Mill)

Description
Describes the MfgThreadMillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.

Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
MFG_OUTSIDE_DIAM (Outside diameter : Da)
Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the external envelope of the tool's active part for tools such as face mills, countersinks
and thread mills. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_OUTSIDE_DIAM.
MFG_LENGTH_1 (Length 1 : l1)
Type: Real
Defines the length of the first active part for tools such as multi-diameter tool, bore-and-chamfer tool and
thread mill. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_LENGTH_1.
Type: Real

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
MFG_THREAD_FORM (Thread form)

Type: String
Possible values:
METRIC (Metric)
INCH (Inch)
OTHER (Other)
Defines the standard of the thread used on a tap. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THREAD_FORM with
possible value METRIC, INCH or OTHER.
MFG_THREAD_CLASS (Thread class)
Type: String
Possible values:
1B
2B
3B
5H
6H
7H
OTHER (Other)
Defines the dimensional tolerances of the thread and can take the following values: 1B (consistent with INCH
thread form), 2B (consistent with INCH thread form), 3B (consistent with INCH thread form), 5H (consistent
with METRIC thread form), 6H (consistent with METRIC thread form), 7H (consistent with METRIC thread
form), OTHER The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THREAD_CLASS.
MFG_THD_FRM_DESC (Thread form desc.)
Type: String
Specifies the thread form as a comment. For example, it could be some other thread form like Round thread.
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THD_FRM_DESC.
MFG_THD_CLS_DESC (Thread class desc.)
Type: String
Specifies the thread class as a comment. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THD_CLS_DESC.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgCountersinkTool (Countersink)
Description
Describes the MfgCountersinkTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
MFG_CORNER_RAD (Corner radius : Rc)
Type: Real
Defines the radius of the cutting shape of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_CORNER_RAD.
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.

Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String

Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgReamerTool (Reamer)
Description
Describes the MfgReamerTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:

Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgSpotDrillTool (Spot Drill)

Description
Describes the MfgSpotDrillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real

Type: Integer

Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real

Type: Real
MfgCenterDrillTool (Center Drill)

Description
Describes the MfgCenterDrillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real

Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgMultiDiamDrillTool (Multi Diameter Drill)

Description
Describes the MfgMultiDiamDrillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
MFG_NB_OF_STAGES (Number of stages)
Type: Integer
Defines the number of stages of a multi-diameter drill. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NB_OF_STAGES.
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM1 (Chamfer diameter 1 : d1)
Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the second part of a multi-diameter tool or bore-and-chamfer tool. The manufacturing
attribute is MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM1.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the third active part of a multi-diameter tool. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM2.
Type: Real
Defines the length of the second active part of a multi-diameter tool. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_LENGTH_2.
MFG_ANGLE2 (Cutting angle 2 : A2)
Type: Real
Defines the second cutting angle of the active part of a multi-diameter tool or two-sides chamfering tool. The
manufacturing attribute is MFG_ANGLE2.

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String

Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgBoringAndChamferingTool (Boring and Chamfering Tool)

Description
Describes the MfgBoringAndChamferingTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the second part of a multi-diameter tool or bore-and-chamfer tool. The manufacturing
attribute is MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM1.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Integer

Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgTwoSidesChamferingTool (Two Sides Chamfering Tool)

Description
Describes the MfgTwoSidesChamferingTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.

Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_ANGLE2 (Cutting angle 2 : A2)
Type: Real
Defines the second cutting angle of the active part of a multi-diameter tool or two-sides chamfering tool. The
manufacturing attribute is MFG_ANGLE2.

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgCounterboreMillTool (Counterbore Mill)

Description
Describes the MfgCounterboreMillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
MFG_COMPOSITION (Composition)
Type: String
Possible values:
ONE_PIECE (One piece)
INSERT_HOLDER (Insert holder)
Specifies if the tool is an inserted one. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_COMPOSITION with possible value
ONE_PIECE or INSERT_HOLDER.
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: Real
MFG_MAX_PLNG_ANG (Max plunge angle)
Type: Real
Defines the plunge ability of the tool. When the tool is able to plunge along its axis, the maximum plunge
angle is equal to 90 degrees. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_PLNG_ANG.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgEndMillTool (End Mill)

Description
Describes the MfgEndMillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
MFG_BALL_TYPE (Ball-end tool)
Defines the tool as being ball-end. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_BALL_TYPE.
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
MFG_TOOL_CORE_DIAMETER (Non cutting diameter)
Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the non-cutting part (core) of the tool. This can be useful in operations such as
Roughing, Pocketing, and Multi-Axis Helix Machining. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TOOL_CORE_DIAMETER.

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
MFG_TOOTH_DESC (Tooth description)

Type: String
the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOTH_DESC.
MFG_TOOTH_MATDESC (Tooth material desc.)
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDESC.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_VC_FINISH (Finishing cutting speed)

Type: Real
Defines the Finishing cutting speed of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_VC_FINISH.
MFG_SZ_FINISH (Finishing feedrate per tooth)
Type: Real
Defines the Finishing feedrate per tooth of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_SZ_FINISH.
MFG_AA_FINISH (Axial depth of cut for finish)
Type: Real
Defines the Axial depth of cut for finish of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_AA_FINISH.
MFG_AR_FINISH (Radial depth of cut for finish)
Type: Real
Defines the Radial depth of cut for finish of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_AR_FINISH.
MFG_VC_ROUGH (Roughing cutting speed)
Type: Real
Defines the Roughing cutting speed of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_VC_ROUGH.
MFG_SZ_ROUGH (Roughing feedrate per tooth)
Type: Real
Defines the Roughing feedrate per tooth of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_SZ_ROUGH.
MFG_AA_ROUGH (Axial depth of cut for rough)

Type: Real
Defines the Axial depth of cut for rough of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_AA_ROUGH.
MFG_AR_ROUGH (Radial depth of cut for rough)
Type: Real
Defines the Radial depth of cut for rough of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_AR_ROUGH.
MfgFaceMillTool (Face Mill)

Description
Describes the MfgFaceMillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.

Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_TOOL_CORE_DIAMETER (Non cutting diameter)
Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the non-cutting part (core) of the tool. This can be useful in operations such as
Roughing, Pocketing, and Multi-Axis Helix Machining. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TOOL_CORE_DIAMETER.

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:

Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Integer
Type: Integer
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgConicalMillTool (Conical Mill)

Description
Describes the MfgConicalMillTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:

Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgTSlotterTool (T-Slotter)
Description
Describes the MfgTSlotterTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CORNER_RAD_2 (Upper corner radius : Rc2)

Type: Real
Defines the upper radius of the cutting shape of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_CORNER_RAD_2.
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.

Type: Integer
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:

Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgExternalTool (External Insert Holder)

Description
Describes the MfgExternalTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Geometry Attributes
MFG_HAND_STYLE (Hand style)

Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
Defines the tool's hand style. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_HAND_STYLE with possible value
RIGHT_HAND, LEFT_HAND or NEUTRAL.
MFG_HOLDER_CAPAB (Holder capability)
Type: String
Possible values:
SURFACE
TRAVERSE
BOTH (Shortest)
Defines the holder capability. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_HOLDER_CAPAB with possible value
SURFACE, TRAVERSE or BOTH.
MFG_KAPPA_R (Cutting edge angle : Kr)

Type: Real
Defines the cutting edge angle of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_KAPPA_R.
MFG_INSERT_ANGLE (Insert angle : a)
Type: Real
Defines the angle of the insert mounted on the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_INSERT_ANGLE.
MFG_INSERT_LGTH (Insert length : l)
Type: Real
Defines the cutting edge length of an insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_INSERT_LGTH.
MFG_CLEAR_ANGLE (Clearance angle)
Type: Real
Defines the clearance angle. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_CLEAR_ANGLE.
MFG_SHK_CUT_WDTH (Shank cut width : f)
Type: Real
Defines the cutting width of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_SHK_CUT_WDTH.
MFG_SHANK_HEIGHT (Shank height : h)
Type: Real
Defines the height of the shank. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_SHANK_HEIGHT.
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_1 (Shank length 1 : l1)
Type: Real
Defines the overall length of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_LENGTH_1.
Type: Real
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_2.
MFG_SHANK_WIDTH (Shank width : b)
Type: Real
Defines the width of the shank. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_SHANK_WIDTH.

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TRAILING_ANG (Trailing angle)
Type: Real
Defines the trailing angle of the tool. If the trailing angle is set to 0, insert angle is used for the trailing angle.
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TRAILING_ANG.
MFG_LEADING_ANG (Leading angle)
Type: Real
Defines the leading angle of the tool. If the leading angle is set to 0, insert angle is used for the leading angle.
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_LEADING_ANG.
MFG_MAX_REC_DPTH (Max recessing depth)

Type: Real
Defines the maximum recessing depth. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_REC_DPTH.
MfgInternalTool (Internal Insert Holder)

Description
Describes the MfgInternalTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Geometry Attributes

Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
MFG_KAPPA_R (Cutting edge angle : Kr)
Type: Real
Defines the cutting edge angle of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_KAPPA_R.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_BAR_LENGTH_1 (Bar length 1 : l1)

Type: Real
Defines the overall length of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_BAR_LENGTH_1.
Type: Real
MFG_BAR_LENGTH_2.
MFG_BAR_CUT_RAD (Bar cut radius : f)
Type: Real
Defines the cutting radius of the tool. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_BAR_CUT_RAD.

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TRAILING_ANG (Trailing angle)
Type: Real
Defines the trailing angle of the tool. If the trailing angle is set to 0, insert angle is used for the trailing angle.
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TRAILING_ANG.
MFG_LEADING_ANG (Leading angle)
Type: Real
Defines the leading angle of the tool. If the leading angle is set to 0, insert angle is used for the leading angle.
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_LEADING_ANG.
MFG_MAX_REC_DPTH (Max recessing depth)
Type: Real
Defines the maximum recessing depth. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_REC_DPTH.
MFG_MAX_BOR_DPTH (Max boring depth)
Type: Real
Defines the maximum boring depth. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_BOR_DPTH.
MFG_MIN_DIAM (Min diameter)
Type: Real
Defines the minimum diameter which can be cut. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MIN_DIAM.
MfgGrooveExternalTool (External Groove Insert Holder)

Description
Describes the MfgGrooveExternalTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Geometry Attributes

Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
MFG_HAND_ANGLE (Hand angle)
Type: Real
Defines the hand angle. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_HAND_ANGLE.
MFG_INSERT_WIDTH (Insert width : la)
Type: Real
Defines the insert width. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_INSERT_WIDTH.
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_2.
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_MAX_CUT_DPTH (Max cut depth : ar)
Type: Real
Defines the maximum cut depth. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_CUT_DPTH.
MFG_MAX_CUT_WDTH (Max cut width)
Type: Real
Defines the maximum cut width. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_CUT_WDTH.
MFG_GAUGING_ANG (Gouging angle)
Type: Real
Defines the gouging angle. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_GAUGING_ANG.
MfgGrooveFrontalTool (Frontal Groove Insert Holder)

Description
Describes the MfgGrooveFrontalTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Geometry Attributes

Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_2.
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Real
MFG_MAX_CUT_DIAM
Type: Real
Defines the maximum cut diameter. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MAX_CUT_DIAM.
MFG_MIN_CUT_DIAM
Type: Real
Defines the minimum cut diameter. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MIN_CUT_DIAM.
MfgGrooveInternalTool (Internal Groove Insert Holder)

Description
Describes the MfgGrooveInternalTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
MFG_HAND_ANGLE (Hand angle)
Type: Real
Defines the hand angle. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_HAND_ANGLE.
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_BAR_LENGTH_2.
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgThreadExternalTool (External Thread Insert Holder)

Description
Describes the MfgThreadExternalTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Geometry Attributes

Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_2.
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Type: String
MfgThreadInternalTool (Internal Thread Insert Holder)

Description
Describes the MfgThreadInternalTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_BAR_LENGTH_2.

Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Real
MfgBoringBarTool (Boring Bar)

Description
Describes the MfgBoringBarTool resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: Integer
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.
Type: Real
MFG_LENGTH.
Type: Real
is MFG_BODY_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_NON_CUT_DIAM (Non cut diameter : dn)
Type: Real
Defines the diameter of the non-cutting extremity of a boring bar. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_NON_CUT_DIAM.
MFG_MIN_DIAMETER (Minimum diameter)
Type: Real
Defines the minimum diameter for an adjustable boring bar. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_MIN_DIAMETER.
MFG_MAX_DIAMETER (Maximum diameter)
Type: Real
Defines the maximum diameter for an adjustable boring bar. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_MAX_DIAMETER.
MFG_TIP_ANGLE (Tip angle : E)
Type: Real
Defines the tip angle of a boring bar. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TIP_ANGLE.
MFG_TIP_RADIUS (Tip radius : Re)
Type: Real
Defines tip radius of a boring bar. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TIP_RADIUS.
MFG_TIP_LENGTH (Tip length : lt)
Type: Real
Defines the position and the shape of the cutter on a boring bar. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_TIP_LENGTH.
MFG_TOOL_ANGLE (Tool angle : B)
Type: Real
Defines the cutter orientation on a boring bar. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOL_ANGLE.

Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
Type: String
Possible values:
CARBIDE (Carbide)
OTHER (Other)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES.
MFG_BORE_ABILITY (Boring ability)

Type: String
Possible values:
THROUGH
EITHER
Determines whether a boring bar can be used for through or blind holes according to its tip configuration. It
can take the following values:
● THROUGH: implies cutting angle < 90 degrees and tool tip length > 0
● EITHER: implies cutting angle > 90 degrees and tool tip length = 0.
The manufacturing attribute is MFG_BORE_ABILITY.

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: String
Type: String

Type: Real
MFG_SZ (Feedrate)
Type: Real
Type: Real
Insert Resources
All supported Insert resources are presented in this section:
● Round Insert
● Diamond Insert
● Square Insert
● Triangular Insert
● Trigon Insert
● Groove Insert
● Thread Insert.
MfgRoundInsert (Round Insert)

Description
Describes the MfgRoundInsert resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_DESC_CODE (Description code)
Type: String
Possible values:
ANSI
ISO
NoCode
Defines the Description code: ISO or ANSI. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_DESC_CODE.
Geometry Attributes
These attributes characterize the insert shape and have an impact on the tool path computation.
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS (Nose radius : r)

Type: Real
Specifies the nose radius of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NOSE_RADIUS.
MFG_INSERT_THICK (Thickness)
Type: Real
Specifies the thickness of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_INSERT_THICK.
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
MFG_INSERT_MAT (Material)
Type: String
Possible values:
CERMETS (Cermets)
CERAMICS (Ceramics)
CUBIDE_BORON_NITRIDE (Cubide Boron Nitride)
OTHER (Other)
Specifies the material of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_INSERT_MAT.
MFG_LIFE_TIME (Life time)
Type: Real
Specifies the life time of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_LIFE_TIME.

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgGrooveInsert (Groove Insert)

Description
Describes the MfgGrooveInsert resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_GROOVE_TYPE (Type)
Type: String
Possible values:
CUTOFF (Cut Off)
GROOVE (Groove)
Specifies the grooving capability of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_GROOVE_TYPE.
Geometry Attributes
MFG_INSERT_HEIGH (Height : l)
Type: Real
Specifies the height of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_INSERT_HEIGH.
Type: Real
MFG_BOTTOM_ANGLE (Bottom angle)
Type: Real
Specifies the bottom angle of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_BOTTOM_ANGLE.
MFG_FLANK_ANG_1 (Left flank angle)
Type: Real
Specifies the left flank angle of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_FLANK_ANG_1.
MFG_FLANK_ANG_2 (Right flank angle)
Type: Real
Specifies the right flank angle of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_FLANK_ANG_2.
MFG_NOSE_RAD_1 (Left nose radius : r1)
Type: Real
Specifies the left nose radius of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NOSE_RAD_1.
MFG_NOSE_RAD_2 (Right nose radius : r2)
Type: Real
Specifies the right nose radius of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_NOSE_RAD_2.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CERMETS (Cermets)
CERAMICS (Ceramics)
OTHER (Other)
Type: Real
MFG_CUT_LENGTH.

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgThreadInsert (Thread Insert)

Description
Describes the MfgThreadInsert resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
MFG_MACH_TYPE (Machining type)
Type: String
Possible values:
MfgExternal
MfgInternal
Specifies internal or external machining type. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_MACH_TYPE.
Geometry Attributes
MFG_THREAD_PROF (Thread profile)

Type: String
Possible values:
MfgTrapezoidal
MfgISO
MfgUNC
MfgGaz
OTHER (Other)
Specifies the thread profile of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THREAD_PROF.
MFG_THREAD_DEF (Thread definition)
Type: String
Possible values:
MfgPitch
MfgThreadPerInch
Specifies the thread definition of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THREAD_DEF.
Type: Real
MFG_PITCH_NUMBER (Pitch)
Type: Real
Specifies the pitch number of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_PITCH_NUMBER.
Type: Real
MFG_THREAD_ANGLE (Thread angle)
Type: Real
Specifies the thread angle of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_THREAD_ANGLE.

Type: String
Possible values:
NEUTRAL
MFG_TOOTH_X (Tooth X)
Type: Real
Specifies the X position of end of the insert tooth. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOTH_X.
MFG_TOOTH_Z (Tooth Z)
Type: Real
Specifies the Z position of end of the insert tooth. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOTH_Z.
MFG_TOOTH_H (Tooth Y)
Type: Real
Specifies the height of the insert tooth. The manufacturing attribute is MFG_TOOTH_H.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CERMETS (Cermets)
CERAMICS (Ceramics)
OTHER (Other)
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgDiamondInsert (Diamond Insert)

Description
Describes the MfgDiamondInsert resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
ANSI
ISO
NoCode
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM (Inscribed diameter : iC)

Type: Real
Specifies the diameter of the inscribed circle of the insert. The manufacturing attribute is
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CERMETS (Cermets)
CERAMICS (Ceramics)
OTHER (Other)
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgSquareInsert (Square Insert)

Description
Describes the MfgSquareInsert resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
ANSI
ISO
NoCode
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CERMETS (Cermets)
CERAMICS (Ceramics)
OTHER (Other)
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgTriangularInsert (Triangular Insert)

Description
Describes the MfgTriangularInsert resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
ANSI
ISO
NoCode
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CERMETS (Cermets)
CERAMICS (Ceramics)
OTHER (Other)

Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MfgTrigonInsert (Trigon Insert)

Description
Describes the MfgTrigonInsert resource attributes that are available in Machining workbenches.
Base Attributes
MFG_NAME (Name)
Type: String
Type: String
Type: String
Possible values:
ANSI
ISO
NoCode
Geometry Attributes

Type: Real
Type: Real
Type: Real
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM.
Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: String
Possible values:
ROUGH (Rough)
FINISH (Finish)
EITHER (Either)
Type: String
Possible values:
CERMETS (Cermets)
CERAMICS (Ceramics)
OTHER (Other)
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real

Type: Real
Type: Real
NC Macros
NC Macros in Machining Operations
You can define transition paths in your machining operations by means of NC Macros. These transition paths
are useful for providing approach, retract and linking motion in the tool path.
You build the macros using the interface provided under the Macros tab page in the Machining Operation
Definition dialog box.
Predefined Macros
You can use predefined macros. These are made up from one or more paths in a specific order. Just select the
desired mode in the Current Macro Toolbox of the Macros page. You can then adjust parameters of the macro
(such as path length and feedrate).
User-Built Macros
tangent motion
normal motion
axial motion
circular motion
ramping motion
PP word
tool axis motion
motion to a point.
Successive PP Words
If the current macro ends with a PP word, PP word becomes inactive and so you cannot add
another successive PP word. For example in the following sequence of macro paths ending with
PPword.2:
...-TangentMotion-PPWord.1-CircularMotion-PPWord.2
you cannot add another PP word directly after PPword.2.

However, you can edit and complete PPWord.2.
Elementary Motions After an Axial Path
If the current macro ends with an axial path (Axial, Axial to a plane, Axial perpendicular to a plane),
the following icons become inactive:
Tangent motion, Circular motion, Normal motion, Ramping motion.

This is because there is insufficient information about conditions such as tangency or normal to the
axial path.
Note that this behavior is not applied to 3-axis surface machining operations (the icons remain
active).
Defining Motion Perpendicular to a Line
This type of motion is available for most prismatic and axial machining operations.
Select Motion perpendicular to a line .
The motion is symbolized in the Current Macro Tool box by a linear path going to a Line symbol.
Select the Line symbol to display the following dialog box.
Select the desired method to specify the line orientation using the combo:
● Manual. In this case, choose one of the following:

❍ Components to define the orientation by means of I, J and K components
❍ Angles to define the orientation by means of a rotation specified by means of one or two
angles:
Angle 1 about X, Angle 2 about Y
Angle 1 about Z, Angle 2 about X
Angle 1 about Y, Angle 2 about Z
● Selection. In this case just select a line or linear edge to define the orientation.
Just click OK to accept the specified orientation.
Example:
Motion starts and ends at the same linear location for each machining level.
Approach Macro
An Approach macro is used to approach the operation start point. It is available for all machining operation
types.
Retract Macro
A Retract macro is used to retract from the operation end point. It is available for all machining operation
types.
Linking Macro
A Linking macro may be used in several cases, for example:
● to avoid islands in Pocketing operations

● to link two non consecutive paths
● to access finish and spring passes in Pocketing and Contouring operations
● to link points of a pattern in an axial machining operation.
You could specify a Linking macro to do the following:
1. Retract along the tool axis at machining or finishing feedrate up to a safety plane defined by the top
plane plus an approach clearance.
2. Approach next path along the tool axis with approach feedrate.
3. The clearance motion between the retract and approach is along a line in the safety plane at rapid
feedrate.
Return on Same Level Macro

A Return on Same Level macro is used in a multi-path operation to link two consecutive paths in a given level.
For example, you could define a Return on Same Level macro on a Profile Contouring operation in One Way
mode to do the following :
1. Retract along the tool axis at machining feedrate up to a safety plane defined by the top plane plus an
approach clearance.
2. Approach next path along the tool axis with approach feedrate.
feedrate.
Note that no Return on Same Level macro is needed on a Profile Contouring operation in Zig Zag mode. The
motion between two paths is done at machining feedrate by following the profile of the boundary.
Return between Levels Macro

A Return between Levels macro is used in a multi-level machining operation to go to the next level.
You could define a Return between Levels macro to do the following:

approach clearance.
2. Approach the next level along the tool axis at approach feedrate.
feedrate.
Return to Finish Pass Macro

A Return to Finish Pass macro is used in a machining operation to go to the finish pass.
For example, you could define a Return to Finish Pass macro to do the following:
approach clearance.
2. Approach the finish pass level along the tool axis at approach feedrate.
feedrate.
Clearance Macro
A Clearance macro can be used in a machining operation to avoid a fixture, for example.
You could define a Clearance macro to do the following:
1. Retract along the tool axis at machining feedrate up to a safety plane.

2. Approach the finish pass level along the tool axis at approach feedrate.
feedrate.
Angular Orientation Conventions in NC Macros

These conventions concern both Circular and Tangent motions.
For Circular motions , position of the circle is defined by the Angular orientation parameter.
For Tangent motion , direction of the motion is defined by the Horizontal angle parameter.
The following types of operation are concerned.
Operations without consistent material side definition
This concerns the following operations:

Isoparametric machining
Multi Axis Sweeping
Multi Axis Contour Driven.
For these operations, convention is simple:
For Circular motion:
Angular Orientation = 0.0 deg => Circle on the right side
Angular Orientation = 90 deg => Vertical Circle
Angular Orientation = 180 deg => Circle on the left side
For Tangent motion:
Horizontal Angle = -90 deg => Motion on the left side.
Horizontal Angle = 0.0 deg => Motion along Tangent
Horizontal Angle = 90 deg => Motion on the right side
Operations with material side defined by the flank

Profile Contouring
Pocketing
Multi Axis Flank Contouring
Multi Axis Curve Machining in Side or Tip mode (between two curves or between curve and surface).

Angular Orientation = 0.0 deg => Circle on the free side of the flank
Angular Orientation = 180 deg => Circle on side to the flank
For Tangent motion:
Horizontal Angle = -90 deg => Motion on the free side of the flank.
Horizontal Angle = 90 deg => Motion on side to the flank
Operations with material side defined by the bottom

Isoparametric Machining
Multi Axis Sweeping
Multi Axis Contour Driven
Multi Axis Curve Machining in Contact mode.

Angular Orientation = 0.0 deg => Circle on the free side of the bottom
Angular Orientation = 180 deg => Circle on side to the bottom
For Tangent motion:
Horizontal Angle = -90 deg => Motion on the free side of the bottom.
Horizontal Angle = 90 deg => Motion on side to the bottom.

This document describes the Transition Path Management capability. Transition paths can be generated between operations in a
program. This is done by taking the following parameters into account:
● the machine's kinematic characteristics

● specified transition planes
● selected transition path options.
A transition path can include one or more linear transitions and machine rotations.
Transition paths can be created, deleted and updated using the commands of the Transition Path Management toolbar.
Update Transition Paths.
Machine
In order to use Transition Path Management, a generic machine must be defined on the Part Operation. This is done using the Part
Operation's Machine Editor.
Available machine types are:
● 3-axis machine with no rotary axis

● 3-axis machine with 1 rotary axis on table
● 3-axis machine with 2 rotary axes on table
● 3-axis machine with 1 rotary axis on table and 1 rotary axis on head
● 3-axis machine with 1 rotary axis on head
● 3-axis machine with 2 rotary axes on head
● 5-axis continuous machine (without generation of machine rotations).
Each machine contains all the necessary NC parameters and kinematic definition data for the Part Operation.
Transition Planes
Transition Path Management takes into account the following planes defined in the Part Operation:
● Traverse box planes to create linear tool path motions (5 planes representing a box are needed)
● Transition planes to create linear tool path motions
● Rotary planes to create machine rotations:
❍ between machining operations
❍ between tool change and machining operation.
The Safety plane is not taken into account for the generation of transition paths.
Transition Path Options

When Generate Transition Paths is selected, the Transition Paths dialog box appears. You must select the manufacturing
program to be processed and set the desired options.
Transition Path Creation: specifies where transition paths are to be added in the program:
● To Machining Operation: transition paths are generated before each machining operation. If there is a machining axis before a
machining operation, the transition path is added before the machining axis.
● To Tool Change: transition paths are added before each tool change.
Machine Rotation Creation: allows creation of Rotary motion embedded in the transition path with:
● generation of machine rotation instructions in the output file (for example, ROTABL and ROTHED)
● automatic checking of machine reachability for rotary motion.
Priority Order: specifies the preferred order between Tool Change and Machine Rotation when they are both present before a
machining operation.
● Priority to Tool change: the Machine Rotation is embedded in the Transition Path that is after the Tool change.
● Priority to Machine Rotation: the Machine Rotation is embedded in the Transition Path that is before the Tool change.
Retract/Approach Motion: specifies how retract and approach motions are to be done globally for all the transition paths of all
selected programs:
● Perpendicular to transition (or traverse) plane
● Along tool axis.
If a specific retract or approach is required on a machining operation, it should be defined by macros on the operation.
Traverse Motion on Top: this option is taken into account only when all 5 traverse planes are defined in the Part Operation. It is
useful when a transition path needs to go from one side to the opposite side of the traverse box.
The intermediate plane can be any one of the three other planes.
If the checkbox is selected, then the top plane is used as the intermediate plane.
Otherwise, the motion will be done using the intermediate plane that gives the shortest path.
Compute axial-radial motion: if a traverse box is not defined and no transition plane is selected, selecting this checkbox authorizes
2.5 axis motion only. Tool axis direction at start and end of motion must be the same.
Return to machine home position: Generates an additional Transition Path after the last Machining Operation in order to return to
the machine home position.
Transition Path Computation Overview

The general operation of Transition Path generation is outlined below. It assumes that an appropriate generic machine has been
specified in the Part Operation.
Transition Paths with Table Rotation
If Table Rotation option is selected, and if a table rotation is needed, the tool retracts to the specified rotary plane and makes the table
rotation. A head rotation is also done if necessary.
If Compute axial-radial motion is selected, the tool approaches the next point in 2.5 axis motion.
Otherwise, the tool approaches the next point in linear motion.
For a transition path with table motion, the tool approaches the next point in 2.5 axis motion after the table rotation.
Transition Paths without Table Rotation
If Table Rotation option is not selected, or if a table rotation is not needed, the Transition Path capability checks whether or not a valid
traverse box is defined.
Traverse Box Defined
If a valid traverse box is defined, the traverse box motion is computed. This motion may be modified according whenever valid
transition planes are specified. A head rotation are also done if necessary.
Traverse Box Not Defined
If no valid traverse box is defined, the Transition Path capability verifies whether or not valid transition planes are defined.
If valid transition planes are defined, the tool retracts to these planes.
If no valid transition planes are defined, the Transition Path capability verifies whether or not the Axial Radial option is selected.
If Compute axial-radial motion is selected, the tool approaches the next point in 2.5 axis motion.
Otherwise, the tool approaches the next point in linear motion.
Generation of Transition Paths without Machine Rotations

This is the case when a generic 5-axis machine is selected in the Part Operation.
Transitions Between Operations

The 5 traverse box planes defined on the Part operation delimit a traverse box.
First, the transition path is computed by taken into account this traverse box.
Retract and Approach motions are automatically defined.

The transitions motions are done in RAPID mode.
The Retract/Approach option can be set to define the motions type:
● Perpendicular to transition plane (the tool axis of the machining operation is kept)
● Along operation tool axis, until the transition plane.
Transition motions are done as follows:
1.Perpendicular retract (1) to the plane (with the same tool axis of the operation) or retract along the tool axis
2.Transition motion (2) through the plane (P1) until the intersection of planes (P1 and P2)
3.Tool axis modification
4.Transition motion (3) through the plane (P2) until the perpendicular (or along the tool axis) of the next operation
5.Approach motion (4) to the next operation (tool axis of the operation)
Note that during transition motions the tool tip is on the traverse planes.
Then transition planes are used to modify these transition motions by reducing air cuts.
Transitions Between Tool Change and Operation
First, transition motions are done as follows (respecting the traverse box):
1. Perpendicular retract (1) to the plane (with the same tool axis than the operation) or retract along the tool axis
2. Transition motion (2) through the plane (P1) until the intersection of planes (P1 and P2)
3. Tool axis modification: Normal to the next plane (P2).
4. Transition motion (3) through the plane (P2) until the perpendicular of the tool change
5. Approach motion (4) to the tool change
Then transition planes are used to modify these transition motions by reducing air cuts.
Generation of Transition Paths with Machine Rotations

Transitions Between Operations
The transition path is done between the last point of the machining operation (last point of the retract macro) and the first point of the
next machining operation (first point of the approach macro).
No control or cut of machining operation motions (including macro motions) is done outside the traverse box. The macro should be
defined inside the traverse box. The transition paths are then generated up to the traverse box planes.
Transitions with Generation of Machine Table Rotation

The rotary plane is taken into account in order to define a safety distance.
The rotary plane must be parallel to the machine rotary axis. Thus, if the machine as several rotary axis, several planes must be
selected.
There are several cases:
● None of the selected Rotary planes are parallel to the machine rotary axis: the furthest point between the rotary axis and the last
point of the previous operation or the first point of the next operation defines the radius of the rotation.
● Some of the selected Rotary planes are parallel to the machine rotary axis: the plane that defines the maximum distance with the
rotary axis is taken into account.
● The last point of the previous operation or the first point of the next operation is further from the machine rotation axis than all
rotary planes: the rotary planes are not taken into account.
Transitions with Generation of Machine Head Rotation
In the previous example, if machine head rotation generation is chosen, the transition path is computed the same way as for a 5 axis
machine without generation of machine rotations. The tool tip path follows traverse box planes and transition planes. The difference is
that for each modification of the tool axis, a machine head rotation is generated as well as tool motions take back the tool tip on the
planes.
Example1:
The tool axes are different and the traverse planes are different: the head rotation is performed at the traverse plane intersection with
the following behavior.
Example 2:
The tool axes are different, the traverse plane is the same: the head rotation is performed as follows.
Example 3:
The machining operations are defined at opposite sides of the traverse box.
The transition motions are generated in 3 planes: then head rotations are done at the intersection of planes.
In this case, in the intermediate plane, the tool axis is defined as being perpendicular to the plane during transition motion in this
plane.
Transitions when Traverse Plane and Transition Planes are Defined
The transition planes are used to modify the transition motions respecting the traverse box plane by reducing air cuts.
Example:
A machining operation is defined at the bottom of the part.

Motion mode is set to Along operation tool axis.
A transition plane defines the bottom limit of the box.
Transition Motions between Tool Change and Operation
The behavior is the same as that described in Transition Between Operations.
Rotation Generation
The tool path is a circular arc for table rotation and head rotation.
Transition path needs to be computed before the computation of the machine rotation tool path in order to have the start position
(position 2 in the figure below).

PP Word Tables
You can create and manage Post-Processor word tables with NC Manufacturing products.
Sample PP word tables are delivered with the product in the ..\startup\manufacturing\PPTables folder. Each PP word table is
stored in a unique text file with suffix pptable. These tables can be used as a basis for creating user-defined tables.
A PP word table can be defined for a specific machine tool and used in NC applications.
You can also define the general syntaxes of post-processor words. These syntaxes will be proposed when you want to create a
PP instruction.
A PP word table comprises:
● major words without parameters

● major words with a text
● major words with parameters
● minor words
● word syntaxes.
You can define for a given machine tool:
● syntaxes associated to particular NC commands
● sequences of PP word syntaxes associated to particular NC instructions.
The NC Manufacturing product will resolve the parameters of these syntaxes and syntax sequences and generate the
corresponding statements in the APT output.
NC Commands
You can define for a given machine tool (i.e. post-processor) PP word syntaxes associated to particular NC commands.
An NC command is a machine function such as feedrate declaration (NC_FEEDRATE) or spindle activation (NC_SPINDLE_START).
A syntax comprises a major word and one or more syntax elements such as minor words, numerical values, lists and
parameters.
A syntax that includes lists or parameters is a parameterized syntax (see example below):
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_COMPENSATION
LOADTL/%MFG_TL_NUMBER,%MFG_TOOL_COMP
*END
Note that the & character indicates a list and the % character indicates a parameter. A list has a finite number of values. You
can define only one syntax for each NC command.
The example below shows how lists can be used to define inch units for feeds and speeds:
*START_LIST MFG_FEED_UNIT
IPM ,IPR
*END
*END
/
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_SPINDLE_START
*START_LIST MFG_SPNDL_UNIT
RPM ,SFM
*END
SPINDL/%MFG_SPNDL_SPEED,&MFG_SPNDL_UNIT,&MFG_SPNDL_WAY
*END
/
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_SPINDLE_LATHE
RPM ,SFM
*END
SPINDL/%MFG_SPNDL_SPEED,&MFG_SPNDL_UNIT
*END
The example below shows how lists can be used to define metric units for feeds and speeds:
*START_LIST MFG_FEED_UNIT
MMPM ,MMPR
*END
*END
/
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_SPINDLE_START
RPM ,SMM
*END
SPINDL/%MFG_SPNDL_SPEED,&MFG_SPNDL_UNIT,&MFG_SPNDL_WAY
*END
/
*START_NC_COMMAND NC_SPINDLE_LATHE
RPM ,SMM
*END
SPINDL/%MFG_SPNDL_SPEED,&MFG_SPNDL_UNIT
*END
For an example of how to define syntaxes in NC commands, please see PP Word Syntaxes in the Customizing section of this
guide.
Arithmetic Operators
It is possible to use the following arithmetic operators in PP word syntaxes:
● addition (+)
● subtraction (-)
● multiplication (*)
● division (/).
These operators can be used:
● between word syntaxes (for example, %MFG_xxx + %MFG_yyy)

● between a value and a word syntax (for example, n + %MFG_yyy)
● between a word syntax and a value (for example, %MFG_xxx + n)
● between values (for example, n + m).
Parenthesis are not needed in expressions: they will be ignored and will not appear in NC data output. For example:
WORD/%MFG_aaa, %MFG_xxx + %MFG_yyy, %MFG_bbb/2
Operators are processed in the order they appear in the syntax. For example:
%MFG_xxx + %MFG_yyy * %MFG_zzz
This means that %MFG_xxx is added to %MFG_yyy, then this sum is multiplied by %MFG_zzz.
You should avoid using the +, -, *, / characters for other meanings. For example, you could use an underscore (_) instead of a
dash (-) in the following expression to avoid any ambiguity:
PPRINT/DIAMETER-VALUE, %MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM
Syntaxes of NC Commands
NC command syntaxes that are supported in the current version are as follows:
● NC_3X_MO_START_COMMENT
● NC_5X_MO_START_COMMENT
● NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT
● NC_CHANGE_REF_PT
● NC_COMMENT
● NC_COMPENSATION
● NC_CUTCOM_LEFT
● NC_CUTCOM_OFF
● NC_CUTCOM_ON
● NC_CUTCOM_NORMDS_OFF
● NC_CUTCOM_NORMDS_ON
● NC_CUTCOM_NORMPS_OFF
● NC_CUTCOM_NORMPS_ON
● NC_CUTCOM_RIGHT
● NC_DELAY
● NC_FEEDRATE
● NC_LATHE_MO_START_COMMENT
● NC_MACHINING_AXIS
● NC_MILL_MO_START_COMMENT
● NC_MULTAX_ON
● NC_MULTAX_OFF
● NC_PITCH
● NC_SPINDLE
● NC_SPINDLE_LATHE
● NC_SPINDLE_LOCK
● NC_SPINDLE_OFF
● NC_SPINDLE_ON
● NC_SPINDLE_START
● NC_SPINDLE_STOP
● NC_THREAD_TURN
● NC_THREAD_TURN_OFF
NC_xxx_MO_START_COMMENT syntaxes allow machining operation information to be output in the APT source file. A sample PP
Table (PPTableSampleMOComment.pptable) is delivered in the ..\startup\manufacturing\PPTables folder.
NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT
For axial machining operations:
*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT
*START_SEQUENCE
PPRINT NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT BEGIN
PPRINT MACHINE OPERATION = %MFG_MO_TYPE
PPRINT OPERATION NAME = %MFG_MO_IDENTIFIER
PPRINT PATTERN NAME = %MFG_PATTERN_NAME
PPRINT TOOL ASSEMBLY = %MFG_TL_ASMBLY_ID
PPRINT NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT END
*END
*END
The following example shows the type of APT source that can be generated:
PPRINT NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT BEGIN

PPRINT MACHINE OPERATION = Drilling
PPRINT OPERATION NAME = Drilling.1
PPRINT PATTERN NAME = Hole.1
PPRINT TOOL ASSEMBLY = Drill_Diam10
PPRINT NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT END
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Drilling.1
$$ Start generation of : Drilling.1
LOADTL/2,1
SPINDL/ 204.0000,SFM,CLW
RAPID
GOTO / 130.00000, -55.00000, 2.50000
CYCLE/DRILL, 52.886751, 2.500000, 0.200000,MMPR
GOTO / 130.00000, -55.00000, 0.00000
CYCLE/OFF
NC_3X_MO_START_COMMENT
For 3-axis milling operations:
*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_3X_MO_START_COMMENT
*START_SEQUENCE
PPRINT NC_3X_MO_START_COMMENT BEGIN
PPRINT NC_3X_MO_START_COMMENT END
*END
*END
For 5-axis milling operations:
*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_5X_MO_START_COMMENT
*START_SEQUENCE
PPRINT NC_5X_MO_START_COMMENT BEGIN
PPRINT NC_5X_MO_START_COMMENT END
*END
*END
NC_LATHE_MO_START_COMMENT
For turning operations:
*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_LATHE_MO_START_COMMENT
*START_SEQUENCE
PPRINT NC_LATHE_MO_START_COMMENT BEGIN
PPRINT NC_LATHE_MO_START_COMMENT END
*END
*END
NC_MILL_MO_START_COMMENT
For 2.5-axis milling operations:
*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_MILL_MO_START_COMMENT
*START_SEQUENCE
PPRINT NC_MILL_MO_START_COMMENT BEGIN
PPRINT NC_MILL_MO_START_COMMENT END
*END
*END
NC_CHANGE_REF_PT
Allows selecting the tool compensation corresponding to the desired tool output point.
MFG_QUADRANT: Number of the compensation type (for example, 2 for compensation type P2)
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS: Insert nose radius
MFG_TL_SET_X: Tool assembly set length in x direction
MFG_TL_SET_Y: Tool assembly set length in y direction
MFG_TL_SET_Z: Tool assembly set length in z direction
MFG_LGTH_COR_REG, MFG_TOOL_COMP and MFG_TL_COMP (compatibility V4): number of the correction register.
Default syntax: SWITCH/%MFG_QUADRANT

Syntax example for turning operations:
SWITCH/%MFG_TL_COMP,%MFG_QUADRANT,INCR,%MFG_TL_SET_X,%MFG_TL_SET_Z,%MFG_NOSE_RADIUS
NC_COMMENT
MFG_MO_COMMENT: comment defined on machining operation.
Default syntax: %MFG_MO_COMMENT
NC_COMPENSATION
MFG_TOOL_COMP and MFG_TL_COMP (compatibility V4): value of the tool compensation length
MFG_TL_COMP_RAD: value of the tool compensation radius
MFG_TL_NUMBER: tool number associated to the compensation
MFG_TL_NAME: name of tool associated to the compensation.
Default syntax: LOADTL/%MFG_TL_NUMBER,%MFG_TL_COMP
NC_CUTCOM_ON
The syntax of this NC command is CUTCOM/ON and cannot be parameterized.
NC_CUTCOM_OFF
The syntax of this NC command is CUTCOM/OFF and cannot be parameterized.
NC_CUTCOM_NORMDS_ON
The syntax of this NC command is CUTCOM/SAME, NORMDS and cannot be parameterized.
NC_CUTCOM_NORMDS_OFF
NC_CUTCOM_NORMPS_ON
The syntax of this NC command is CUTCOM/NORMPS and cannot be parameterized.
NC_CUTCOM_NORMPS_OFF
NC_CUTCOM_LEFT
The syntax of this NC command is CUTCOM/LEFT and cannot be parameterized.
NC_CUTCOM_RIGHT
The syntax of this NC command is CUTCOM/RIGHT and cannot be parameterized.
NC_DELAY
MFG_DELAY_UNIT: list with two values defining the delay units.

First value: delay expressed in number of revolutions.
REV is the default value.
Second value: delay expressed in seconds.
A blank string (represented by 8 underscore characters) is the default value. When the statement is generated by the
application this string is ignored.
MFG_DELAY_VALUE: numerical value of the delay.
Default syntax: DELAY/%MFG_DELAY_VALUE,&MFG_DELAY_UNIT
NC_FEEDRATE
MFG_FEED_UNIT: list with two values defining the feedrate units.

First value: feedrate expressed in model units per minute. MMPM is the default value.
Second value: feedrate expressed in model units per revolution. MMPR is the default value.
MFG_FEED_VALUE: numerical value of the feedrate.
Default syntax: FEDRAT/%MFG_FEED_VALUE,&MFG_FEED_UNIT
NC_MACHINING_AXIS
The syntax of this NC command is as follows:
$$*CATIA0
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_IDENTIFIER
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECX %MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECY %MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECZ %MFG_NCAXIS_X_ORIG
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECX %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECY %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECZ %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_ORIG
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECX %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECY %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECZ %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_ORIG
The syntax of this NC command for a multi-slide lathe machine environment is as follows:
$$*CATIA0
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_IDENTIFIER, %MFG_SPINDLE_NAME, %MFG_SPINDLE_NUMBER
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECX %MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECY %MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECZ %MFG_NCAXIS_X_ORIG
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECX %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECY %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECZ %MFG_NCAXIS_Y_ORIG
$$ %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECX %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECY %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECZ %MFG_NCAXIS_Z_ORIG
The parameters are as follows:
MFG_NCAXIS_IDENTIFIER: manufacturing program name for the first output, otherwise name of the machining axis change
MFG_SPINDLE_NAME: name of the spindle that is linked to the origin
MFG_SPINDLE_NUMBER: number of the spindle that is linked to the origin
MFG_NCAXIS_X_ORIG, MFG_NCAXIS_Y_ORIG, MFG_NCAXIS_Z_ORIG: coordinates of the machining axis origin
MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECX, MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECX, MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECX: components of the x-axis
MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECY, MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECY, MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECY: components of the y-axis
MFG_NCAXIS_X_VECZ, MFG_NCAXIS_Y_VECZ, MFG_NCAXIS_Z_VECZ: components of the z-axis.
NC_MULTAX_ON
The syntax of this NC command is MULTAX and cannot be parameterized.
NC_MULTAX_OFF
The syntax of this NC command is MULTAX/OFF and cannot be parameterized.
NC_PITCH
MFG_THREAD_PITCH: Thread pitch

MFG_NUM_THREADS: Number of threads.
Syntax examples:
PITCH/%MFG_THREAD_PITCH
PITCH/(1/%MFG_THREAD_PITCH),MULTRD,%MFG_NUM_THREADS
FEDRAT/%MFG_THREAD_PITCH,MMPR
NC_SPINDLE_ON
The syntax of this NC command is SPINDL/ON and cannot be parameterized.
NC_SPINDLE_START or NC_SPINDLE
MFG_SPNDL_UNIT: list with two values defining the spindle rotation units.
First value: spindle rotation expressed in revolutions per minute. RPM is the default value.
Second value: spindle rotation expressed in surface meters per minute. SMM is the default value.
MFG_SPNDL_WAY: list with two values defining the direction of rotation of the spindle.
First value: spindle rotation processed clockwise. CLW is the default value.
Second value: spindle rotation processed counter-clockwise. CCLW is the default value.
MFG_SPNDL_SPEED: numerical value of the spindle speed.
MFG_SPNDL_DIAMTR: diameter of the tool where the spindle speed is taken into account.
Default syntax: SPINDL/%MFG_SPNDL_SPEED,&MFG_SPNDL_UNIT,&MFG_SPNDL_WAY
NC_SPINDLE_LATHE
Note that this corresponds to the part's spindle speed.
Default syntax: SPINDL/%MFG_SPNDL_SPEED,&MFG_SPNDL_UNIT
NC_SPINDLE_STOP
This NC command ensures compatibility with V4. You should use NC_SPINDLE_LOCK or NC_SPINDLE_OFF, if possible.
MFG_SPNDL_STOP: list with two values defining the action applied to the spindle.
First value: de-activation of the spindle. OFF is the default value.
Second value: spindle locked in an indexed position. LOCK is the default value.
NC_SPINDLE_LOCK
The syntax of this NC command is SPINDL/LOCK and cannot be parameterized.
NC_SPINDLE_OFF
The syntax of this NC command is SPINDL/OFF and cannot be parameterized.
NC_THREAD_TURN
Syntax example: THREAD/TURN
NC_THREAD_TURN_OFF
Syntax example: THREAD/OFF
NC Instructions
You can define for a given machine tool (i.e. post-processor) sequences of PP word syntaxes associated to particular NC
instructions.
NC instructions are either auxiliary commands or axial machining operations.
A syntax comprises a major word and one or more syntax elements such as minor words, numerical values and standard
parameters. A set of standard parameters is associated to each NC instruction. Parameters may be combined in arithmetical
expressions.
A syntax that includes parameters is a parameterized syntax (see examples below):
*START_SEQUENCE
TOOLNO/%MFG_TOOL_NUMBER,%MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM
TPRINT/%MFG_TOOL_NAME
LOADTL/%MFG_TOOL_NUMBER
*END
*END
*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_TAPPING
*START_SEQUENCE
CYCLE/TAP,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
*END
*END
Note that the % character indicates a parameter.
You can define one or more syntax sequences for each NC instruction.
For an example of how to define syntax sequences in NC Instructions, please see PP Word Syntaxes in the Customizing section
of this guide.
Standard Parameters for Auxiliary Command Type NC Instructions
These parameters include data that is defined on the corresponding entity or parameters that are computed according to an
application method.
Auxiliary command type NC Instructions are as follows:
● NC_ACTIVITY_HEADER
● NC_END_MACRO
● NC_HEAD_ROTATION
● NC_ORIGIN
● NC_PROGRAM_HEADER
● NC_START_MACRO
● NC_TABLE_ROTATION
● NC_TOOL_CHANGE
● NC_TOOL_CHANGE_LATHE
NC_ACTIVITY_HEADER
This instruction is used to valuate parameters of an activity during the generation of APT.
Default syntax (empty):

*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_ACTIVITY_HEADER
*START_SEQUENCE
*END
*END
Syntax example:
$$ OPERATION NAME = %MFG_MO_IDENTIFIER
NC_END_MACRO
MFG_IDENTIFIER: Part Operation identifier

MFG_MACHINE_NAME: Machine name.
Default syntax: SPINDL/OFF
NC_HEAD_ROTATION
MFG_TYPE_OF_ROT: Rotation type (absolute angle in this version)

MFG_DIR_OF_ROT: Rotation direction (clockwise or counterclockwise)
MFG_AMOUNT_ROT: Angle of rotation about the axis of rotation
MFG_AXIS_OF_ROT: Axis of rotation on machine head.
MFG_ABC_AXIS: Axis of rotation on machine head to get Minor word AAXIS, BAXIS or CAXIS.
Default syntax: ROTHED/%MFG_AMOUNT_ROT,%MFG_DIR_OF_ROT
NC_ORIGIN
MFG_NCAXIS_X_ORIG, MFG_NCAXIS_Y_ORIG, MFG_NCAXIS_Z_ORIG: coordinates of the origin

MFG_ORIGIN_NUMBER: origin number
MFG_ORIGIN_GROUP: origin group.
Default syntax: ORIGIN/%MFG_NCAXIS_X_ORIG,%MFG_NCAXIS_Y_ORIG,%MFG_NCAXIS_Z_ORIG,$

%MFG_ORIGIN_NUMBER,%MFG_ORIGIN_GROUP
NC_PROGRAM_HEADER
MFG_PROGRAM_NAME: Manufacturing Program name

MFG_CHANNEL_NUMBER: Channel number (Turret).
Default syntax (empty):

*START_NC_INSTRUCTION NC_PROGRAM_HEADER
*START_SEQUENCE
*END
*END
Syntax example:
PROG_NAME,%MFG_PROGRAM_NAME
Syntax example in a Multi-Axis Lathe machine environment:

CHANNEL,%MFG_CHANNEL_NUMBER
NC_START_MACRO
MFG_IDENTIFIER: Part Operation identifier

MFG_PROGRAM_NAME: Manufacturing Program name
MFG_MACHINE_NAME: Machine name
MFG_MODEL_NAME: Name of the CATProcess (with document suffix)
MFG_PRODUCT_NAME: Name of the CATProduct/CATPart (with no document suffix).
Default syntax: PARTNO PART TO BE MACHINED
NC_TABLE_ROTATION
MFG_TYPE_OF_ROT: Rotation type (absolute angle in this version)

MFG_DIR_OF_ROT: Rotation direction (clockwise or counterclockwise)
MFG_AMOUNT_ROT: Angle of rotation about the axis of rotation
MFG_AXIS_OF_ROT: Axis of rotation on machine table.
MFG_ABC_AXIS: Axis of rotation on machine table to get Minor word AAXIS, BAXIS or CAXIS.
Default syntax: ROTABL/%MFG_AMOUNT_ROT,%MFG_DIR_OF_ROT
NC_TOOL_CHANGE
Please note that if tool assembly resources are not used in your process, the term 'tool assembly' means 'tool' or 'cutter' in the
following description.
MFG_TL_ASMBLY_ID: Tool assembly identifier

MFG_TL_SET_LGTH: Tool set length
MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM: Nominal diameter of the tool
MFG_TOOL_COMMENT: Comment associated with the tool
MFG_TOOL_NUMBER: Tool assembly number
MFG_ASS_COMMENT: Comment associated with the tool assembly
MFG_WEIGHT_SNTX: Tool weight syntax
MFG_COOLNT_SNTX: Coolant supply syntax
MFG_TOOTH_DES: Tooth description
MFG_DIAMETER_2: Diameter 2 of the tool assembly
MFG_MAX_MIL_TIME: Tool life (in time units)
MFG_MAX_MIL_LGTH: Tool life (in length units)
MFG_CORNER_RAD: Tool corner radius
MFG_CUT_ANGLE: Tool cutting angle
MFG_LENGTH: Length of active part of the tool
MFG_TL_TIP_LGTH: Tool tip length
MFG_CUT_LENGTH: Tool cutting length
MFG_NB_OF_FLUTES: Number of teeth
MFG_TOOL_NAME: Tool name
MFG_TL_SET_X: Tool set length in x direction
MFG_TL_SET_Y: Tool set length in y direction
MFG_WAY_OF_ROT: Computed rotation direction of tool (RIGHTHAND or LEFTHAND)
MFG_TOOL_ASS_POW: Computed tool assembly power type
If fixed the value is TURN, otherwise the value is MILL
MFG_TOOL_COMP and MFG_TL_COMP (compatibility V4): value of the tool compensation length
MFG_TOOL_COMP_2: value of the second tool compensation length
MFG_FEED_MACH: Machining feedrate (*)

MFG_SPNDL_MACH: Machining spindle speed (*)
MFG_FEED_UNIT: Computed feedrate unit (*)
MFG_SPNDL_UNIT: Computed spindle speed unit (*)
(*) The values of these feed and speed attributes are taken from the first machining operation under the tool change.
Default syntax: TOOLNO/%MFG_TOOL_NUMBER,%MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM

NC_TOOL_CHANGE_LATHE
MFG_TL_ASMBLY_ID: Tool assembly identifier

MFG_ASS_COMMENT: Comment associated with the tool assembly
MFG_TOOL_NUMBER: Tool assembly number
MFG_TOOL_NAME: Insert-holder name
MFG_TOOL_COMMENT: Comment associated with the insert-holder
MFG_INSERT_NAME: Insert name
MFG_INSERT_COMMENT: Comment associated with the insert
MFG_QUADRANT: Number of the compensation type (for example, 2 for compensation type P2)
MFG_TL_SETUP_ANG: Tool assembly setup angle (value in degrees)
MFG_TL_SET_X: Tool assembly set length in x direction
MFG_TL_SET_Y: Tool assembly set length in y direction
MFG_TL_SET_Z: Tool assembly set length in z direction
MFG_HAND_STYLE: Insert-holder style (LEFT_HAND, RIGHT_HAND or NEUTRAL)

MFG_TOOL_INVERT: Tool assembly inversion. Defines if the insert-holder has been inverted with respect to the original insert-
holder style. Possible values are 0 (not inverted) or 1 (inverted).
MFG_TOOL_COMP and MFG_TL_COMP (compatibility V4): Value of the insert-holder compensation length
MFG_LIFE_TIME: Insert life-time (in time units). Not available for Groove inserts.
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS: Insert nose radius
MFG_CLEAR_ANGLE: Insert clearance angle
MFG_INSERT_LGTH: Insert length
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM: Inscribed diameter of insert
MFG_INSERT_ANGLE: Insert shape angle
MFG_SPNDL_WAY: Spindle direction

MFG_FEED_MACH: Machining feedrate (*)
MFG_FEED_UNIT: Feedrate unit (*)
MFG_SPNDL_MACH: Machining spindle speed (*)
MFG_SPNDL_UNIT: Spindle speed unit (*).
(*) The values of these feed and speed attributes are taken from the first machining operation under the tool change.
Default syntax: TOOLNO/%MFG_TOOL_NUMBER,TURN
Mill/Turn integration and the NC_TOOL_CHANGE_LATHE instruction
For a drilling operation using a non-powered Milling Tool Assembly and machining along the spindle axis, a Lathe Tool Change
is created. In this case, the following Insert attributes are replaced by Tool attributes:
Insert attributes Tool attributes
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM
MFG_LIFE_TIME MFG_MAX_MIL_TIME
MFG_LIFE_LGTH MFG_MAX_MIL_LGTH
MFG_INSERT_LGTH MFG_CUT_LENGTH
MFG_CLEAR_ANGLE 0 (not valuated)
MFG_INSERT_ANGLE MFG_CUT_ANGLE
Standard Parameters for Axial Machining Operation Type NC Instructions
For axial machining operations, the standard parameters are either:
● parameters defined on the corresponding machining operation (geometrical data, machining strategy parameters, feeds and
speeds, and so on)
● parameters that are calculated according to an application method.
In the figures below:
● detail depth (MFG_DETAIL_DEPTH) and total depth (MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH) are computed parameters
● breakthrough distance (MFG_BREAKTHROUGH) is a machining strategy parameter
● tool tip length is a geometric attribute of the tool (MFG_TL_TIP_LGTH).
Overall breakthrough is the breakthrough distance plus the tool tip length.
Figure 1. Total depth without breakthrough

Figure 2. Total depth with breakthrough
The figures below show Depth mode behavior on axial operations with chamfering machining:
Figure 3. Spot Drilling with Depth mode=By Tip

Figure 4. Countersinking with Depth mode=By Diameter
Axial machining operation type NC Instructions are as follows:
● NC_BACK_BORING
● NC_BORING
● NC_BORING_SPINDLE_STOP
● NC_BORING_AND_CHAMFERING
● NC_BREAK_CHIPS
● NC_CIRCULAR_MILLING
● NC_COUNTERBORING
● NC_COUNTERSINKING
● NC_DEEPHOLE
● NC_DRILLING
● NC_DRILLING_DWELL_DELAY
● NC_LATHE_THREADING
● NC_REAMING
● NC_REVERSE_THREADING
● NC_SPOT_DRILLING
● NC_T_SLOTTING
● NC_TAPPING
● NC_THREAD_WITHOUT_TAP_HEAD
● NC_THREAD_MILLING
● NC_TWO_SIDES_CHAMFERING
NC_BACK_BORING
General parameters are as follows:
MFG_MO_TYPE: Machining operation type

MFG_MO_IDENTIFIER: Machining operation name or identifier
MFG_PATTERN_NAME: Machining pattern name.
Feeds and Speeds parameters are as follows:
MFG_FEED_APP_MODE: Approach feedrate mode (0: Value / 1: Rapid)

MFG_FEED_APP_VALUE and MFG_FEED_APPRCH (compatibility V4): Approach feedrate
MFG_FEED_PLUNGE_MODE and MFG_FEED_PL_TYPE (compatibility V4): Plunge feedrate mode (0: Value / 1: Rapid)
MFG_FEED_PLUNGE_VALUE and MFG_PLUNGE_FEED (compatibility V4): Plunge feedrate
MFG_FEED_MACH_VALUE and MFG_FEED_MACH (compatibility V4): Machining feedrate
MFG_SPINDLE_MACH_VALUE and MFG_SPNDL_MACH (compatibility V4): Machining spindle speed
MFG_FEED_RETRACT_MODE and MFG_FEED_RT_TYPE (compatibility V4): Retract feedrate mode (0: Value / 1: Rapid)
MFG_FEED_RETRACT_VALUE and MFG_FEED_RETRACT (compatibility V4): Retract feedrate
MFG_FEED_UNIT: Feedrate unit
MFG_SPNDL_UNIT: Spindle speed unit
Machining Strategy parameters are as follows:
MFG_CLEAR_TIP: Approach clearance

MFG_CLEAR_TIP_2: Second approach clearance
MFG_DEPTH_MODE: Depth mode (1: Tip / 2: Shoulder)
MFG_DWELL_MODE: Dwell mode (0: None / 1: By revolutions / 2: By time)
MFG_DWELL_REVOL: Dwell delay in revolutions
MFG_DWELL_TIME: Dwell delay in time units (seconds)
MFG_LIFT_MODE: Shift mode (0: None / 1: Linear coordinates / 2: Polar coordinates)
MFG_XOFF: Shift along X
MFG_YOFF: Shift along Y
MFG_ZOFF: Shift along Z
MFG_LIFT_ANGLE: Shift angle
MFG_LIFT_DIST: Shift distance
MFG_RETRACT_CLEAR_TIP: retract clearance
MFG_TOOL_COMP and MFG_TL_COMP (compatibility V4): Length number of current corrector
MFG_TOOL_COMP_1: Length number of first corrector
MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST: Distance between the position of the current corrector and the tool tip
MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST_1: Distance between the position of the first corrector and the tool tip
Geometry parameters are as follows:
MFG_DIAMETER: Nominal diameter of the tool

MFG_NOMINAL_DIAMETER: Nominal diameter of the machined feature
MFG_BCK_BORE_VAL: Back bore depth
MFG_JUMP_DIST: Jump distance
Computed parameters are as follows (see Figure 1 and Figure 2 above):
MFG_DETAIL_DEPTH: Hole depth that is effectively machined

MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH: Total depth machined by the operation. This includes the hole depth, breakthrough, and tool tip length.
MFG_CMP_DWL_TIME: Computed dwell delay (in time units of seconds): this parameter is computed if dwell mode is set to
'revolutions'. Otherwise, the dwell time is returned as is.
MFG_CMP_OFFSET: Computed offset
MFG_CMP_ANGLE: Computed angle. This parameter is computed if Shift mode is set to 'Linear coordinates'. Otherwise, the
Shift angle is returned as is.
Default syntax: CYCLE/BORE,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP

NC_BORING



MFG_BREAKTHROUGH: Breakthrough distance
MFG_PLUNGE_MODE: Plunge mode (0: None / 1: Tip / 3: Diameter)
MFG_PLUNGE_TIP: Plunge tip distance
MFG_PLUNGE_OFFST: Plunge tip offset
MFG_PLUNGE_DIAMETER: Plunge diameter
MFG_DIAMETER: Nominal diameter of tool


MFG_PLUNGE_DIST: Whatever the selected plunge mode (by Tip or by Diameter), this parameter returns the plunge distance.
The plunge offset is taken into account in this value.
NC_BORING_SPINDLE_STOP



MFG_LIFT_MODE: Shift mode (0: None / 1: Linear coordinates / 2: Polar coordinates)
MFG_XOFF: Shift along X
MFG_YOFF: Shift along Y
MFG_ZOFF: Shift along Z
MFG_LIFT_ANGLE: Shift angle
MFG_LIFT_DIST: Shift distance
MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST_1: Distance between the position of the first corrector and the tool tip.
MFG_DIAMETER: Nominal diameter of tool


MFG_CMP_OFFSET: Computed offset
MFG_CMP_ANGLE: Computed angle. This parameter is computed if Shift mode is set to 'Linear coordinates'. Otherwise, the
Shift angle is returned as is.
NC_BORING_AND_CHAMFERING


MFG_CHAMFER_FEED_VALUE and MFG_CHAMFER_FEED (compatibility V4): Machining feedrate for chamfering phase
MFG_CHAMFER_SPINDLE_VALUE: Machining spindle speed for chamfering phase.

MFG_TOOL_COMP_2: Length number of second corrector
MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST_2: Distance between the position of the second corrector and the tool tip
MFG_DIAMETER and MFG_CHAMFER_VAL (compatibility V4): Chamfer diameter

MFG_JUMP_DIST: Jump distance.
MFG_DETAIL_DEPTH: Hole depth that is effectively machined.

NC_BREAK_CHIPS



MFG_AXIAL_DEPTH: Maximum depth of cut
MFG_OFFSET_RET: Retract offset
MFG_DIAMETER: Tool nominal diameter


MFG_EFFCT_DEPTH: Effective depth (= maximum depth of cut)
Default syntax: CYCLE/BRKCHP,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
NC_CIRCULAR_MILLING



MFG_RADIAL_STEP: Distance between paths
MFG_RADIAL_NB: Number of paths
MFG_AXIAL_STRAT: Axial mode (1: Max depth of cut / 2: Number of levels / 3: Number of levels without top)
MFG_AXIAL_NUMBER: Number of levels
MFG_SEQUENCING_STRAT: Sequencing mode (1: Radial first / 2: Axial first)
MFG_TOLER_MACH: Machining tolerance
MFG_DIR_CUT: Direction of cut (1: Climb / 2: Conventional)
MFG_OVERHANG: Percentage overlap
MFG_DRAFT_ANGLE: Automatic draft angle
MFG_CIRCULAR_MODE: Machining mode (1: Standard / 2: Helical)
MFG_HELIX_MODE: Helix mode (1: By pitch / 2: By angle)
MFG_HELIX_ANGLE: Helix angle
MFG_PITCH: Helix pitch
MFG_DIAMETER: Nominal diameter of hole (offset on contour is taken into account in this value)

Default syntax: CYCLE/CIRCULARMILLING,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP

NC_COUNTERBORING





NC_COUNTERSINKING



MFG_DEPTH_MODE: Depth mode (3: Diameter / 4: Distance). See Figure 4 above.
MFG_PLUNGE_MODE: Plunge mode (0: None / 1: Tip / 3: Diameter).
MFG_DIAMETER: Countersink diameter

Computed parameters are as follows (see Figure 4 above):

MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH: Total depth machined by the operation. This includes the hole depth and breakthrough.
Default syntax: CYCLE/CSINK,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
NC_DEEPHOLE



MFG_OFFSET_RET: Retract offset
MFG_DEPTH_DEC: Decrement rate
MFG_DEPTH_LIM: Decrement limit


MFG_EFFCT_DEPTH: Effective depth (= Maximum depth of cut)
Default syntax: CYCLE/DEEPHL,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
NC_DRILLING





Default syntax: CYCLE/DRILL,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP,%MFG_FEED_MACH,&MFG_FEED_UNIT
NC_DRILLING_DWELL_DELAY





Default syntax: CYCLE/DRILL,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP

NC_LATHE_THREADING

MFG_MO_IDENTIFIER: Machining operation name or identifier.
MFG_THREAD_MACHINING: Machining type (1: Constant depth / 2: Section of cut)

MFG_THREAD_PENETRATION: Penetration (1: Straight / 2: Flank / 3: Alternate)
MFG_THREAD_UNIT: Unit (1: Pitch / 2: Thread per inch)
MFG_THREAD_PROFILE: Profile (1: ISO / 2: Trapezoidal / 3: UNC / 4: Gaz)
MFG_THREAD_PITCH: Thread pitch

MFG_NUM_THREADS: Number of threads
MFG_THRD_PER_UNIT: Threads per inch
MFG_FIR_PATH: Boolean for first passes (0: No / 1: Yes)

MFG_LAS_PATH: Boolean for last passes (0: No / 1: Yes)
MFG_SPR_PATH: Boolean for spring passes (0: No / 1: Yes)
MFG_NUM_FIR_PATH: Number of first passes
MFG_NUM_LAS_PATH: Number of last passes
MFG_NUM_SPR_PATH: Number of spring passes
MFG_FIR_SECT_CUT: Section of cut for first passes
MFG_LAS_DEPT_CUT: Depth of cut for last passes
MFG_FIR_SECT_RAT: Section ratio between first passes and next passes
MFG_CRES_DIA_CLR: Clearance on crest diameter

MFG_ENTER_ANG: Entry angle
MFG_LEAD_IN_DIST: Lead-in distance
MFG_LIFT_OFF_ANG: Lift-off angle
MFG_LIFT_OFF_DIS: Lift-off distance
Computed parameters are as follows:
MFG_ST_THRD_AX: Axial coordinate of the start thread on the crest.

MFG_ST_THRD_RAD: Radial coordinate of the start thread on the crest.
MFG_END_THRD_AX: Axial coordinate of the end thread on the crest.
MFG_END_THRD_RAD: Radial coordinate of the end thread on the crest.
MFG_END_THRD1_AX: Axial coordinate of the end thread on the root.
MFG_END_THRD1_RAD: Radial coordinate of the end thread on the root.
MFG_THRD_DEL_RAD: Depth of thread according to the radial axis.
MFG_THRD_ANG: Angle of the thread. If different from zero, this angle indicates a conical thread.
MFG_NOM_DIAM: Nominal diameter of the thread.
MFG_THRD_LENGTH: Length of the thread.
MFG_NB_PATH: Number of passes. First, last and spring passes are not included.
MFG_DEPTH_CUT: Depth of cut.
MFG_SECTION_CUT: Section of cut for passes that follow the first passes.
MFG_THREAD_DEPTH: Depth of thread.
Default syntax: CYCLE/THREAD,%MFG_THREAD_PITCH

NC_REAMING





Default syntax: CYCLE/REAM,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
NC_REVERSE_THREADING



MFG_PLUNGE_MODE: Plunge mode (0: None / 1: Tip)
MFG_DIAMETER: Internal diameter of the tool

MFG_THREAD_DIAMETER: Nominal diameter of the tool

MFG_PLUNGE_DIST: This parameter returns the plunge distance. The plunge offset is taken into account in this value.
MFG_TOOL_PITCH: Pitch value defined on tool.
Default syntax: CYCLE/TAP,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
NC_SPOT_DRILLING



MFG_DEPTH_MODE: Depth mode (1: Tip / 2: Shoulder). See Figure 3 above.
MFG_PLUNGE_MODE: Plunge mode (0: None / 1: Tip / 3: Diameter).
MFG_DIAMETER: Chamfer diameter

Computed parameters are as follows (see Figure 3 above):


MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH: Total depth machined by the operation. This includes the hole depth and plunge distance.
Default syntax: CYCLE/DRILL,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
NC_T_SLOTTING



MFG_DEPTH_MODE: Depth mode (1: Tip)
MFG_DIAMETER: Slot diameter

MFG_LENGTH: Slot height (= Tool length, which is read on tool)

Default syntax: CYCLE/TSLOT,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP

NC_TAPPING



MFG_DIAMETER: Internal diameter of the tool

MFG_THREAD_DIAMETER: Nominal diameter of the tool

MFG_TOOL_PITCH: Pitch value defined on tool
NC_THREAD_WITHOUT_TAP_HEAD



MFG_DIAMETER: Hole internal diameter

MFG_THREAD_DIAMETER: Tool nominal diameter


NC_THREAD_MILLING



MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST_1: Distance between the position of the first corrector and the tool tip.
MFG_DIAMETER: Hole internal diameter

MFG_THREAD_DIAMETER: Hole nominal diameter
MFG_PITCH: Thread pitch
MFG_PITCH_SENS or MFG_PITCH_WAY_OF_ROT: Thread direction (1: Left-hand / 2: Right-hand)

MFG_TOOL_PITCH: Pitch value defined on tool
Default syntax: CYCLE/THREADMILLING,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP
NC_TWO_SIDES_CHAMFERING



MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST_2: Distance between the position of the second corrector and the tool tip
MFG_DIAMETER: Chamfer diameter


Default syntax: CYCLE/DRILL,%MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH,%MFG_CLEAR_TIP,%MFG_FEED_MACH,&MFG_FEED_UNIT

Feeds and Speeds

Cutting conditions (feed/tooth and cutting speed) can be included in a tools catalog. This data is converted into
machining feedrate and spindle speed parameters to be used in machining operations by means of formula.
For an example of such a tools catalog, see FeedsAndSpeeds.xls file delivered in the
.../startup/Manufacturing/Samples folder.
Cutting conditions are also available in the Feeds & Speeds tab page of the Tool Definition dialog box.
In the Feeds and Speeds tab page of milling operations, the Rough or Finish quality of the operation and the
tool data are taken into account for computing the feeds and speeds.
Cutting Conditions
The following cutting conditions data are supported: cutting speed (Vc), feedrate/tooth (Sz), and depth
of cut.
Cutting conditions for drilling tools:
MFG_VC: cutting speed in mm/mn

MFG_SZ: feedrate/tooth in mm/rev
MFG_PP: Depth of cut.
Roughing and Finishing cutting conditions for milling tools:
MFG_VC_FINISH: finishing cutting speed in mm/mn

MFG_SZ_FINISH: finishing feedrate/tooth in mm/rev
MFG_VC_ROUGH: roughing cutting speed in mm/mn

MFG_SZ_ROUGH: roughing feedrate/tooth in mm/rev.
Roughing and Finishing cutting conditions for lathe inserts:
MFG_VC_FINISH: finishing cutting speed in mm/mn

MFG_SZ_FINISH: finishing feedrate/tooth in mm/rev
MFG_SZ_AA_FINISH: axial depth of cut for finishing
MFG_SZ_AR_FINISH: axial depth of cut for finishing
MFG_VC_ROUGH: roughing cutting speed in mm/mn

MFG_SZ_ROUGH: roughing feedrate/tooth in mm/rev
MFG_SZ_AA_ROUGH: axial depth of cut for roughing
MFG_SZ_AR_ROUGH: axial depth of cut for roughing.
When a tool is selected for an operation, spindle speed (N) and machining feedrate (Vf) are computed
using the following formula:
N (in rev/mn) = Vc / (D * PI)

where:
D = tool diameter for milling/drilling in mm

Vc = cutting speed of the tool or insert.
For turning operations, N is automatically set in mm/min with the value of the insert's cutting speed.
Vf (in mm/rev) = Sz * N * Z
where:
Sz = feedrate/tooth on the tool
N = spindle speed in rev/min
Z = number of teeth on the tool (MFG_NB_OF_FLUTES) or 1 for a lathe insert.
Finishing data is used if the operation is finishing type (for example, Lathe Profile Finishing) or if it includes a
finishing feedrate.
If the tool data is set to 0 (that is, if there are no specified values in the catalog), then spindle speed N and
machining feedrate Vf are not computed on the operation.
Update of Feeds and Speeds on Machining Operation

Operation with a Tool
When you modify a Feeds and Speeds attribute on the tool, the Feeds and Speeds values of the operation are
not automatically updated.
Feeds & speeds of the operation will be updated according to tooling feeds and speeds:
● when you select a new tool

● by selecting the Automatic Compute checkboxes in the Feeds and Speeds tab page of the operation
● by clicking the Compute button located in the Feeds and Speeds tab page of the operation
Two checkboxes allow operation Feeds and Speeds values to be updated automatically when Feeds and Speeds
values of the tool are modified.
If they are checked then the Feeds and Speeds values of the operation will be updated when the Feeds and
Speeds values of the tool are modified.
These two buttons will work separately: if Feedrate is checked and not Spindle then the only the Feedrate
values will be computed.
If they are not selected then automatic update will not be done.
When you modify the Feeds and Speeds values on a tool, all existing operations with these checkboxes
selected that use this tool (or an assembly using this tool) will be recomputed.
The Compute button allows you to force the update of the operation values if one or both checkboxes are not
selected.
The feed and speed values are computed according to the Quality setting on the operation.
The computation of the Feeds and Speeds of the operation depends on the Quality setting:
● Rough: rough values of the tool are taken into account

● Finish: finish values of the tool are taken into account
● Either: no computation will be done for the operation's Feeds and Speeds.
In Tools > Options > Machining > Resources, settings are available to define how the Automatic Compute
checkboxes in the Feeds and Speeds tab page are to be initialized for creating new operations.
Operation without Tool
When a tool is selected for the machining operation, the operation is updated with the new tool's feeds and
speeds data.
NC Data Options
This section gives a summary of the options that are used when generating NC data output in the various
formats. NC Data can be generated either in interactive or batch mode .
NC
NC Data Option APT Clfile CATProduct
Code
Circular Interpolation...
Circular interpolation Yes Yes Yes From
Specifies the type of circles to be processed if circular interpolation machine
is required:
- From machine: uses the values specified by the part operation's
machine
- None: circular interpolation is not required
- Z-axis circles: only circles whose axis is parallel to the z-axis of
the machining axis system are processed
- Any axis circles: all circle types are processed.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *CIR
Circle radius limits Yes Yes Yes No
Specifies how circles are to be processed for circular interpolation:
- From machine: the values specified by the part operation's
machine are used
- Value: user-defined values are used for minimum and maximum
radius constraints.
Minimum radius Yes Yes Yes No
Specifies the value to be used for the minimum radius constraint
for circular interpolation.
If From machine was selected for the Circular interpolation
option, the minimum radius value of the part operation's machine
is used.
Maximum radius Yes Yes Yes No
Specifies the value to be used for the maximum radius constraint
for circular interpolation.
If From machine was selected for the Circular interpolation
option, the maximum radius value of the part operation's machine
is used.
Circular record type No Yes No No
Specifies the type of record to be generated on the clfile if circular
interpolation is requested:
- 3000 and 5000
- 15000.
Tool motions...
Home Point strategy Yes Yes Yes No
You can choose to include Home Point information in the NC data
output by means of this option. In this case GOTO or FROM
information defined on the part operation's machine is used.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *HPM
Include GOTO for tool change Yes Yes Yes No

- Checkbox selected: a GOTO statement will be included before
each tool change.
- Checkbox not selected: a GOTO statement will not be included
before each tool change.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *RMT
Output CYCLE syntax Yes Yes Yes No

- Checkbox selected: the PP word syntax specified in the PP word
table will be output for axial machining operations .
- Checkbox not selected: GOTO statements will be generated in
the NC data output.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *STX
Remove GOTO before cycles Yes Yes Yes No

For axial machining operations using SYNTAX output mode
(CYCLE), you can now choose whether or not to output GOTO
statements corresponding to Jump and Clearance motions.
- Checkbox selected: the following points are removed:
points that were added by the clearance approach distance
points that were added by the jump distance.
- Checkbox not selected: the points are not removed.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *GBC 1
Process Copy and Tracut operations Yes No No No

Specifies whether any Copy or Tracut instructions in the program
are to be processed.
- Checkbox selected: Copy and/or Tracut instructions will be
processed. In this case there will be no Copy or Tracut statements
remaining in the generated APT source.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *APT 2
- Checkbox not selected: Copy and/or Tracut instructions will not
be processed. In this case there will be Copy or Tracut statements
remaining in the generated APT source.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *APT 1
Remove double points after PP commands Yes Yes Yes No

You can choose to keep or remove points that are repeated after PP
statements.
- Checkbox selected: First point after PP command or user syntax
is not kept if the previous one is a coincident point.
- Checkbox not selected: First point after PP command or user
syntax is always kept.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *PAC 1
Remove aligned points Yes Yes Yes No
- Checkbox selected: one or more points that are aligned
between two other points will not be output.
- Checkbox not selected: one or more points that are aligned
between two other points will be output.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *ALP 1
Feedrates...
Use rapid feedrate value instead of RAPID syntax Yes Yes Yes No
Defines the formatting for rapid motions.
- Checkbox selected: rapid motions will be preceded by a
FEEDRATE syntax whose value is the Rapid feedrate specified on
the machine.
- Checkbox not selected: rapid motions will be preceded by a
RAPID syntax.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *RAP
Set Rapid feedrate at start of operations Yes Yes Yes No
- Checkbox selected: a RAPID statement will be included at the
start of each operation. However, if a Clearance macro is defined
on an operation, the macro definition will be taken into account.
- Checkbox not selected: a RAPID statement will not be included
at the start of each operation.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *SRP
Statements...
Tool motion statement Yes Yes Yes No
Defines the format describing tool motion statements on the NC
data output:
- From machine: the output format defined the part operation's
machine is used.
- Point: tool point coordinates (x,y,z) are output.
A TLAXIS statement is given at the start of the generated APT
source.
A fixed-axis clfile record 9000 is given at the start of the generated
clfile.
- Axis: tool point coordinates and tool axis components (x,y,z,i,j,k)
are output.
A MULTAX statement is given at the start of the generated APT
source.
A MULTAX clfile record 9000 is given at the start of the generated
clfile.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *FGO
General information Yes Yes Yes No
Defines how information such as tool names and operation except except
sequence numbers will be generated. $$ $$
- None: not generated
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *PPR 2xx
- PPRINT: generated with the PPRINT word
- $$: generated as a comment (not available for clfile).
where x is a number between 1 and 3 depending on other desired
information ( see example ).
Part operation comments Yes Yes Yes No

Defines how part operation comments will be generated. except except
- None: not generated $$ $$
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *PPR x2x
- $$: generated as a comment (not available for clfile)
information ( see example ) .
Machining operation names Yes Yes Yes No
Defines how machining operation names will be generated. except except
- None: not generated $$ $$
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *PPR xx2
- $$: generated as a comment (not available for clfile)
information ( see example ) .
Format for point coordinates...
Allows you to define other formats for NC data statements allowing better accuracy for large parts.
Number of digits (N) Yes No Yes No

Specifies the total number of digits for each point coordinate.
Digits after decimal (D)

Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point for each point
coordinate.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *NDX N.D

Format for axial components...
Number of digits (N) Yes No Yes No
Specifies the total number of digits for tool axis vector component.
Digits after decimal (D)

Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point for tool axis
vector component.
Equivalent keyword for MfgBatch is *NDI N.D

APT Formats
This section describes formats used to write NC data on APT source files.
Generated APT Syntaxes

Syntax of Generated APT Instructions

Syntax of APT Instructions generated by Machining products is described below. Blank characters used for
presentation comfort on file are not mentioned.
Example of format:
'AUTOPS'
'INDIRV/',F11.5,',',F11.5,',',F11.5'
'TLON,GOFWD/ (CIRCLE/',F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,',$',T73,'CIR',I5
F13.5,'),ON,2,INTOF,$'
'(LINE/',F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,',$'
F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,')'
Example of generated APT source:
AUTOPS
INDIRV/ 0.00000, -1.00000, 0.00000
TLON,GOFWD/ (CIRCLE/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.00000,$ CIR 1
50.00000),ON,2,INTOF,$
(LINE/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.00000,$
50.00000, 0.00000, 0.00000)
General Information
'$$',6X,'GENERATED ON ',A28,' AT ',A8 start of execution (date, time)
Operation Numbers
'PPRINT OPERATION NUMBER: ',I4
'$$ OPERATION NUMBER: ',I4 operation order number in part operation
PP or APT Word Instruction
A80 PP instruction string
NC Axis Components
'$$*CATIA0'
'$$ ',A70
NC axis identifier (may be blank if table rotation
'$$ ',4(F11.5,2X)
operation).
'$$ ',4(F11.5,2X)
'$$ ',4(F11.5,2X)
NC axis matrix definition in absolute axis (*axis1)
Tool Axis Definition
'TLAXIS/'F9.6,2(',',F9.6) tool axis components expressed in machining axis system.
Multi-Axis Management
Manages the output format of GOTO statements in a 5-axis

'MULTAX/ON' program that mixes pure 5-axis operations and locked axis
operations.
(GOTO / X, Y, Z, I, J, K for pure 5-axis motions, and GOTO
'MULTAX/OFF' / X, Y, Z for locked axis motions).
See MULTAX Influence on APT Source.
Starting Point Operation
'GOTO/',F11.5,2(',',F11.5),T73,'PT ',I5 tool tip coordinates, point number
'FROM/',F11.5,2(',',F11.5),T73,'PT ',I5 tool tip coordinates, point number
Tool Information - Mill
'CUTTER/',4(F10.6,','),F10.6,',$' cutter diameter, corner radius, distance center corner to

F10.6,',',F10.6 tool axis, corner radius, 0.0, beta angle, height
Tool Information - Lathe
'CUTTER/',F10.6 nose radius
Tolerances
'INTOL /',F11.5 machining tolerance
'OUTTOL/',F11.5 0.0
Feedrate Values
'FEDRAT/',F10.4 feedrate value
'RAPID'
Linear Tool Motion

'GOTO/',F11.5,2(',',F11.5),T73,'PT ',I5 tool tip coordinates, point number
'GODLTA/',F11.5,2(',',F11.5),T73,'PT ',I5 tool tip incremental move, point number
Circular Tool Motion - CIRCLE/
-
'AUTOPS'
components of circle tangent at
'INDIRV/',F11.5,',',F11.5,',',F11.5' arc start pt
'TLON,GOFWD/ (CIRCLE/',F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,',$',T73,'CIR',I5 circle center coords, circle

number
EITHER:
F13.5,'),ON,(LINE/',F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,',$'
F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,')' radius, circle center coords,
arc end point coords
OR:
F13.5,'),ON,2,INTOF,$'
'(LINE/',F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,',$' radius,
F13.5,',',F13.5,',',F13.5,')' circle center coords,
arc end point coords
Circular Tool Motion - CYLNDR/
tool tip coordinates,

'PSIS/(PLANE/(POINT/',F11.5,2(',',F11.5),'),PERPTO,$' circle axis components
'(VECTOR/',2(F9.6,','),F9.6,'))'
components of tangent at arc
'INDIRV/',F11.5,',',F11.5,',',F11.5 start point
'TLON,GOFWD/(CYLNDR/',2(F11.5,','),F11.5,',$',T73,'CIR',I5 circle center coords, circle

number
EITHER:
circle axis components, radius,
3(F11.5,','),F11.5,'),ON,$' circle center coordinates,
'(PLANE/PERPTO,$' circle axis components,
'(PLANE/(POINT/',F11.5,2(',',F11.5),'),PERPTO,$' circle center coordinates,
'(VECTOR/',2(F9.6,','),F9.6,')),$' '(POINT/',2(F11.5,','),F11.5,'),$' arc end point coordinates
'(POINT/',2(F11.5,','),F11.5,'))'
OR:
circle axis components, radius,
3(F11.5,','),F11.5,'),ON,2,INTOF,$' circle center coordinates,
'(PLANE/PERPTO,$' circle axis components,
'(PLANE/(POINT/',F11.5,2(',',F11.5),'),PERPTO,$' circle center coordinates,
'(VECTOR/',2(F9.6,','),F9.6,')),$' arc end point coordinates
'(POINT/',2(F11.5,','),F11.5,'),$'
'(POINT/',2(F11.5,','),F11.5,'))'
MULTAX Influence on APT Output

A MULTAX statement (MULTAX, MULTAX/ON, MULTAX/OFF) may be defined anywhere in the program (for
example, in a PP word statement or a macro path).
MULTAX statements found during APT generation will influence the output format.
MULTAX statements are searched and identified in any PP word statement. If a MULTAX or MULTAX/ON
statement is found, the following linear motions will be written with the format: GOTO/ X, Y, Z, I, J, K
If a MULTAX/OFF statement is found, the following linear motions will be written GOTO/ X, Y, Z and the tool
axis will be considered as locked.
The components of the locked tool axis are the components defined on the last 5-axis position preceding the
MULTAX/OFF statement. Therefore, no TLAXIS statement is generated after a MULTAX/OFF statement.
In a sequence of motions following a MULTAX/OFF statement, the tool axis orientation is checked, and as soon
as it is not constant, a MULTAX/ON statement will be added, possibly with a warning message in the log file.
Example of APT source:
...
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Tool Change
PPRINT Start generation of : Tool Change
MULTAX/ON
GOTO / 0.00000, 27.16535, 20.47244, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
$$ TOOLCHANGEBEGINNING
CUTTER/ 1.259843, 0.000000, 0.629921, 0.000000, 0.000000,$
0.000000, 0.984250
$$ TOOLCHANGEEND
PPRINT End of generation of : Tool Change
...
MULTAX/OFF
...
RAPID
GOTO / 7.29167, 15.48687, 16.10080
RAPID
GOTO / 7.29167, 15.48687, 15.13780
...
MULTAX/ON
...
RAPID
GOTO / 2.74137, 14.56693, 16.10080, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
RAPID
GOTO / 2.74137, 14.56693, 15.13780, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
...
Please note that the behavior previous to Release 12 was that MULTAX statements had no influence on the
format of GOTO statements.
Non-Modal Behavior of RAPID Statements

According to APT standard formats, all feedrate statements (except RAPID) are modal. This means that they
are applied on all following points until next the feedrate statement.
However, the RAPID instruction is not modal. This means that the RAPID statement is applied only on the next
GOTO motion. For example in a linking macro with rapid feedrate, a RAPID instruction is written before each of
the three GOTO points of the macro.
Another APT standard format rule that is specific to the RAPID word, is to not repeat unnecessarily the current
machining feedrate after the last point in RAPID. The machining feedrate will be applied natively.
In the example below, rapid feedrate only applies to the 1st GOTO point. The machining feedrate that was
current before the RAPID statement applies to the 2nd GOTO point:
FEDRAT/ 300.0000,MMPM
GOTO / -69.00000, 40.00000, 46.00000
GOTO / -69.00000, 50.00000, 0.00000
RAPID
GOTO / -80.0000, -23.0000, 16.0000
GOTO / -90.0000, -21.0000, 16.0000

It is possible to generate NC output files containing tool motion descriptions using a format based on NURBS
technology for both fixed or variable axis programs.
This format is recognized by most new generation NC controllers (such as the Siemens 840D). It supports High
Speed Milling (HSM) in order to reduce machining time and improve surface quality.
Examples of Fixed Axis and Variable Axis NURBS output statements that can be found in the generated APT file
are given below.
Fixed Axis NURBS example:
BEGIN NURBS_SIEMENS(D=3,F=4000,AXIS=0.00,0.00,1.00);
N0,XT= 0.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,DK= 0.00,W=1.0;
N1,XT=10.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,DK= 0.00,W=1.0;
N2,XT=20.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,DK=30.00,W=1.0;
N3,XT=30.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,DK= 0.00,W=1.0;
END NURBS;
Variable Axis NURBS example:
BEGIN NURBS_SIEMENS(D=3,F=4000,AXIS=VAR,LENGTH=100.00);
N0,XT= 0.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,XH= 0.000, $
YH=0.000,ZH=100.00,DK= 0.00,W=1.0;
N1,XT=10.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,XH=10.000, $
YH=0.000,ZH=100.00,DK= 0.00,W=1.0;
N2,XT=20.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,XH=20.000, $
YH=0.000,ZH=100.00,DK=30.00,W=1.0;
N3,XT=30.000,YT=0.000,ZT=0.000,XH=30.000, $
YH=0.000,ZH=100.00,DK= 0.00,W=1.0;
END NURBS;
These statements are supported by some of the Post-Processors proposed under Tools > Options > Machining
> Output for conversion to Siemens Nurbs/Bspline statements.
CATIA Version 5 APT Output Format

The fixed and variable axis NURBS output will be included in regular APT Catia output containing other classes
of 3 or 5 axis tool motion statements. The most common of these statements are:
GOTO / x, y, z
GOTO / x, y, z, i, j, k
Sample:
GOTO / 0.00000, 89.19372, 12.00000

GOTO / 0.00000, 89.19372, 12.00000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
Syntax
A Fixed Axis Catia NURBS for Siemens Output looks like this:
BEGIN NURBS_SIEMENS (D=3,F=8000.000,AXIS= 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000)

N0, XT= 0.00000, YT= 89.19372, ZT= 12.00000,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N1, XT= -35.25923, YT= 82.30182, ZT= 12.00000,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N2, XT= -70.67279, YT= 76.14709, ZT= 12.00000,DK=107.790,W=1.000;
N3, XT= -105.90481, YT= 69.14878, ZT= 12.00000,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
END NURBS
A Variable Axis Catia NURBS for Siemens Output looks like this:
BEGIN NURBS_SIEMENS (D=3,F=8000.000,AXIS=VAR,LENGTH= 50.000)

N0, XT= -75.76597, YT= 71.65094, ZT= -21.94567, XH= -72.178223, YH=$
62.527376, ZH= 27.083796,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N1, XT= -78.91003, YT= 71.01919, ZT= -21.77676, XH= -79.690819, YH=$
61.032142, ZH= 27.416003,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N2, XT= -82.06101, YT= 70.37700, ZT= -21.56199, XH= -87.244248, YH=$
59.640659, ZH= 27.190920,DK=22.998,W=1.000;
N3, XT= -85.40313, YT= 69.68892, ZT= -21.29975, XH= -94.767915, YH=$
58.350206, ZH= 26.488684,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
END NURBS
The number of digits used for each float value is not imposed. The $ character signifies that the instruction
continues on the next line.
Mathematical and Geometrical Interpretation
D=Integer value:
degree on the NURBS, means order-1, in most cases degree is 3 and order is 4.
F=Float value:
feedrate in mm per minute (Feedrate)
LENGTH=Float value:
distance (constant in the NURBS) between MT and MH control points.
N=Integer value:
rank of the control point in the NURBS, starts at 0 for the initial point.
XT, YT, ZT=Float values:
coordinates of the control point of the tool tip (MT).
XH, YH, ZH=Float values:
coordinate of the control point of a point on the tool axis (MH).
DK=Float value:
increment of nodal parameter related to this node (can be null, always >= 0.00).
W= Float value:
weight of the control point (in most cases it is set to 1.00 for all NURBS, which is Polynomial and not Rational
in this case ).
We note (DKi), (Wi), (XTi,YTi,ZTi), (XHi,YHi,ZHi) for all the values related to the control point i, for i in [0,NB].
With all this data it is possible to define a NURBS function from [0.00,Kmax] to R6.
Kmax = ΣDKi , for i=0 to NB.
The nodal vector (U(I)) of the NURBS contains NB+5 Values:

U(0)=0.00
U(1)=0.00
And for I=2 to NB+3
U(I)=U(I-1)+DK(I-2) (that is, U(2)=U(1)+DK(0)=0.00)
then
U(NB+4) = U(NB+3) = Kmax
U(NB+5) = U(NB+4)
In Fixed Axis mode, for each value of w in [0,Kmax] this function give 3 values: X(w), Y(w), Z(w), which are
the control point coordinates of the tool tip at the w parameter.
In Variable Axis mode, for each value of w in [0,Kmax] this function give 6 values: XT(w), YT(w), ZT(w),
XH(w), YH(w), ZH(w) which are the control point coordinates of the points MT=(XT,YT,ZT) and
MH=(XH,YH,ZH).
MT is the position of the tool tip at the w parameter.

MH is the position, at the w parameter, of the point on the tool axis located a distance LENGTH from MT. This
length defines the active cutting part of the tool. This means that all transformations of the tool path must
respect the machining tolerance (chordal deviation) for all points between MT and MH.
The first Tool position (XYZIJK) of the NURBS is:
X=XT0
Y=YT0
Z=ZT0
I=(XH0-XT0)/LENGTH
J=(YH0-YT0)/LENGTH
K=(ZH0-ZT0)/LENGTH.
Post Processing Considerations for Siemens 840D Format

Variable Axis Syntax
The format used by 840D is the following:
BEGIN NURBS_SIEMENS(D=3,F=xxxx,AXIS=VAR,LENGTH=100.00);
N0,XT=xt0,YT=yt0,ZT=zt0,XH=xh0,YH=yh0,ZH=zh0,DK=dk0,W=w0;
../..
Nn,XT=xtn,YT=ytn,ZT=ztn,XH=xhn,YH=yhn,ZH=zhn,DK=dkn,W=wn;
END NURBS;
If previous Catia block is a NURBS block:

SD=3 F xxxx ; NURBS degree and feedrate
Otherwise:
ORIVECT
G1 X Y Z A3=I B3=J C3=K ; first point of the NURBS, Control Point 0
Then:
ORICURVE
G642 ; start of continuous motion statement
BSPLINE SD=3 F xxxx ; NURBS declaration, degree and feedrate
X Y Z XH YH ZH PW=W PL=DK ; Control Point 1
X Y Z XH YH ZH PW=W PL=DK ; Control Point 2
../..
X Y Z XH YH ZH PW=W PL=DK ; Last Control Point of the NURBS.
Translation from Catia Format
All parameters are the same as the one on the corresponding Catia line (i), except for the first one. If needed it
is translated by a G1 statement.
Siemens Xi= Catia XTI

Siemens Yi= Catia YTI
Siemens Zi= Catia ZTI
Siemens XHi= Catia XHi
Siemens YHi= Catia YHi
Siemens ZHi= Catia ZHi
Siemens PWi= Catia Wi
Siemens PLi= Catia DKi
APT Sample for Variable Axis NURBS
$$ -----------------------------------------------------------------
$$ Generated on Wednesday, September 25, 2002 05:24:47 PM
$$ -----------------------------------------------------------------
$$ Flank Mixed Combin
$$ Part Operation.1
$$*CATIA0
$$ Flank Mixed Combin
$$ 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000
PARTNO Part Operation.1
FROM / 0.00000, 0.00000, 100.00000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Tool Change.10
MULTAX
CUTTER/ 8.000000, 4.000000, 0.000000, 4.000000, 0.000000,$
0.000000, 50.000000
TOOLNO/2,MILL, 8.000000, 4.000000,, 100.000000,$
60.000000,, 50.000000,4, 8000.000000,$
MMPM,15000.000000,RPM,CLW,ON,$
AUTO, 0.000000,NOTE
TPRINT/balld8,,balld8
LOADTL/2,2,2
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Multi-Axis Flank Contouring.2
$$ Start generation of : Multi-Axis Flank Contouring.2
SPINDL/15000.0000,RPM,CLW
N0, XT= 19.75656, YT= 81.42861, ZT= 20.00000, XH= 19.757763, YH=$
71.623025, ZH= 69.029078,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N1, XT= 19.75625, YT= 83.94658, ZT= 7.40984, XH= 19.757454, YH=$
74.140998, ZH= 56.438918,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N2, XT= 19.75594, YT= 86.46456, ZT= -5.18032, XH= 19.757144, YH=$
76.658971, ZH= 43.848757,DK=38.518,W=1.000;
N3, XT= 19.75563, YT= 88.98253, ZT= -17.77048, XH= 19.756835, YH=$
79.176944, ZH= 31.258597,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
END NURBS
N0, XT= 19.75563, YT= 88.98253, ZT= -17.77048, XH= 19.756835, YH=$
79.176944, ZH= 31.258597,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N1, XT= 19.38827, YT= 89.96343, ZT= -23.02431, XH= 19.389475, YH=$
80.157844, ZH= 26.004770,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N2, XT= 14.20175, YT= 89.85474, ZT= -27.41283, XH= 14.202952, YH=$
80.049153, ZH= 21.616250,DK=15.662,W=1.000;
N3, XT= 9.00010, YT= 88.77303, ZT= -26.95061, XH= 9.001309, YH=$
78.967440, ZH= 22.078468,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
END NURBS
../..

N0, XT= 19.18055, YT= -42.44969, ZT= -6.28780, XH= 19.180191, YH=$
-37.474471, ZH= 43.464058,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N1, XT= 19.18049, YT= -41.57342, ZT= 2.47480, XH= 19.180128, YH=$
-36.598205, ZH= 52.226657,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N2, XT= 19.18042, YT= -40.69716, ZT= 11.23740, XH= 19.180065, YH=$
-35.721939, ZH= 60.989257,DK=26.419,W=1.000;
N3, XT= 19.18036, YT= -39.82089, ZT= 20.00000, XH= 19.180002, YH=$
-34.845674, ZH= 69.751856,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
END NURBS
$$ End of generation of : Multi-Axis Flank Contouring.2
FINI
NC Code Sample for Variable Axis NURBS
N10 ;PROGRAMME : Part Operation.1

N20 ;PROGRAMMEUR: AAU
N30 ;DATE : AAU

G642
ffwon
N40 TRAORI
G57
M8
N50 ORIVECT
N60 G0 Z100.0
N70 G0 X0.0 Y0.0
N80 T2 M06
N90 G1 X19.75656 Y81.42861 Z20.0 A3=0.00002 B3=-0.19611 C3=0.98058
N100 ORICURVE
N110 G642
N120 BSPLINE SD=3 F8000.000
N130 X19.75625 Y83.94658 Z7.40984 XH=19.75745 YH=74.141 ZH=56.43892 PL=0.0
N140 X19.75594 Y86.46456 Z-5.18032 XH=19.75714 YH=76.65897 ZH=43.84876 PL=38.518
N150 X19.75563 Y88.98253 Z-17.77048 XH=19.75683 YH=79.17694 ZH=31.2586 PL=0.0
N160 X19.38827 Y89.96343 Z-23.02431 XH=19.38948 YH=80.15784 ZH=26.00477 PL=0.0
N170 X14.20175 Y89.85474 Z-27.41283 XH=14.20295 YH=80.04915 ZH=21.61625 PL=15.662
N180 X9.0001 Y88.77303 Z-26.95061 XH=9.00131 YH=78.96744 ZH=22.07847 PL=0.0
../..
N470 X19.19914 Y-42.982 Z-11.59413 XH=19.19878 YH=-38.00679 ZH=38.15773 PL=15.662

N480 X19.18055 Y-42.44969 Z-6.2878 XH=19.18019 YH=-37.47447 ZH=43.46406 PL=0.0
N490 X19.18049 Y-41.57342 Z2.4748 XH=19.18013 YH=-36.59821 ZH=52.22666 PL=0.0
N500 X19.18042 Y-40.69716 Z11.2374 XH=19.18007 YH=-35.72194 ZH=60.98926 PL=26.419
N510 X19.18036 Y-39.82089 Z20.0 XH=19.18 YH=-34.84567 ZH=69.75186 PL=0.0
N520 ORIVECT
N530 TRAFOOF
N540 G57
N550 M5 M9
N560 M30
Fixed Axis Syntax
The format used by 840D is the following: Translation Convention.
BEGIN NURBS_SIEMENS(D=3,F=xxxx,AXIS=0.00,0.00,1.00);
N0,X=x0,Y=y0,Z=z0,DK=dk0,W=w0;
../..
Nn,X=xn,Y=yn,Z=zn,DK=dkn,W=wn;
END NURBS;
If previous Catia block is a NURBS Block:

SD=3 F xxxx ; NURBS degree and feedrate
Otherwise:
G1 X Y Z ; first point of the NURBS, Control Point 0
Then:
G64 ; start of continuous motion statement
BSPLINE SD=3 F xxxx ; NURBS declaration, degree and feedrate
X Y Z PW=W PL=DK ; Control Point 1
X Y Z PW=W PL=DK ; Control Point 2
../..
X Y Z PW=W PL=DK ; Last Control Point of the NURBS
Translation from Catia Format
All parameters are the same as the one on the corresponding Catia line (i), except for the first one. If needed it
is translated by a G1 statement.
Siemens Xi= Catia Xi

Siemens Yi= Catia Yi
Siemens Zi= Catia Zi
Siemens PWi= Catia Wi
Siemens PLi= Catia DKi
APT Sample for Fixed Axis NURBS
$$ -----------------------------------------------------------------
$$ Generated on Wednesday, September 25, 2002 05:24:29 PM
$$ -----------------------------------------------------------------
$$ Part Operation.1
$$*CATIA0
$$ 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$$ 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000
PARTNO Part Operation.1
FROM / 0.00000, 0.00000, 100.00000
MULTAX
CUTTER/ 8.000000, 4.000000, 0.000000, 4.000000, 0.000000,$
0.000000, 50.000000
TOOLNO/2,MILL, 8.000000, 4.000000,, 100.000000,$
60.000000,, 50.000000,4, 8000.000000,$
MMPM,15000.000000,RPM,CLW,ON,$
AUTO, 0.000000,NOTE
TPRINT/balld8,,balld8
LOADTL/2,2,2
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Isoparametric Machining.2
$$ Start generation of : Isoparametric Machining.2
SPINDL/15000.0000,RPM,CLW
GOTO / 9.95037, -48.78022, 20.00000
GOTO / 9.95037, -48.78022, 22.00000
N0, XT= 9.95037, YT= -48.78022, ZT= 22.00000,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N1, XT= 10.01206, YT= -48.78639, ZT= 16.72430,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N2, XT= 5.43447, YT= -48.32863, ZT= 11.75306,DK=15.662,W=1.000;
N3, XT= 0.00000, YT= -47.78518, ZT= 12.00000,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
END NURBS
../..

N0, XT= 0.00000, YT= -44.60573, ZT= 12.00000,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N1, XT= 5.25284, YT= -45.09640, ZT= 11.93801,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
N2, XT= 10.20252, YT= -45.55876, ZT= 16.53842,DK=15.662,W=1.000;
N3, XT= 9.95665, YT= -45.53580, ZT= 22.00000,DK=0.000,W=1.000;
END NURBS
GOTO / 9.95665, -45.53580, 22.00000
GOTO / 9.95665, -45.53580, 20.00000
$$ End of generation of : Isoparametric Machining.2
FINI
NC Code Sample for Fixed Axis NURBS
N10 ;PROGRAMME : Part Operation.1

N20 ;PROGRAMMEUR: AAU
N30 ;DATE : AAU
G642
ffwon
N40 TRAORI
G57
M8
N50 ORIVECT
N60 G0 Z100.0
N70 G0 X0.0 Y0.0
N80 T2 M06
N90 G1 X9.95037 Y-48.78022 Z20
N100 G1 X9.95037 Y-48.78022 Z22.0
N110 G64
N120 BSPLINE SD=3 F8000.000
N130 X10.01206 Y-48.78639 Z16.7243 PL=0.0
N140 X5.43447 Y-48.32863 Z11.75306 PL=15.662
N150 X0.0 Y-47.78518 Z12.0 PL=0.0
../..
N2700 X0.0 Y-44.60573 Z12.0 PL=0.0

N2710 X5.25284 Y-45.0964 Z11.93801 PL=0.0
N2720 X10.20252 Y-45.55876 Z16.53842 PL=15.662
N2730 X9.95665 Y-45.5358 Z22.0 PL=0.0
N2740 ORIVECT
N2750 G1 X9.95665 Y-45.5358 Z22
N2760 Z20
N2770 TRAFOOF
N2780 G57
N2790 M5 M9
N2800 M30
Scope and Limitations

The tool paths of the following types of machining operation can be generated in NURBS format:
Profile Contouring
Sweeping
Contour Driven
Zlevel
Pencil Milling
Face iso-parametric
Multi-Axis Sweeping
Multi-Axis Contour Driven
Multi-Axis Curve Machining
Multi-Axis Flank Contouring.
Note that the 3D Nurbs Interpolation check box in the Machine Editor dialog box should be set to specify the
ability to generate NURBS data in an APT output file.
The NURBS output of an operation is not compatible with any compensation output format (Profile or PQR).
The NURBS output is not compatible with Center output, NURBS is always a Tip position.
The NURBS ouput is only possible in APT (not CLFile).
It is not possible to import an APT containing NURBS statements using the APT Import command.

The APT source generated by the V5 Manufacturing applications is regularly enhanced to:
● support new functionalities

● obtain the same level of APT source generated by the Version 4 Manufacturing applications in order to
ensure upward Post-Processor compatibility.
Following information applies to customers upgrading from previous V5 levels. As the current level includes all
the following changes through service packs of previous releases, this information should be read carefully in
order to identify modifications compared to their current CATIA level.
Special Notice Regarding Circular Interpolation

General Modifications Introduced with V5R7
General Modifications Introduced with V5R7 SP1
General Modifications Introduced with V5R13 GA and V5R12 SP2
Axial Operation Modifications Introduced with V5R7
Axial Operation Modifications Introduced with V5R7 SP1
Lathe Machining Modifications Introduced with V5R7 SP5
Special Notice Regarding Circular Interpolation

In Part Operation (at machine tool definition stage), Minimum and Maximum Interpolation radius values are
defined for the generation of circular interpolation in APT output. These two parameters are used at two
different times: at toolpath computation and at the generation of output file.
The user should check and possibly modify these values before creating Machining operations. Otherwise
circular interpolation may not appear in the APT source.
Please note that if value is modified after machining operation creation and generation of toolpath, then the
toolpaths should be recomputed (using Right button on Program: Compute Tool Path in Force computation
mode) before generation of the output file.
General Modifications
1. The displacement to the tool change point is generated before the CUTTER.
Note that the TLAXIS is also moved up.
2. Duplicate points (that is, consecutive points that have the same coordinates) must not be eliminated in the
case of cycles for axial operations. In particular, it is necessary to keep these points when the approach
clearance is equal to zero.
Previous Situation
RAPID
GOTO/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.00000
CYCLE/DRILL, 20.000000, 0.000000, 1000.000000,MMPM
CYCLE/OFF
Current Situation
RAPID
GOTO/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.00000
CYCLE/DRILL, 20.000000, 0.000000, 1000.000000,MMPM
GOTO/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.00000
CYCLE/OFF
3. Version 4 Compatibility: TLAXIS before CATIA0.

The TLAXIS is given in the old reference axis system before CATIA0 generation.
Previous Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Machining Axis face at 0 degrees
$$*CATIA0
$$
$$ -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 25.00000
$$ 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 200.00000
$$ 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 243.50000
TLAXIS/ 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
RAPID
Current Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Machining Axis face at 0 degrees
TLAXIS/ 0.000000, 1.000000, 0.000000
$$*CATIA0
$$
$$ -1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 25.00000
$$ 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 200.00000
$$ 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 243.50000
RAPID
4. Addition of CENIT Post-processor for Lathe Machining: CENIT_LATHE.pptable.
5. New version of the CENIT Post-processor by DLL.

1. Cutter format is now exactly the same as in V4 (parameters are written with format f10.6 and positions of
parameters and commas are consequently modified on the 2 lines of the statement).
2. The seventh parameter of the CUTTER statement is now valuated with the cutting length and not like before
with the total length of the tool. Please note that if the cutting length is not valuated for a given tool, the
seventh parameter of the CUTTER statement will be valuated with the total length.
3. GOTO format is modified from GOTO/ to GOTO / as in V4 (2 blank characters are added between the word
GOTO and the slash).
Previous Situation
TLAXIS/ 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
RAPID
GOTO/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 100.00000
CUTTER/ 40.000000, 20.000000, 0.000000, 20.000000, 0.000000$
, 0.000000, 100.000000
TOOLNO/1, 40.000000
LOADTL/1
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Profile Contouring
Current Situation
TLAXIS/ 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
RAPID
GOTO / 0.00000, 0.00000, 100.00000
CUTTER/ 40.000000, 20.000000, 0.000000, 20.000000, 0.000000,$
0.000000,100.000000
TOOLNO/1, 40.000000
LOADTL/1
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Profile Contouring
4. INTOL and OUTTOL statements are written before the first circular statement definition, and before other
circular statements each time the discretization tolerance is modified. The discretization tolerance used to
generate the INTOL statement is read on the machining operation. The value associated to the OUTTOL
statement is always equal to zero.
5. AUTOPS and PSIS statements become modal, that is, the statements are generated only if the plane
containing the circle is modified.
6. The point coordinates that are used to define the PSIS statement are the those of the center of the circle,
and not those of the end point of the circle, as before.
7. The Circle and Cylndr statements are written exactly as in V4 (see the example below).
INTOL / 0.02500
OUTTOL/ 0.00000
PSIS/(PLANE/(POINT/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.68000),PERPTO,$
(VECTOR/ 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000))
INDIRV/ 0.47943, 0.87758, 0.00000
TLON,GOFWD/(CYLNDR/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.68000,$
0.00000, 0.00000, 1.00000, 3.79375),ON,$
(PLANE/PERPTO,$
(PLANE/(POINT/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.68000),PERPTO,$
(VECTOR/ 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000)),$
(POINT/ 0.00000, 0.00000, 0.68000),$
(POINT/ -3.32933, 1.81882, 0.68000))
8. New version of the CENIT Post-Processor.
1. TLAXIS instruction
Previous Situation
The TLAXIS statement is generated for each machine rotation (between ROTABL and $$*CATIA0
statements).
Coordinates of TLAXIS instruction are defined in the current axis system ($$*CATIA0).
Current Situation
Coordinates of TLAXIS instruction are defined in the first axis system definition ($$*CATIA0) of the
machining program. (V4 compliant)
Coordinates of rotation matrix and machining axis matrix are defined in absolute axis system. (V4
compliant)
The TLAXIS statement is generated only if the tool axis orientation is modified after a head rotation.
This means that if the program only includes ROTABL instructions, there is only one TLAXIS
statement at the beginning of the APT source file. (V4 compliant)
The TLAXIS are generated if no table rotation statement is defined between machining operations
with different tool axis.
2. Clearance motion (at the beginning of machining operation)

If a clearance macro is defined on the machining operation, the clearance macro motion is generated before
the Approach macro motions.
Previous Situation
When no tool motion is generated by the clearance macro (example: distance motion set to 0.0),
Feedrate statement (of the Clearance macro) is not generated.
Current Situation
The value of Clearance feedrate (it can be set to RAPID) defined on the macro is generated at the
beginning of the operation.
3. Minimum and Maximum interpolation radius defined on Machine.
Previous Situation
The minimum and maximum interpolation radius defined on the Machine are not taken into account
for tool path computation of macro motions.
Current Situation
The minimum and maximum interpolation radius defined on the Machine are used for all tool
motions at the output file generation.
When circular interpolation is needed (depends on the machine defined on the Part Operation and/or options
set for generation of APT source) CIRCLE or CYLNDR instruction is generated according to the following rule:
● generation of CIRCLE instruction when circular motion axis is parallel to the Z axis of the machining axis
system
● generation of CYLNDR instruction in the other case.
One Rule is added for the generation of circular interpolation in order to match V4 behavior.
Previous Situation
Circular interpolation is possible even if the circular motion axis is not parallel to the tool axis and
the above mentioned rule is applied.
Current Situation
Circular interpolation is generated only when circular motion axis is parallel to the tool axis. Used
syntax (CIRCLE or CYLNDR) will follow the above mentioned rule. If circular motion axis is not
parallel to the tool axis, no circular interpolation is performed, only GOTO statements will be
generated.
1. The management of point coordinates after machine rotations has been improved for APT and NC code
generation and tool path replay. For APT files, the CATIA0 matrices following ROTABL statements also benefit
from these improvements.
2. Duplicated points are now eliminated according to the final coordinates of the point: any transformations are
taken into account.
General Modifications Introduced with V5R13 GA and V5R12 SP2
Change made in computation of Machine Home Position parameters.
Previous Situation
%MFG_X_HOME_POS, %MFG_Y_HOME_POS and %MFG_Z_HOME_POS parameters were computed in absolute
axis system.
Current Situation
%MFG_X_HOME_POS, %MFG_Y_HOME_POS and %MFG_Z_HOME_POS parameters are computed in current
axis system (defined by last CATIA0 matrix)
Axial Operation Modifications

Axial Operation Modifications Introduced with V5R7
1. On BoringAndChamfering, Chamfering2Sides, CounterSinking and SpotDrilling operations, computation

errors on MFG_DETAIL_DEPTH and MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH parameters have been corrected.
2. Previously the MFG_PLUNGE_TIP and MFG_PLUNGE_VAL parameters were output as negative are now
output as positive.
3. Previously the MFG_DWELL_TIME and MFG_DELAY_VALUE parameters were output in integer format (INT)
are now output in real format (REAL).
4. The rules for cycle interruptions are modified.
Previous Situation
Operation broken down into several CYCLE instructions if
(Entry distance at point n or Exit distance at point n-1) > Approach Clearance
Current Situation
Operation broken down into several CYCLE instructions if
(Entry distance at point n or Exit distance at point n-1) > Approach Clearance AND > JumpDistance
5. New Parameter for CYCLE syntaxes: MFG_JUMP_DIST (Jump Distance) accessible for all axial operations.
6. Tool compensation parameters are modified for Version 4 compatibility.
Previous Situation
MFG_TL_COMP: Length number of first corrector
MFG_TL_COMP_2: Length number of second corrector
MFG_TOOL_COMP: Distance between position of first corrector and tool tip
MFG_TOOL_COMP_2: Distance between position of second corrector and tool tip.
Current Situation
MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST: Distance between current corrector position and tool tip
MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST_1: Distance between first corrector position and tool tip
MFG_TOOL_COMP_DIST_2: Distance between second corrector position and tool tip.
7. NC compensation instructions are output in the APT file for BoringAndChamfering and Chamfering2Sides
operations when the corrector length number is modified during the operation.
8. Cycle syntax can now be output for BackBoring and T-Slotting operations.
9. Linking between pattern points is now always done by horizontal paths.
10. Different Cycle syntaxes are generated when two consecutive positions do not have the same depth.

1. Machining operations using a Boring Bar tool respect the defined hole depth.
2. Tool Cutting Length is no longer used for chamfering operations (Spot Drilling, Countersinking,
Boring&Chamfering, Chamfering2Sides) when Depth mode is set to 'by Diameter'. The defined diameter is now
taken into account for tool path computation.
3. Correct valuation of MFG_EFFCT_DEPTH for Drilling Break Chips and Drilling Deephole operations. Note for
CAA2 usage: GetEffectDepthCut method of CATIMfgAxialOperation interface returns the correct valuation.
4. New Parameters for CYCLE syntaxes:

MFG_DIAMETER (Diameter of machined hole) accessible for all axial operations.
MFG_THREAD_DIAMETER (thread diameter of machined hole) accessible for Tapping, Reverse Threading,
Thread without Tap Head, and Thread Milling operations.
MFG_BCK_BORE_VAL (Back Bore Depth) for Back Boring operation.
On Back Boring operation, tool path computation errors and invalid valuation on MFG_TOTAL_DEPTH
parameter have been corrected.
1. New Parameters for CYCLE syntaxes on Circular Milling operation

MFG_CIRCULAR_MODE: Circular mode (1: Standard / 2: Helical)
MFG_HELIX_MODE: Helix mode (1:by Pitch / 2: by Angle)
MFG_PITCH: Helix Pitch
MFG_HELIX_ANGLE: Helix angle
2. New Parameter for CYCLE syntaxes on Thread Milling operation

MFG_PITCH_WAY_OF_ROT: (1: Left hand / 2 Right hand). This new parameter replaces the MFG_PITCH_SENS
parameter.
3. New valuation of MFG_DIAMETER and MFG_THREAD_DIAMETER for Circular Milling and Thread Milling
operations. Offset on contour is now taken into account for the valuation of MFG_DIAMETER and
MFG_THREAD_DIAMETER parameters.
Tool Compensation distance (between P1 and current tool compensation point) is taken into account for X, Y, Z
coordinates of CYCLE location points (V4 compliant).
Lathe Machining Modifications

The lathe context of Drilling and Point to Point operations is now fully managed. The lathe context is
determined if the following conditions are satisfied:
● A lathe machine is defined on the Part Operation.
● Operation machines along the spindle axis of the lathe machine.
● Operation uses a fixed tool assembly.
As a result, some modifications have been done to integrate these cases.
1. SPINDL/OFF statement is no longer automatically output after a lathe operation.
Previous Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Threading.1
$$ Start generation of : Threading.1
CYCLE/THREAD, 3.175000
CYCLE/OFF
$$ End of generation of : Threading.1
SPINDL/OFF
$$ ------ SPINDLE OFF END OF LATHE ------
Current Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Threading.1
$$ Start generation of : Threading.1
CYCLE/THREAD, 3.175000
CYCLE/OFF
$$ End of generation of : Threading.1
2. A Lathe Tool Change is now automatically created before a lathe context operation instead of a Mill Tool
Change.
Note: For programs created before V5R7 SP5, you must delete the previous Mill Tool Change to allow the
automatic creation of a new Lathe one.
Previous Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : MILL Tool Change
$$ Start generation of : MILL Tool Change
RAPID
GOTO / 200.00000, 0.00000, 300.00000
CUTTER/ 25.400000, 0.000000, 12.700000, 7.332348, 30.000000,$
0.000000,228.600000
TOOLNO/4, 25.400000
TPRINT/T5 drill 1.0dia
LOADTL/4
$$ End of generation of : MILL Tool Change
Current Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : LATHE Tool Change
$$ Start generation of : LATHE Tool Change
RAPID
GOTO / 200.00000, 0.00000, 300.00000
CUTTER/ 25.400000
TOOLNO/4,TURN
$$ End of generation of : LATHE Tool Change
3. For Drilling and Point to Point used in lathe context, the SPINDL statement output is the value of the
NC_SPINDLE_LATHE NC command.
Previous Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Drilling Deep Hole along the Spindle axis
$$ Start generation of : Drilling Deep Hole along the Spindle axis
TLAXIS/ 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
SPINDL/ 70.0000,RPM,CLW
RAPID
GOTO / 0.00000, 0.00000, 196.98060
CYCLE/DEEPHL, 199.947948, 5.000000
GOTO / 0.00000, 0.00000, 191.98060
CYCLE/OFF
$$ End of generation of : Drilling Deep Hole along the Spindle axis
Current Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Drilling Deep Hole along the Spindle axis
$$ Start generation of : Drilling Deep Hole along the Spindle axis
TLAXIS/ 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
SPINDL/ 70.0000,RPM
RAPID
GOTO / 0.00000, 0.00000, 196.98060
CYCLE/DEEPHL, 199.947948, 5.000000
GOTO / 0.00000, 0.00000, 191.98060
CYCLE/OFF
$$ End of generation of : Drilling Deep Hole along the Spindle axis
4. Minimum and Maximum interpolation radius defined on Machine
Previous Situation
The minimum and maximum interpolation radius defined on the Machine, are not taken into account
for tool path computation of macro motions.
Current Situation
The minimum and maximum interpolation radius defined on the Machine, are used for all tool
motions at the output file generation.
Lathe Modifications Introduced with V5R8 SP2
When circular interpolation is needed (depends on the machine defined on the Part Operation and/or options
set for generation of APT source) CIRCLE or CYLNDR instruction is generated according to the following rule:
generation of CIRCLE instruction when circular motion axis is parallel to the Z axis of the machining
axis system
generation of CYLNDR instruction in the other case.
One Rule is added for the generation of circular interpolation in order to match V4 behavior.
Previous Situation
Circular interpolation is possible even if the circular motion axis is not parallel to the tool axis and
the above mentioned rule is applied.
Current Situation
Circular interpolation is generated only when circular motion axis is parallel to the tool axis. Used
syntax (CIRCLE or CYLNDR) will follow the above mentioned rule. If circular motion axis is not
parallel to the tool axis, no circular interpolation is performed, only GOTO statements will be
generated.
Lathe Modifications Introduced with V5R8 SP5
1. When circular interpolation is needed, the following behavior has been modified for lathe operations to
ensure compatibility with V4 behavior:
Previous Situation
2D circular interpolation is requested : No CIRCLE orders are generated.
3D circular interpolation is requested : CYLNDR orders are generated if the machining working plane
is ZX. Otherwise, GOTO statements will be generated.
Current Situation
2D circular interpolation is requested : CIRCLE orders are generated whatever machining working
plane (ZX, XY, YZ).
3D circular interpolation is requested : CIRCLE orders are generated if the machining working plane
is XY. Otherwise, CYLNDR orders are generated .
Note: If machining operation is already computed, the computation must be forced to initialize the
tool path.
2. TLAXIS order is no more output for lathe tool change
Previous Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Lathe Tool Change.1
$$ Start generation of : Lathe Tool Change.1
TLAXIS/ 1.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000
RAPID
GOTO / 254.00000, 0.00000, 508.00000 CUTTER/ 0.400000 TOOLNO/0,TURN
$$ End of generation of : Lathe Tool Change.1
Current Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Lathe Tool Change.1
$$ Start generation of : Lathe Tool Change.1
RAPID
GOTO / 254.00000, 0.00000, 508.00000
CUTTER/ 0.400000
TOOLNO/0,TURN
$$ End of generation of : Lathe Tool Change.1
3. TLAXIS order is no more output for lathe operations
Previous Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Roughing.1
$$ Start generation of : Roughing.1
TLAXIS/ 1.000000, 0.000000, 0.000000

SPINDL/ 70.0000,RPM
RAPID
GOTO / 159.86681, 0.00000, 234.57181
Current Situation
PPRINT OPERATION NAME : Roughing.1
$$ Start generation of : Roughing.1
SPINDL/ 70.0000,RPM
RAPID
GOTO / 159.86681, 0.00000, 234.57181
CUTTER statement has been modified to output the diameter of the insert nose according to APT definition.
The purpose of the APT Import is to store a tool path created from parameters included in the imported APT file.
Listed below are the syntaxes interpreted by APT Import for enriching the stored tool path. Syntaxes that do not include recognized parameters are
stored as is in the tool path and are generated as is in the APT file (for example, this is the case for PP words and comments).
Units Definition
UNITS / MinorWord
Feeds and Speeds
FEDRAT/ Value Value = feed value
FEDRAT/ Value , Unit Unit = minor word among IPM, MMPM, PERMIN, IPR, MMPR, PERREV
FEDRAT/ Unit , Value

RAPID Rapid feedrate
SPINDL/ Value Value = spindle speed
SPINDL/ MinorWord Unit = minor word among SFM, RPM, SMM
SPINDL/ Value , Unit Way = minor word among CLW, CCLW
SPINDL/ Value , Unit , Way
SPINDL/ Value , Way
SPINDL/ Value , Way , Unit
SPINDL/ Unit , Value
SPINDL/ Unit , Value , Way
SPINDL/ Unit , Way , Value
SPINDL/ Way , Value
SPINDL/ Way , Value , Unit
SPINDL/ Way , Unit , Value
Starting Point
FROM / X , Y , Z X,Y,Z = coordinates of the tool position
FROM / X , Y , Z , I , J , K I,J,K = components of the tool axis

GOTO / X , Y , Z X,Y,Z = coordinates of the tool position
GOTO / X , Y , Z , I , J , K I,J,K = components of the tool axis
Linear Tool Motion
GOTO / X , Y , Z X,Y,Z = coordinates of the tool position
GOTO / X , Y , Z , I , J , K I,J,K = components of the tool axis

GODLTA/ X , Y , Z X,Y,Z = coordinates of the tool position
GODLTA/ X , Y , Z , I , J , K I,J,K = components of the tool axis

NC Axis Definition
X,Y,Z = coordinates of the origin of the NC axis
ORIGIN / X , Y , Z (, XX , XY , XZ , ZX , ZY , ZZ) XX, XY, XZ = components of x-axis of the NC axis
ZX, ZY, ZZ = components of z-axis of the NC axis

$$*CATIA0 Machining axis system definition (in absolute axis)
$$identifier
$$ a11 a12 a13 t1
$$ a21 a22 a23 t2
$$ a31 a32 a33 t3
Tool Axis Definition
TLAXIS / I , J , K I,J,K = components of the tool axis expressed in the machining axis system
MULTAX
MULTAX/ON
MULTAX/OFF
Tool Information
CUTTER/ D, r, E, F, a, b, h Milling tool with D = cutter diameter

r = corner radius
E = horizontal distance between radius center point and tool axis
F = vertical distance between radius center point and cutter tip
a = angle of cutter tip
b = flank angle (beta angle)
h = tool height
CUTTER/ D Lathe tool with D = nose radius
Tolerances
INTOL / X (, Y , Z) Tolerance on Part (, Drive, Check). Only X is taken into account

OUTTOL/ X (, Y , Z) Tolerance on Part (, Drive, Check). Only X is taken into account
Circular Interpolation - CIRCLE/
AUTOPS -
INDIRV/ X , Y , Z X,Y,Z = components of the tangent to the circle at the start position
TLON,GOFWD/ (CIRCLE/ Xc, Yc, Zc,$ Xc, Yc, Zc = coordinates of the circle center
Rad),ON,(LINE/ Xc, Yc, Zc, Xe, Ye, Ze)
Rad = circle radius
TLON,GOFWD/ (CIRCLE/ Xc, Yc, Zc,$
Rad),ON,2,INTOF,$
Xe, Ye, Ze = coordinates of the circle end point
(LINE/ Xc, Yc, Zc, Xe, Ye, Ze)
Circular Interpolation - CYLNDR/
x, y, z = tool tip coordinates

PSIS/(PLANE/(POINT/ x, y, z),PERPTO,$
(VECTOR/ u, v, w))
u, v, w = circle axis components
INDIRV/ X , Y , Z X,Y,Z = components of the tangent to the circle at the start position
TLON,GOFWD/ (CYLNDR / Xc, Yc, Zc,$ Xc, Yc, Zc = coordinates of the circle center
Ua, Va, Wa, Rad), ON,$
(PLANE/PERPTO,$
Ua, Va, Wa = circle axis components
(PLANE/(POINT/Xc,Yc,Zc),PERPTO,$
(VECTOR/Ua,Va,Wa)),$
(POINT/Xc,Yc,Zc),$ Rad = circle radius
(POINT/Xe,Ye,Ze))
Xe, Ye, Ze = coordinates of the end point
TLON,GOFWD/ (CYLNDR / Xc, Yc, Zc,$
Ua, Va, Wa, Rad),ON,2,INTOF,$
(PLANE/PERPTO,$
(PLANE/(POINT/Xc,Yc,Zc),PERPTO,$
(VECTOR/Ua,Va,Wa)),$
(POINT/Xc,Yc,Zc),$
(POINT/Xe,Ye,Ze))
Table Rotation
axis = A, B, C, AAXIS, BAXIS, or CAXIS
ROTABL/ axis, value, mode, way way = direction of rotation (CLW or CCLW)
mode = rotation mode (ATANGL or INCR)

Clfile Formats
This section describes:
● the format and record types used to write NC Manufacturing data on Cutter Location files (clfiles)
● radial cutter compensation in clfiles (record type 10000)
● the command that allows the conversion of CATIA clfiles between Unix and Intel platforms.
CATIA Clfile Format

A clfile is a set of cldata type records. This type of record consists of a series of logic words. Record length is
variable, up to a maximum of 245 words.
The general structure of a record is as follows:
W1 = record sequence number (integer)
W2 = record type (integer)
W3 to Wn = data depending on the record type.
The first three words are of the same length (4 bytes) and are integers.
The following words 4 to 245 have the same length (8 bytes) and may represent either an integer, a real number or
a group of six characters.
● If the logic word represents an integer, the four right most bytes are used.
● If the logic word represents a real, all the bytes are used.
● If the logic word represents a six-character group, the left six bytes are used, the two remaining bytes are
blank. If the group consists of less than six characters, it will be completed on the left by blank characters, in
order to obtain the six characters needed.
Record Types Generated by the Application

The following record types are generated by the application:
1000, 2000, 3000, 5000, 6000, 9000, 10000, 14000, 15000 and 28000.
Type 1000 Record
Type 1000 gives the record sequence number.
● W1 = record sequence number (integer)

● W2 = 1000
● W3 = W1.
Type 2000 Record
Type 2000 gives the post-processor instructions.

● W2 = 2000
● W3 = n (integer) code corresponding to a major word.
● W4 and the following words can contain either an integer representing a minor word code, a real
number, or a character string.
Type 3000 Record
For circular interpolation, type 3000 gives the canonical form of the circle followed by the tool tip. A type 3000
record is followed by one or more type 5000 records to describe the tool path.

● W2 = 3000
● W3 = 2 (integer)
● W5 = 4 (integer) indicating a circle
● W6 = 9 (integer) number of following words that are used to defined the circle
● W7 = symbolic name (CIR) of the circle (characters)
● W8 = n (integer) number associated to the circle
● W9 = x coordinate of the circle center (real)
● W10 = y coordinate of the circle center (real)
● W11 = z coordinate of the circle center (real)
● W12 = x component of the circle axis unit vector (real)
● W13 = y component of the circle axis unit vector (real)
● W14 = z component of the circle axis unit vector (real)
● W15 = radius of the circle (real).
Type 5000 Record

● W2 = 5000
● W3 = 3 for FROM, 5 for the other types of movements (for example, GOTO) and 6 for a series of
movements (integer).
● W4 = symbolic name (PT) of the point (characters), if the record contains one single point.
● W5 = n (integer) number associated to the point, if the record contains one single point.
● From W6, point coordinates are given. A record can contain data on 40 or 80 points.
For 40 points, point and axis information is given:
● W6 = x coordinate of first point (real)

● W7 = y coordinate of first point (real)
● W8 = z coordinate of first point (real)
● W9 = i component of tool axis (real)
● W10 = j component of tool axis (real)
● W11 = k component of tool axis (real)
● W12 = x coordinate of second point (real)
● etc.
● W245 = z coordinate of 40th point (real).
For 80 points, only point information is given:
● W6 = x coordinate of first point (real)

● W7 = y coordinate of first point (real)
● W8 = z coordinate of first point (real)
● W9 = x coordinate of second point (real)
● etc.
● W245 = z coordinate of 80th point (real).
Type 6000 Record
Type 6000 contains either data on the tool geometry or the machining tolerances.
Machining tolerances:

● W2 = 6000
● W3 = 4 for ÌNTOL' or 5 for ÒUTTOL'
● W4 = tolerance value (real)
Tool data:

● W2 = 6000
● W3 = 6 for `CUTTER'
● W4 = tool diameter (real)
● W5 = tool corner radius (real)
● W6 = horizontal distance between the tool axis and the center of the corner radius (real)
● W7 = vertical distance between the tool bottom and the center of the corner radius (real)
● W8 = 0 (real)
● W9 = angle between the flank of the tool and the vertical (real)
● W10 = height of the tool (real).
Type 9000 Record
Type 9000 indicates either tool axis orientation in the machining axis system in 3-axis mode or the multi-axis
operating mode in multi-axis mode.
Multi-axis mode (multi-axis operating mode):

● W2 = 9000
● W3 = 2 for `MULTAX'
● W4 = 1 for ÒN'
3-axis mode (tool axis orientation):

● W2 = 9000
● W4 = 1 (integer) indicates that tool axis components follow
● W5 = blank (character)
● W7 = x component of tool axis vector expressed in the machining axis system specified in the 28000
record (real)
● W8 = y component of tool axis vector expressed in the machining axis system specified in the 28000
record (real)
● W9 = z component of tool axis vector expressed in the machining axis system specified in the 28000
record (real)
Type 10000 Record
Used with type 5000 for specifying radial cutter compensation data. Please refer to Radial Compensation in Clfiles.

● W2 = 10000
● W3 = 0 for NORM_DS, 1 for standard NORM_PS, 2 for NORM_PS without 5000 type record, and 3 for NORM_PS
with 5000 type record containing 0, 0, 0, I, J, K for each tool position, where only the I, J, K vector components
are useful (integer).
● W4 = 0 (real).
● W5 = 0 (real).
● From W6, compensation data is given on the W3 value.
NORM_DS in 3-axis mode:
● W6 = P component of the compensation vector (real)

● W7 = Q component of the compensation vector (real)
● W8 = R component of the compensation vector (real)
NORM_DS in 5-axis mode:
● W6 = 0 (real)
● W7 = 0 (real)
● W8 = 0 (real)
● W9 = P component of the compensation vector (real)
● W10 = Q component of the compensation vector (real)
● W11 = R component of the compensation vector (real)
NORM_PS:
● W6 = Xc coordinate of contact point (real)

● W7 = Yc coordinate of contact point (real)
● W8 = Zc coordinate of contact point (real)
● W9 = Xn component of the normal vector (real)
● W10 = Yn component of the normal vector (real)
● W11 = Zn component of the normal vector (real).
Type 14000 Record
Type 14000 indicates the end of the cldata records.

● W2 = 14000.
Type 15000 Record
For circular interpolation, type 15000 specifies the unsegmented circular path followed by the tool tip.

● W2 = 15000
● W5 = 4 (integer) indicating a circle
● W6 = 13 (integer) number of following words that are used to define the circle
● W7 = symbolic name (CIR) of the circle (characters)
● W8 = n (integer) number associated to the circle
● W9 = x coordinate of the circle center (real)
● W10 = y coordinate of the circle center (real)
● W11 = z coordinate of the circle center (real)
● W12 = x component of the circle axis unit vector (real)
● W13 = y component of the circle axis unit vector (real)
● W14 = z component of the circle axis unit vector (real)
● W15 = circle radius (real)
● W16 = oriented angle of the circular arc in degrees (real)
● W17 = x coordinate of the arc end point (real)
● W18 = y coordinate of the arc end point (real)
● W19 = z coordinate of the arc end point (real).
The direction of the path is determined by the circle axis unit vector (W12 to W14). It corresponds to an angular
movement W16 which is positive if the direction is counterclockwise or negative if the direction is clockwise.
Type 28000 Record
Type 28000 specifies the components of the axis system in which the tool path is given. It is specified at the start of
the clfile and at each change of machining axis system.

● W2 = 28000
● W4 to W16 = identifier of the axis system (characters)
● W17 to W28 = components of the axis system (real).
Radial Compensation in Clfiles

Radial compensation data (PLANAR, NORM_DS, and NORM_PS) is managed in clfile records.
The various compensation cases are as follows:

Where:
X, Y, Z: Tip Point
I, J, K: Tool Axis Vector
Xp, Yp, Zp: Profile Point
Xc, Yc, Zc: Contact Point
In, Jn, Kn: Part surface Normal Vector
P, Q, R: Compensation Vector.
Tip Point, Tool Axis Vector and Profile Point data are stored in 5000 type records according to the standard.
A specific type of record, Type number 10000, allows storing Contact Point, Part surface Normal Vector and
Compensation Vector data.
This 10000 record is written in the clfile just before the corresponding 5000 record when required.
When continuation records need to be generated for 10000 and 5000 type records, all 10000 type records are
written before all associated 5000 type records.
A single 1000 type record will precede the couple of records (10000 + 5000). In case of continuation record for this
couple of records, no additional 1000 record is added.
The record length of the 5000 and 10000 type records is 1948 bytes, but the 28 first bytes are used to define the
type of the record. The remaining 1920 bytes allow defining data corresponding to 40 or 80 positions depending on
the number of bytes used for one position.
In the table above:

Cases 1 and 2:
A 5000 type record is enough to store data corresponding to these cases, for up to 80 tool positions.
Cases 3 and 5:
A 5000 type record allows storing tip or profile coordinates, for up to 80 tool positions.
A 10000 type record (sub-type: 0) allows storing P, Q, R data for these tool positions.
Cases 4 and 6:
A 5000 type record allows storing tip or profile coordinates and associates tool axis vector components, for up to 40
tool positions (48 bytes per tool position).
A 10000 type record (sub-type: 0) allows storing P, Q, R data for these tool positions (48 bytes per tool position;
the 3 first doubles are set to 0).
Case 7:
A 10000 type record (sub-type: 1) allows storing Contact coordinates and Normal Vector components for up to 40
A 5000 type record allows storing tip or profile coordinates for these tool positions.
The maximum number of tool positions to be stored in both 5000 and 10000 type records is defined by the 10000
type record.
Case 8:
A 5000 type record allows storing tip or profile coordinates and associates tool axis vector components, for up to 40
A 10000 type record (sub-type: 1) allows storing Contact coordinates and Normal Vector components for these tool
positions (48 bytes per tool position).
Case 9:
Sub-type 2 is similar to sub-type 1 used in previous cases, but the sub-type value allows to define if a 5000 type
record is associated to the 10000 (value 1) or not (value 2).
No data needs to be stored in a 5000 type record.
Case 10:
Sub-type 3 is similar to sub-type 1 used in previous cases, but the sub-type value allows to define if the following
5000 type record associated to the 10000 contains x, y, z, i, j, k information (value 1) or only tool axis vector
components (value 3).
A 5000 type record allows storing tool axis vector components, for these tool positions.
Converting CATIA Clfiles Between Unix and Intel Platforms

There is a Clfile coding difference between Windows and Unix stations. Clfiles generated by CATIA are always stored
in Unix format. Therefore using a Clfile created by CATIA on Windows requires a conversion.
A module called MfgClfileConvExe is delivered that allows the conversion of CATIA clfiles between the Unix and Intel
platforms.
The module recognizes automatically the format of the clfile and converts it into the other format.
To run the conversion, use the following command:
MfgClfileConvExe -i input_clfile [-o output_clfile] [-rep]
where:
-i input_clfile is the clfile to be converted, with access path (required)

-o output_clfile is the resulting clfile, with access path (optional)
If -o is not used, the resulting file will be written in the temp folder and called ConvertedClfile.clfile
-rep, if present, write is done in replace mode.
The module does not generate messages, but a return code is given with the following values:
0: OK
1: No input clfile (required)
2: No PP words table (required)
3: The input clfile does not exist
4: PP words table loading problem
5: Problem opening the input clfile
6: The output clfile exists but cannot be replaced
7: The output clfile exists but there is no access permission
8: The output clfile exists but cannot be deleted
9: Problem opening the output clfile
10: Problem closing the output clfile
11: Problem closing the input clfile
12: Internal error
13: Problem reading a record of the input clfile
14: Conversion direction undetermined
15: Write problem on record length
16: Write problem on record

Machining data managed by customers (especially in aerospace) have a very long life cycle. During the product
life, customers need to modify their products, and consequently associated machining data.
Customers need to be able to retrieve machining data generated with CATIA V4 or other CAM systems, and
modify them using Version 5 Machining products.
The NC Data Import functionality allows retrieving APT source files, clfiles, NC code.
This section describes the NC Data Import capability and its scope for reviewing and reusing data generated
with CATIA V4 or other CAM systems.
NC Data Import
NC data files (generated using V5 or previous versions) may be tagged with markers (OPERATION NUMBER or
OPERATION NAME, prefixed either by PPRINT or $$) that identify the start of each operation.
When an NC data file is imported, each operation identified in this way is defined as an entity in the resulting
V5 program (APT Import, PP Instruction, Table Rotation, INDEX/TRACUT/COPY, and so on).
Created Operation Types
The following types of operation can be created:
● Tool Change
● Machining Axis Change
● Table Rotation
● INDEX, COPY, TRACUT
● APT Import.
Tool Change
A Version 5 Tool Change is created whenever a CUTTER statement with 7 parameters is found in the imported
file. In most cases this tool change uses a V5 End Mill defined from the parameters on the CUTTER statement.
In some cases a V5 Drill is used.
The parameters are tool radius, corner radius, horizontal and vertical distances from the center of the corner to
the tool axis or bottom, bottom and flank angles, and tool height. Default values are applied to other
parameters of the tool.
Note that:
● Tools and tool changes can be modified (edit, modify, replace).

● No unnecessary V5 tool change is created if the user replaces APT Import activities by V5 operations using
the same tool in a sequence of APT Import activities.
If the CUTTER statement has 1 parameter, a turning assembly with insert-holder and inset is created. The
parameter in the CUTTER statement represents the nose radius of the insert.
A Machining Axis Change operation is created whenever the following statements appear in the APT file:
● *CATIA0
● ORIGIN
The matrix associated with the Machining Axis Change operation is generated from the parameters
associated with the *CATIA0 or ORIGIN statement.
Note that the first *CATIA0 met will generate a Machining Axis Change operation only if the associated matrix
parameters are different from the machining axis system referenced by the Part Operation.
Table Rotation
Each time a sequence of ROTABL statements is clearly identified in the file to be imported, a Machine rotation
will be created in the Manufacturing Program to manage it.
The rotation matrix associated with the Machine rotation is generated from the parameters associated with the
*CATIA0 syntax that follows the ROTABL statement.
Table rotation statements (ROTABL)
The supported forms of ROTABL/ axis, value, mode, way statements are all combinations of the following
parameters:
● axis indicating the rotation axis (A, B, C, AAXIS, BAXIS, or CAXIS)

● value representing the angle value of the rotation
● mode indicating if the angle is defined in incremental (INCR) or absolute mode (ABS or ATANGL)
● way giving the direction of rotation (CLW or CCLW).
The case of 2 successive table rotations is supported by the APT Import. These rotations are followed by a
single matrix definition.
Example:
ROTABL/AAXIS,...
ROTABL/CAXIS,...
$$CATIA0
$$
$$ a11 a12 a13 a14
$$ a21 a22 a23 a24
$$ a31 a32 a33 a34
Notes:
● The incremental mode is not supported: a statement including INCR value is considered as a simple PP
word statement and not as a rotation.
● If the axis name (A, B, C, AAXIS, BAXIS, or CXAXIS) or way of rotation (CLW or CCLW) of the rotary
syntax is not defined, then no Machine rotation can be created. These statements will be considered as
simple PP words and not as a rotation.
● A ROTABL statement cannot be imported if the referenced machine is a generic machine (that is, machine
created using the NC Machine Tool Builder product).
INDEX, COPY, TRACUT
Each time an INDEX, COPY or TRACUT statement is found during APT Import, a V5 COPY or TRACUT activity is
created.
The following forms of INDEX, COPY and TRACUT statements are supported.
INDEX
INDEX/n where n is the index number
INDEX/n,NOMORE where n is the index number.
COPY
COPY/n,SAME,p where n is the index number and p is the number of copies
COPY/n,TRANSL,dx,dy,dz,p where n is the index number, dx,dy,dz are the components of the translation
vector and p is the number of copies
COPY/n,XYROT,a,p where n is the index number, a is the angle value and p is the number of copies
COPY/n,YZROT,b,p where n is the index number, b is the angle value and p is the number of copies
COPY/n,ZXROT,c,p where n is the index number, c is the angle value and p is the number of copies
COPY/n,SCALE,s,p where n is the index number, s is the scale factor and p is the number of copies
COPY/n,MODIFY,$
(MATRIX/a11,a12,a13,$
a21,a22,a23,$
a31,a32,a33,$
a41,a42,a43),p
where n is the index number, aij are the components of the matrix and p is the number of copies
TRACUT
TRACUT/(MATRIX/TRANSL,dx,dy,dz) where dx,dy,dz are the components of the translation vector
TRACUT/(MATRIX/XYROT,a) where a is the angle value of the rotation
TRACUT/(MATRIX/YZROT,b) where b is the angle value of the rotation
TRACUT/(MATRIX/ZXROT,c) where c is the angle value of the rotation
TRACUT/(MATRIX/SCALE,s) where s is the scale factor
TRACUT/(MATRIX/a11,a12,a13,$
a21,a22,a23,$
a31,a32,a33,$
a41,a42,a43)
where aij are the components of the matrix.
TRACUT/NOMORE
APT Import
The purpose of the APT Import activity is to store a tool path created from parameters included in the APT file.
The tool path comprises linear and circular displacements and PP words
APT Import entities are automatically locked during creation.

This allows the tool path to be modified by means of the Tool Path Editor.
Creation Conditions for a New APT Import
A first APT Import activity (with a current tool path) is created when the APT file is opened.
A new APT Import activity is created when the following parameters are decoded in the APT file:
● CUTTER (after creation of a Tool Change operation)

● *CATIA0 or ORIGIN (after creation of a Machining Axis Change operation)
● ROTABL (after creation of a Table Rotation operation)
● FROM
● TLAXIS
● OPERATION NUMBER or OPERATION NAME type comment.
Other Interpreted Parameters
The other interpreted parameters for the created tool path are as follows:
● GOTO and GODLTA for linear displacements

● INTOL, OUTTOL, AUTOPS, PSIS, INDIRV and TLON for circular displacements
● MULTAX for 5-axis tool paths
● FEDRAT and RAPID for feedrate descriptions
● SPINDL for spindle speed descriptions
● UNITS for the current unit (mm, inch, and so on)
● TOOLCENTER, CONTACTPOINT and TOOLEND. These are descriptions of the tool's center point, contact
point, and end point (or tip).
Syntaxes that do not include recognized parameters are stored as is in the tool path and are generated as is in
the APT file (for example, this is the case for PP words and comments).
Each time a sequence of PP word statements is clearly identified (with PPRINT OPERATION NUMBER) in the NC
data file, a V5 Post-Processor instruction will be created in the Manufacturing Program. The created PP
instruction can be edited.
Note that PP word statements defined in macros of a machining operation remain embedded in the tool path of
the operation.
PQR Cutter Compensation
You can import an APT file containing PQR cutter compensation data (that is, the drive surface normal).
This PQR data may be of 2 forms shown in the examples below.
Example 1:
CUTCOM/ NORMDS
$$ START CUTCOM NORMDS XT,YT,ZT,I,J,K,P,Q,R
GOTO / 100.00276, -17.79095, 34.00000, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.00000$
0, 0.000000,-1.000000, 0.000000
...
CUTCOM/OFF
$$ END CUTCOM NORMDS XT,YT,ZT,I,J,K,P,Q,R
Example 2:
CUTCOM/ NORMDS
$$ START CUTCOM NORMDS XT,YT,ZT,P,Q,R
GOTO / 100.00276, -17.79095, 34.00000, $ 0, 0.000000,-1.000000, 0.000000
...
CUTCOM/OFF
$$ END CUTCOM NORMDS XT,YT,ZT,P,Q,R
Transition Paths
A Transition Path is a complex activity including linear transitions and machine rotations. Therefore it is
imported as several entities (APT Import activities and machine rotations).
Linear transitions are imported as APT Import activities. When a machine rotation is found, the APT Import
activity is ended, and a machine rotation activity is generated. Then another APT Import activity is created for
the next linear transitions.
The supported forms for ROTABL instructions are the same as described in Table Rotation above.
The names of all APT Import and machine rotation activities created from a V5 Transition Path includes the
Transition Path name.
Automatic Generation of Transition Paths
APT Import activities are compatible with the automatic generation of transition paths capability. This enables
you to complete an imported program like any other V5 program.
NC Code Import
Sample Post Processor parameter files are delivered with the product in the folder
\Startup\Manufacturing\PPPar
which provides NC output for various machine types.
Post Processors are provided by Cenit, Intelligent Manufacturing Software (IMS), and ICAM Technologies
Corporation.
Select the type of Post Processor parameter files to be made available for selection using Tools > Options >
Machining > Output tab. If the output option is set to None, the PP File selection combo will not appear in the
NC File Import dialog box (no PP parameter files will be available for selection).
For information about how to acquire Post Processor parameters files that provide machine specific NC code
output, please contact your IBM representative.
Limitations
The following limitations apply. Please refer to Syntaxes Interpreted by APT Import for more information.
● The APT file is not imported if it contains OUTPUT PROFILE, TOOL FLANK OUTPUT, TOOL CENTER OUTPUT,
or NURBS statements.
● During APT Import, all tool motions are considered as Tip positions. This is due to the fact that in the APT
source file, no compensation data is written. So, it is not possible to:
❍ detect that the position is not the tip position, and

❍ compute the tip point corresponding to the position written in APT source file.
● A ROTHED statement cannot be imported.

Feature Attributes for Tool Queries, Checks and

Formula
This section describes the feature attributes available in machining processes and machining operations for
Tool Queries, Checks and Formula. It deals with the following categories of features:
● Holes
● Machinable Axial Features
● Prismatic Machining Areas.
It also gives some useful examples for Tool Queries, Checks and Formula.
Feature Attributes for Checks, Tool Queries and Formula

The dialog box that appears for Tool Queries, Checks and Formula allows you to access to the list of feature
attributes with their type. It is not always easy to give the correct values to with String or Integer type
attributes.
The example below shows the following check: Machinable Axial Feature is a simple, blind hole.
In this check, Hole type=0 specifies a simple hole and Hole Extension=1 specifies a blind hole.
Here is a list of attributes that may not be directly accessible from the dialog box (String or Integer type
attributes).
Hole Features
Check on Hole feature: double-click Hole in Type list.
Hole type attribute for checks:
Hole.Hole type = "Simple" (simple hole)

Hole.Hole type = "Tapered" (taper hole)
Hole.Hole type = "Counterbored" (counterbore hole)
Hole.Hole type = "Countersink" (countersunk hole)
Hole.Hole type = "Counterdrilled" (counterdrilled hole)
Limit type attribute for checks:
Hole.Limit type = "Blind"

Hole.Limit type <> "Blind"
Hole.Limit type = "Up_To_Last"
Hole.Limit type = "Up_To_Next"
Hole.Limit type = "Up_To_Surface"
Bottom type attribute for checks:
Hole.Bottom type = "Flat"

Hole.Bottom type = "V_Bottom"
Threaded and Tap side attributes for checks:
Hole.Threaded = true
Hole.Threaded = false
Hole.Tap side = "Right_Threaded"
Hole.Tap side = "Left_Threaded"
SemanticDimTabValue attribute for tolerance checks:
Hole.Diameter.SemanticDimTabValue="H7"
Note that you must select the Diameter attribute before entering the SemanticDimTabValue="H7"
string.
ToleranceMax and ToleranceMin attributes for tolerance formula or tool queries (example):
Diameter = Hole.Diameter+(Hole.Diameter.ToleranceMax-Hole.Diameter.ToleranceMin)/2
Note that you must select the Diameter attribute before entering the ToleranceMin or ToleranceMax
string.
Machinable Axial Features
Check on Machinable Axial Feature feature: double-click Machinable Axial Feature in Type list.
Hole type attribute for checks:
Machinable Axial Feature.Hole type = 0 (simple hole)

Machinable Axial Feature.Hole type = 1 (taper hole)
Machinable Axial Feature.Hole type = 2 (counterbore hole)
Machinable Axial Feature.Hole type = 3 (countersunk hole)
Machinable Axial Feature.Hole type = 4 (counterdrilled hole)
Machinable Axial Feature.Hole type = 5 (Unknown)
Hole Extension attribute for checks:
Machinable Axial Feature.Hole Extension = 1 (blind)

Machinable Axial Feature.Hole Extension = 2 (through)
Hole bottom type attribute for checks:
Machinable Axial Feature.Hole bottom type = "Flat Bottom"

Machinable Axial Feature.Hole bottom type = "V Bottom"
Hole bottom angle attribute for checks (examples):

Machinable Axial Feature.Hole bottom angle = 0deg

Machinable Axial Feature.Hole bottom angle = 120deg
Threaded and Thread direction attributes for checks:
Machinable Axial Feature.Threaded = true

Machinable Axial Feature.Threaded = false
Machinable Axial Feature.Thread direction = "0" (Right threaded)
Machinable Axial Feature.Thread direction = "1" (Left threaded)
IsToleranced and ToleranceType attributes for tolerance checks (examples):
Machinable Axial Feature.IsToleranced = true

Machinable Axial Feature.ToleranceType("Diameter") = "H7"
ToleranceMax and ToleranceMin attributes for tolerance formula or tool queries (example):
Machinable Axial Feature.Diameter+(Machinable Axial Feature.Diameter.ToleranceMax-Machinable

Axial Feature.Diameter.ToleranceMin)/2
Note that you must select the Diameter attribute before entering the ToleranceMin or ToleranceMax
string.
Prismatic Machining Areas
Check on Prismatic machining area feature: double-click Prismatic machining area in Type list.
There are three dedicated length attributes for formula, tool queries and checks:
Maximum channel width attribute (examples):
Prismatic machining area.Maximum channel width<=100mm

Prismatic machining area.Maximum channel width>48mm
Minimum channel width attribute (examples):

Prismatic machining area.Minimum channel width<=20mm

Prismatic machining area. Minimum channel width>10mm
Minimum corner radius attribute (examples):
Prismatic machining area.Minimum corner radius<=8mm

Prismatic machining area.Minimum corner radius>6mm
Useful Examples for Tool Queries, Checks and Formula

Tool Queries
Tool queries are used to define criteria for cutting tool selection.
Examples of Tool Queries using geometrical attributes:
Cutter diameter:
Nominal diameter>=Hole.Diameter-0.1mm
Nominal diameter<=Hole.Diameter+0.1mm
Cutting length:
Cutting length>=Hole.Depth*1.2
Cutting length<=Hole.Depth*2
Examples of Tool Queries using technological attributes:
Way of rotation:
Way of rotation=RIGHT_HAND
Cutting material:
Tooth material desc.=COATED_HIGH_SPEED_STEEL
Checks
Checks are used to constrain the validity of a machining process or a machining operation. Some examples are
given below.
Check for type of feature:
Standard hole:
Hole.Diameter.SemanticDimTabValue<>"H7"
Hole.Threaded=false
Hole with fitting:
Hole.Diameter.SemanticDimTabValue="H7"
Hole.Threaded=false
Threaded hole:
Hole.Diameter.SemanticDimTabValue<>"H7"
Hole.Threaded=true
Note that you must select the Diameter attribute before entering the SemanticDimTabValue="H7" or
SemanticDimTabValue<>"H7" string.
Check for size of feature:
Hole diameter:
Hole.Diameter>4mm
Hole.Diameter<=20mm
Hole depth:
Hole.Depth<=Hole.Diameter*3.5
Formula
Formula are used to compute parameters (mainly parameters of a machining operation) with a formula
containing feature attributes.
The example below illustrates some of the possiblilities.

Note that you must select the Diameter attribute before entering the ToleranceMin or ToleranceMax string.
PLM Integration
This section discusses some topics concerning the integration of Machining solutions in Product Lifecycle
Management (PLM).
Simplified User Interface in Manufacturing Hub Context
When working in a Manufacturing hub context, all files and catalogs required as input and output data
is stored in IPD and is not file-based. The user interface is simplified by removing fields requesting the
user to specify input or output file paths.
Document Chooser Integration and Support of DLNames
You can now customize the document environment (Tools > Options > General > Document tab) in
order to select documents or paths using various interfaces (folder, SmarTeam, and so on). The
interface can be customized for a folder or DLName path selection interface.
CATProcess Document Support
These topics are discussed in the following sections:
CATProcess Documents Support in SmartTeam

CATProcess Documents Support in Process Engineer
CATProcess Document Support in SmartTeam

NC CATProcess document and related linked documents (such as APT source, NC code, tool user representation,
machine) can be automatically managed in SmarTeam.
Whenever a V5 document needs to be loaded, SmarTeam can be accessed without duplicating documents in a folder.
Documents that have been saved in SmarTeam can be accessed in all the Machining products functionalities that
reference external documents. This includes the following functionalities:
● Open a CATProcess from SmarTeam

● Select a CATProduct or CATPart from SmarTeam in the Part Operation editor
● Select a CATProduct from SmarTeam in the Machine editor
● Select a macro from a catalog stored in SmarTeam in the Machining Operation editor
● Select a Machining Process from a catalog stored in SmarTeam in catalog browser
● Select a Machining Process from a catalog stored in SmarTeam in Machining Processes Application command
● Select a CATProduct or CATPart from SmarTeam to add a User Representation on a tool
● Select an output file from SmarTeam for APT Import
● Select a CATProduct from SmarTeam to Import V4 data
● Select an output APT source from SmarTeam to associate it to V4 data.
You must specify in the document environment setting (Tools > Options > General > Document tab) that you want to
be able to access to SmarTeam data. For that, just set SmarTeam to Allowed or Current.
If you set SmarTeam to Current, then SmarTeam becomes the current document environment and SmarTeam dialog
boxes will be displayed when you access your documents.
If several document environments are set the Browse Document Environments toolbar allows you to choose SmarTeam.
Example
You can select a CATProduct or CATPart from SmarTeam to add a User Representation on a tool.
CATProcess Document Support in Process

Engineer
NC CATProcess document and related documents are supported in Process Engineer.
Part Operations and NC Programs can be created in Process Engineer and detailed in V5 with Machining
products through the PPR Hub loader.
The complete process chain is covered down to NC output generation.
The following related documents that are generated in Process Planning and Machining workbenches can be
saved in the Process Engineer environment:
● In Process Model (CATPart and CATProduct)

● Drawings (CATDrawings)
● External tool paths (tpl)
● Video simulation results (CATProduct containing cgr (CATIA graphic representation) and WPC information).
● Images for documentation (jpg)

● NC data files (aptsource, clfile, and CATNCCode).
Methodology
This section provides methodology and conceptual information on the following topics.
Machining Processes
CATProduct and CATProcess Document Management
Copy/Paste and External Referencing of NC Manufacturing Data
User Features for Machining
Properties of a Machining Operation
Machining Processes
Machining process capabilities can be useful when your work habits include:
● using the same options and strategies in machining operations, according to specific to geometric shapes,
your machining techniques or the part material
● changing the options and parameters according to your needs
● checking that you are using the correct options
● defining and checking the approach/retract macros you want to use in such configurations.
Methodology
The proposed solution uses two major steps:
● Feeding the system with your know-how

● Using machining processes.
Feeding the System with Your Know-How
This is the Build Time step that includes creating machining processes and storing them in V5 Catalogs. It is
usually performed by the Administrator or Support Group.
Create Machining Processes
1. You need to create different Machining Operations without geometry: just start from an empty session.
2. Activate the Machining Process toolbar in the View>Toolbars menu to display the Machining Process
commands:
❍ Machining Process View : to display the Machining Process window
❍ Machining Process : to create a new Machining Process.
3. Create your Machining Process operation by operation: all axial operations are available.
Define parameters for operations just like in a Manufacturing Program (Offset, Feeds & Speeds, and so
on).
4. Thanks to Knowledgeware integration, you can define formula and checks for each operation.
5. Define tool query for each operation.
A user task for creating a machining process is described in this guide.
Store Machining Processes in Catalogs
You can either:

● right-click the Machining Process in the Machining Process View and select Save in Catalog.
● use the Catalog Editor to store the machining process in a new catalog.
1. Save the CATProcess containing the machining processes (do not close this document).
2. Create a new Catalog with Catalog Editor.
3. Save the machining process in this catalog.
4. Save the catalog.
A user task for organizing machining processes in catalogs is described in this guide.
Using the Machining Process
This is the Run Time step, usually performed by the NC Programmer.
1. Retrieve the machining process from the catalog using Open Catalog .
2. Apply the machining process in your NC program.
3. Edit the created machining operations to complete geometry selection and possibly the tool definition.
This is the case if no Tool Query was defined or the Tool Query did not find a suitable tool.
A user task for applying a machining process is described in this guide.
Step by Step Example

When working with Pocketing operations, you usually use a different set of options depending on the geometric
shape to machine or the part material type.
You can define and put in the system a machining process to be used for:
● simple pockets
● pockets using High Speed Machining (HSM) techniques
● pockets using soft materials.
Steps for Creating the Machining Process
Click Machining Process .
1. Define one or more machining operations.

2. For the machining operations, define your preferred Options, Strategies, Parameters, Macros, and
possibly tool queries.
3. Save the CATProcess document using File > Save.
4. Store the Machining Process in a V5 Catalog.
5. Select (or create) the Component Family in which you want to store the machining process.
6. Click Add Component .
7. Select Select External Feature in the dialog box that appears.
8. Select the CATProcess document, then the Machining Process.
Some Hints
In order to facilitate the NC Programmer job at selection time:
● use explicit names for the Machining Processes

● possibly use home-made icons
● carefully manage the catalog families and sub-families.
Steps for Using the Machining Process
Click Open Catalog .
1. Navigate in your catalog, and select the required Machining Process.

2. Select the operation after which you want the Pocketing operation to be created, and click OK.
3. Edit the Machining Operations to specify the Tool to be used if no Tool Query was defined in the
machining process and complete geometry selection.
Some Hints
Catalog organization (structure, comments) is key for a quick and efficient selection of machining processes by
the end-user.
For more information, refer to the following:
● Feature Attributes for Tool Queries, Checks and Formula
● Knowledgeware in Machining Processes.


This document explains how to make use of Knowledgeware capabilities in Machining Processes.
Define Links to External Data (URL) for Machining Processes

In the Knowledge Advisor workbench you can define links to external data (URL) for Machining Processes. For
example, you could define a link to workshop documentation that describes the Machining Process.
This documentation can be edited (with its editor) when:
● selecting the URL & Comments command in the Organize Knowledge tool bar
● applying the Machining Process by selecting this command in the Machining Process instantiation window.
Create Parameters for a Machining Operation in a

Machining Process
In a Machining workbench, create a Machining Process with a machining operation (Drilling operation, for
example).
In the Knowledge Advisor workbench, use the Parameters Explorer command to create a Length parameter
called AxialLengthforNCMacro with a value of 2.5mm.
This parameter can be associated to the Drilling operation using the Edit Formula command. It will be solved
in the same way as other parameters when the Machining Process is applied.
You can use this parameter to define f(x) formula on other parameters when editing the machining operation.
In particular, it can be used for NC Macro parameters which are not available in Knowledgeware and Search
functionalities.
Note the full integration of f(x) Knowledgeware in Machining Processes which are saved when a Machining
Process is applied.
In the example above, the instantiation of the machining process on a design hole with a 10mm depth will set
the AxialLengthforNCMacro parameter to 5mm and the Axial Macro approach distance to 5mm.
Please refer to the Knowledgeware documentation for more information.

CATProduct and CATProcess Document

Management
This document explains how a Product (CATProduct document) is managed in a Process (CATProcess
document), what happens when the Product is modified, and the recommended methodology in a Machining
context.
What is a Product
A basic Product comprises Parts, Products and elements (constraints, positions). These constraints and
positions define the relative/absolute position of the Parts and Products. The Part and Product documents are
referenced by the Product by means of links.
Product in a Process
When a basic Product is to be used by a Process, an instance of the Product is created in the Process. The
Product document is referenced by this Product instance by means of link.
The instance keeps the Product as reference according to one of two possible modes: Flexible (default mode)
and Rigid.
What is Impacted by Flexible and Rigid Modes
There are three types of modifications that can be done inside and under the Product structure that is inserted
in the Process:
● part modifications: for example, geometry modifications done in the Part Design workbench
● modifications to the structure of the products: addition, deletion or reordering products
● modification of geometric position data located in the CATProduct document.
Only modifications to geometric position data will function differently in Flexible and Rigid modes.
Part Modifications
Part modifications function in the same way in Flexible and Rigid modes.
Any modification to the Part does not impact Product or Process documents.
Modifications to the Structure of the Products
Modifications to the structure of the products function in the same way in Flexible and Rigid modes.
Propagation mechanisms of changes between the instance and the reference of the Product exist. The following
are propagated immediately:
● insertion, destruction of constraints

● insertion, destruction and replacement of links to a Part
● insertion, destruction, or modification of parameters and rules.
Geometric Position Data Modifications
Modifications to geometric position data function differently in Flexible and Rigid modes.
Modification and update of the position of the Parts and the Products (using the compass) or the constraint
values (such as offset, angle, and side) are propagated or not depending on the Rigid or Flexible mode.
In Rigid mode
Modification and update are propagated immediately.
In Flexible mode
In general, modification on the reference is propagated to the instance. However, when constraint or position
data is changed on the instance, then instance and reference position data are no longer correlated. Any later
modification to the reference is not propagated to the instance
Therefore, a modification done in the Product Structure workbench will be propagated on the Process document
only if constraint or position data has not been overridden.
Note that data update is not propagated to the instance and has to be performed on the instance.
To update the instance from the CATProcess document, go into the Assembly Design workbench and use the
Update All command.
Modification and constraint update on the instance are not propagated to the reference.
To force the propagation of all modifications on the instance to the reference, use the Propagate position to
reference command on the instance.
To forget all modifications on the instance and retrieve the reference state, use the Flexible/Rigid Sub-
Assembly command twice on the instance.
These commands are available in the Assembly Design and Product Structure workbenches.
How to Change Mode
The mode can be changed on the instance using the Flexible/Rigid Sub-Assembly command. Modifications
of positions and constraint values on the instance will be lost.
CATProduct Generic Machines
A generic machine is a CATProduct representation created using the NC Machine Tool Builder product. It can be
referenced in a Part Operation in a CATProcess. The characteristics of the machine can be modified using the
Part Operation's Machine Editor.
These machines adhere to the Instance/Reference mechanism described above. A generic machine is added to
the ResourceList in Flexible mode. This means that any modification to the machine in the CATProcess is valid
only for that instance of the machine in that CATProcess: the modification is not propagated to the reference
(that is, the CATProduct file).
Methodology
Rigid Mode
You can modify the instance or the reference, they are both impacted by modifications. The Product has a
strong link to the Processes where it is used. You are allowed to modify (and save) the CATProduct document.
For a Machining-dedicated Product that is used in a Machining CATProcess document, the preferred mode is
Rigid.
Flexible Mode
You can modify the instance or the reference depending on what you want to do:
● For a specific position for the Process, modify the instance (through the Process document).
● For a specific position for the Product, modify the reference (through the Product document).
● The Product can be tuned for each Process where it is used.
For a Product that is not Machining-dedicated and used in a Machining CATProcess document, the preferred
mode is Flexible.
Selective Loading of Machining Data

When the user loads a CATProcess in an NC Detailing workbench (NC Manufacturing Review, Prismatic
Machining, Surface Machining, Advanced Machining or Lathe Machining), the associated CATProducts and
CATParts are activated in Design mode. This is because the commands in these workbenches often require
geometry selection. This is the case even when working with Cache management.
If the CATProduct or CATPart was saved in Visualization mode, this mode may be conserved for machine
simulation, for example. So it is possible to work with Cache management in this case.
Copy/Paste of NC Manufacturing Data

This document deals with copying Machining data between CATProcess documents. You can Copy/Paste part
operations, manufacturing programs, machining operations, and machining processes from one CATProcess
document to another.
All the NC data is duplicated in the target document through the Copy/Paste mechanism.
Copy/Paste Between CATProcesses

You can Copy/Paste the following Machining activities:
● Part Operation pasted on a Part Operation or the Process

● Manufacturing Program pasted on a Part Operation or a Manufacturing Program
● Machining Operation pasted on a Part Operation, a Manufacturing Program, a Machining Operation, a
Machining Process
● Machining process pasted on a Machining Process View or a Machining Process.
Note that Tool paths are not copied.
NC features
The Duplicate Geometry Links option in the Tools> Options > Machining > Operation tab page must be set
to take into account the copy of NC Geometrical data.
All the NC features are copied with the activities which reference them. Machining Patterns, Machinable Area
Features, Machining Features are copied. Features are copied only if they are used by operations.
If the option is not set, only NC activities and resources data are copied.
Product and Part documents data
If Machining Activities to be copied are included in a Part Operation, then:
● For a Part Operation, the Product reference is included in the target document
● For any other activity, the user has to check that the target Part Operation references the correct Product
documents. In this case, each geometrical link will be maintained only if the Product associated to the link
is included in the Product associated to the original Part Operation.
NC resources
The resource is in the original Process document:
● If the resource does not exist in the target document, it is copied in the resource list.
● If the resource exists in the target document (same attributes), no copy is done and the existing resource
is used.

This section deals with design changes and the various associativity mechanisms provided with Machining products.
For information about... Please refer to...

Methodology for Design Changes. ● Preparation
● Design/Manufacturing Reconciliation by:
❍ direct selection using the Part Operation editor
❍ Edit Links capability.
● Associativity and Publication in Machining Documents.
● Associativity and Publication for Axial Machining

Operations.
Status for operation creation and modification, Geometry not Product Behavior for Design Changes
up to date, Geometry not found, tool path status, and so on.
Methodology for Design Change

The following example illustrates the methodology for Design/Manufacturing reconciliation after a design change.
Consider a Part Operation which references a CATProduct (Product1), which in turn references a CATPart (Part1).
Product.1, which is the component visible to the user in the interactive session, is stored in the document
Product1.CATProduct.
Part.1, which is the component visible to the user in the interactive session, is stored in the document Part1.CATPart.
In order to modify the design of the CATPart proceed as follows.
Preparation Before Design/Manufacturing Reconciliation
1. Modify the design in Part1.

2. Save Part1 as Part2 (rename Part1.CATPart as Part2.CATPart).
3. Open Product1.
4. Replace the component Part1 by Part2.
5. Save Product1 as Product2 (rename Product1.CATProduct as Product2.CATProduct).
Note that component instance names of Product1 should be unique and they should be identical to the component instance
names of Product2. Product part numbers may be different.
Then there are two ways for reconciliation of the design and manufacturing:
● by direct selection using the Part Operation editor

● by Edit Links.
Design/Manufacturing Reconciliation by Direct Selection using the Part Operation Editor
1. Open the CATProcess.

2. Edit the Part Operation that references the old design. Click Product in the Part Operation dialog box and select
the new product.
3. Click OK to quit the Part Operation dialog box. The various machining operations are updated.
Note that, depending on the document environment setting (Tools > Options > General > Document tab), the new product
can be selected from a file, a catalog, and so on.
Design/Manufacturing Reconciliation by Edit Links
1. Select Edit > Links.

2. In the Links tab, select the line corresponding to the link of the Part Operation that references the old design, then
click the Replace button.
Notes
● You must use the Links tab to replace the old design. Do not use the Pointed Documents tab to do this.
● You must not do a Replace on the line corresponding to the Product > CATProduct link. This link is not managed by
Machining products and so cannot be used in design/manufacturing reconciliation.
● The impacts of the reconciliation are global with respect to the CATProcess and not local to the Part Operation. This means
that all the Part Operations that referenced the old design will now reference the new design.
More About Associativity in Machining Documents
In case of design changes, the designer provides the NC programmer with one or more new CATParts and CATProducts. The
programmer has to replace the old CATProduct referenced by the CATProcess by a new one including the new CATParts and
CATProducts. As described in the previous chapter, the programmer can use either the Edit Links capability or the Part
Operation editor for this.
A CATProcess can be linked to CATProduct/CATPart in several ways:
1. There are links between Part Operation and the CATProduct containing the geometry to be machined.
2. There are links between operations and the geometry to be machined contained in the different CATParts/CATProducts
included in the CATProduct linked to the Part Operation.
3. There are links between formulas used by the operations and CATParts/CATProducts included in the CATProduct linked
to the Part Operation through the formula parameters.
When a design referenced by the CATProcess is modified, the NC programmer has to reconcile the CATProcess with the new
CATProduct using the Edit Links capability.
After reconciliation using the Edit Links capability:
1. The new CATProduct should appear in the ProductList and be linked to each Part Operation that was linked to the old
one.
2. Each operation that pointed a geometry that was included in the old CATProduct:
❍ should now be linked to the equivalent geometry in the new CATProduct if it exists
❍ or be in Geometry not found status, if the equivalent is not found in the new CATProduct.
3. Each formula that referenced an element of a CATPart of the old CATProduct, should now reference the equivalent
element in the new CATProduct.
That is, if a formula points to parameters that are defined in the CATProduct you want to replace, after reconciliation
the formula will point to the corresponding parameters in the new CATProduct.
If some of these parameters are not found, the behavior will be the same as when a parameter is deleted. A clone of
the parameter will be aggregated under the formula. It will take the value of the old parameter and becomes fixed. The
formula will be not broken and will continue to be associative with the other parameters.
Note that this rerouting is possible only if the new CATParts and CATProducts are created by a Save As of the old
ones. The instance names in the new CATProduct must be the same as in the old CATProduct.
Associativity and Publication in Machining Documents

All links on published geometric elements can be retrieved using the Edit Links capability or the Part Operation editor even
when the replaced part is new compared to the previous one. This means that associativity is assured in design change
scenarios even when CATProduct/CATPart B is a New From of CATProduct/CATPart A.
Consider the following scenario where the NC programmer receives a CATProduct, in which some geometric elements have
been published.
The programmer defines the process by selecting either the published elements in the specification tree or the geometry in the
geometry visualization area.
The publication name of the published reference geometry is displayed in the Geometry Analyser dialog box. This enables the
programmer to be sure that the selected geometry has been published.
The NC programmer receives a new version of this CATProduct. To reconcile the original CATProcess with this new version, the
programmer can use the Edit Links capability or modify the CATProduct using the Part Operation editor.
To be sure there are no positioning problems in the old and new CATProducts, each instance corresponding to an old one
should have the same instance name.
Then the NC programmer must select the new CATProduct.
For each operation pointing to published geometry, the system searches for the same publication name in the corresponding
product instance (same instance name). If the corresponding publication is found, the operation will be rerouted to the new
geometry.
Manual rerouting is proposed for publications that have not been solved automatically in the following dialog box.
The NC programmer must select the new publication in the new CATProduct inserted the ProductList that corresponds to the
old publication.
In this case, all operations that pointed to the geometry under the old publication will be rerouted to the geometry under the
new one.
Publications that are not solved at this time will be lost and operations that pointed to geometry in this old publication will be
in Geometry not found status.
The NC programmer obtains a new CATProcess with operations whose status is Not up to date (or Geometry not found if
some selected geometry was not published or have no corresponding publications in the new CATProduct). The programmer
must then validate the reconciliation by analyzing geometry and replaying the tool path.
Associativity and Publication for Axial Machining Operations

Geometry in axial operations is defined by a machining pattern and a geometrical feature. The geometrical feature is
automatically linked to a design geometry when the first position of the machining pattern is selected. If this position is a
design pattern, then the geometrical feature is linked to the design pattern's reference.
An axial operation is geometrically complete when:
● its geometrical feature is linked to a design geometry

● its machining pattern contains at least one point.
In the following example, Drilling.1 contains a machining pattern whose referenced geometry is RectPattern.1. When
RectPattern.1 is selected, Hole.1 (reference of RectPattern.1) is linked to the geometrical feature of Drilling.1.
If you want to make a design change by replacing the Part or Product in the Part Operation, both RectPattern.1 and Hole.1
must be published. Then all geometrical links in the axial operation can be resolved.
Product Behavior for Design Changes

The rules described below describe the various status of the elements referenced by machining operations and how to
recognize these status. It deals with the following:
● Elements referenced in a machining operation, which are colored according to the Color and Highlight settings specified in
Tools > Options > Machining > General.
● Status lights on machining operation tabs, for example .
● Masks used in the specification tree, for example .

● Texts used in the specification tree, for example Computed.
Useful settings in Tools > Options > Machining > General for tracking design changes are:
● Smart NC mode
● Optimized detection of design changes
● Update activity status automatically.
Operation Creation
Before selection, a required element is colored according to the color setting for Required parameters. Once selected, it is
colored according to the color setting for Valuated parameters.
Before selection, an optional element is colored according to the color setting for Optional parameters. Once selected, it is
colored according to the color setting for Valuated parameters.
The status light on a tab is Red when all the required elements of that tab have not been selected. Once selected, the status
light becomes Green.
The Replay is not available when the status light on a tab is Red.
After a successful Replay, the status of the operation becomes Computed. Depending on the Machining product and/or type
of operation, a tool path node may be added to the computed operation in the specification tree.
Operation Modification
Once modified, a selected element is colored according to the color setting for Geometry not up to date.
This allows quick recognition of impacted machining features.
The Analysis of the element is then possible: its status becomes Not up to date. Its Smart Geometry is visible.
The status light of the corresponding tab is Orange.
In the specification tree, the operation icon has an Update mask . If the operation had Computed status, it remains in this
state.
The Replay is available.
Selected Element No Longer Present
Once deleted (or no longer present), a selected element is colored according to the color setting for Geometry not found.
This allows quick recognition of deleted machined geometry.
The Analysis of the element is then possible: its status becomes Not found. Its Smart Geometry is visible.
The status light of the corresponding tab is Red.
In the specification tree, the operation icon has an Exclamation mask . If the operation had Computed status, it remains in
this state.
The Replay is not available.
The status light of the corresponding tab becomes Green when all the elements with the Geometry not found or Required
parameters color setting are:
● selected (they take the Valuated parameters color setting)

● or "removed" (they take the Optional parameters color setting).
The Replay is not available when the status light on a tab is Red.
Operation Status
An Update mask means that at least one selected element has been modified. In the corresponding tab the status color is
Orange and the color setting is Geometry not up to date.
An Exclamation mask means one of the following:
● At least one selected element is no longer present. In the corresponding tab the status color is Red and the color setting is
Geometry not found.
● At least one required element has not been selected. In the corresponding tab the status color is Red and the color setting
is Required Geometry.
A Locked mask means that a computed operation and its tool path is in a Locked state. The OK button of the operation
editor is not available. This is the result of a deliberate user action and the operation remains in this state until it is unlocked
by the user.
Please refer to Lock/Unlock Mechanisms for more information.
Status are obtained when Update Activity Status Automatically is not set in Tools > Options > Machining > General. To
know the status of one, several or all operations of a program, you must click Status of Selected Activities in the
Auxiliary Commands toolbar.
Tool Path Status
The Computed text in the specification tree means that the operation has been computed (that is, the tool path is present).
It does not guarantee the coherence of the operation with respect to the context. Its coherence is guaranteed by a replay
when this available.
When there is no text, this means that the operation has not been computed (that is, the tool path is not present). This status
is obtained after creating an operation without a tool path replay or after removing a tool path.

As from V5R16, association or replacement of the NC Setup Assembly (or Product) referenced by the Part Operation (or Setup) by selecting it in the Product
List is possible in the Manufacturing Hub context.
Now, when an NC detailing application handles Process Engineer project data in the Manufacturing Hub context, only product instances are managed using the
Product List.
Prior to V5R16, NC product replacement or association to Part Operation could only be done in a file based context.
Manufacturing Hub context

Allows NC detailing in CATIA V5 environment and process planning in Process Engineer E5 environment.
V5/E5 interoperability allows transferring project data from Process Engineer to NC detailing and saving NC detailing data in a Process Engineer project.
Product-Setup Link Issues (Prior to V5R16)

Prior to V5R16, the Part Operation (or Setup) references either product references or product instances according to how these components are linked. In the
Manufacturing Hub context, this is the source of two major issues:
● NC product association to Part Operation
● NC product replacement (design change scenario).
NC Product Association to Part Operation
Design Products are created and managed through the Engineering Hub. Machining Processes are defined and managed through the Manufacturing Hub.
In the figure below, the design (Product V1) was associated to the Product View in E5 (1). Only the product instances are available in this context.
In V5R15, association by drag and drop in E5 (2a) is the only one which enables to associate a NC product to a Part Operation. The association through Part
Operation (2b) in V5 does not work.
NC Product Replacement (Design Change Scenario)
In the figure below, Product V2 is a second version of Product V1 (1).

A new Subassembly is created in E5 and Product V2 is associated to this new one (2). However, it is not possible to support a Design Change scenario with
V5R15 services (Part Operation editor or Edit/Links) whose mechanism is based on links to product reference (3).
Product-Setup Link Solutions (As from V5R16)

To solve these problems in V5R16, the Product-Setup link will be the same since Part Operations will always be associated to product instances. This enables to
associate or replace a Product whatever the methodology used.
In addition, the link to product instances enables the following:
● Making the Product-Setup link persistent after save in IPD.

● Managing several machining phases of the same Product in a unique Process, each phase corresponding to one instance of the Product. You can manage
different setups or constraints for the same Product.
● Making design changes local to the Setup and not necessarily global to the Process.
The different ways to associate a Product to a Part Operation and to replace a Product by a new one are discussed below. Most of the services described here
already exist in V5R15 but they can only work in Manufacturing Hub context if there is a link to a product instance.
How to Associate a NC Setup Assembly to the Part Operation
This can be done as follows:
● NC Setup Assembly instance selection through Part Operation editor.
● Drag and drop in Process Engineer.
● Drag and drop in CATIA/DELMIA.
In what follows, we assume that you have already created a Process Engineer Project including a Process View and a Product View. In the Process View, you
have already created a WorkPlan (machining process) including a ManufacturingSetUp (Part Operation). In the Product View, you have already created a NC
subassembly.
NC Setup Assembly Instance Selection through Part Operation Editor
There are two ways to achieve this association:
Methodology 1:
● Drag and drop of the NC Setup Assembly to the Workplan (machining process) in the Process Engineer Project (1).
● Load this Project in CATIA\DELMIA by using the PPR Hub toolbar (2-3).
NC Setup Assembly is inserted in the ProductList (4).
● To associate this NC Setup Assembly to the Part Operation, edit the Part Operation by clicking on the Product Instance Selection icon and selecting the
NC Setup Assembly in the ProductList (5-6).
Methodology 2:
● Load the Project in CATIA\DELMIA (1-2-3).

● Load the NC Setup Assembly in the ProductList in CATIA/DELMIA by using the PPR Hub toolbar (4).
NC Setup Assembly is inserted in the ProductList (5).
● To associate this NC Setup Assembly to the Part Operation, edit the Part Operation by clicking on the new Product Instance Selection icon and selecting
the NC Setup Assembly in the ProductList (6-7).
Drag and Drop in Process Engineer
You can associate the NC Setup Assembly directly in the Process Engineer Project. In the Project you have already created a Subassembly (NC Setup
Assembly) in the Design View and you have created a ManufacturingSetup (Part Operation).
● Select the Subassembly and drag and drop (1) it to the ManufacturingSetup.
● Create a Process Processes Product type link (2).
Drag and Drop in CATIA/DELMIA
Assuming you already made either the steps (1) to (4) of Methodology 1 or the steps (1) to (5) of second Methodology 2.
In CATIA/DELMIA, to associate this NC Setup Assembly to the Part Operation, drag and drop the NC Setup Assembly instance from the ProductList to the Part
Operation.
How to Replace a NC Setup Assembly in the Part Operation
In CATIA V5, note that it becomes impossible to use Edit/Links functionality to replace the Product in the Machining context. In fact, Edit/Links is based on the
exposition of an external link between the Part Operation and the product reference (Product/Part). This link no longer exists so it is impossible to expose it.
The Part Operation now points to a product instance not to a product reference.
In what follows Revision means when the document is modified and saved on the same document and Version means when the document is modified and
saved as a new document.
In Manufacturing Hub context, there are two ways to manage the NC Setup Assembly. In both cases you have to create a Product View, a Design View and a
Subassembly in the Process Engineer Project. The Subassembly corresponds to the NC Setup Assembly.
Then you have two different modes to create the Subassembly:
● You can directly link this Subassembly to a Product (the structure of the NC Setup Assembly is not visible through Process Engineer):
Double-click the Subassembly (1)
Select the Graphic tab (2)
Associate the Product to the Subassembly (3).
● You can split the Subassembly into subelements (Parts, IPMs, and so on) and associate Parts to these subelements (the structure of the NC Setup Assembly
is visible through Process Engineer).
Double-click a subelement of the Subassembly (1)
Select the Graphic tab (2)
Associate the Product to the Subassembly (3).
New Revisions of NC Setup Assembly or Part
If you just do revisions of your design documents, reconciliation is automatic. You just have to compute the tool path again if it is necessary.
New Versions of NC Setup Assembly
In the following methodologies the Subassembly is linked directly to a Product.
Methodology 1:
● In E5: You can directly replace the current NC Setup Assembly (ProductV1) associated to IPD Subassembly (Subassembly V1) by a new one (1-2-3) and
save the Project.
● In V5: Open the Project in V5 and synchronize the Process (4). Here, the machining operation is no longer synchronized because the design change
scenario was processed in E5 environment.
Refer to NC Synchronization in Manufacturing Hub Context.
Methodology 2:
● In E5: You can create a new IPD Subassembly under the same Production View (1) and link it to the new version of the NC Setup Assembly (2-3-4). Then
you save the Project in IPD.
● In V5: Open the Project in V5, and edit the Part Operation (5). Click on Product Instance Selection icon and select the new NC Subassembly:
Subassembly V2 (6). The replacement is done (7).
Note that the Machining Operation is always synchronized because the design change scenario was processed in V5.
New Versioning of Part when the Subassembly is Linked Directly to a Product
In V5: You just have to replace the NC Part in the NC Setup Assembly (Product) and synchronize the Process.
New Versioning of Part when the Subassembly is Split into Subelements
Methodology 1:
● In E5: You can directly replace the current Part (PartV1) associated to IPD Part (Part, 1) by a new one (1-2-3) and save the Project.
● In V5: Open the Project in V5 and synchronize the Process (4). Here, the machining operation is no longer synchronized because the design change
scenario was processed in E5 environment.
Methodology 2:
● In E5: You can create a new IPD Subassembly and new IPD Part under the same Production View (1). Note that the name of the IPD Part must be the
same in the both IPD Subassemblies.
Then, link the new NC Part (PartV2) to the IPD Part of the new version of IPD Subassembly (2-3-4) and save the Project in IPD.
● In V5: Open the Project in V5, edit the Part Operation (5). Click on Product Instance Selection icon and select the new Subassembly (6). The
replacement is done (7).
Note that the Machining Operations are always synchronized.
Multi-replacement of NC Setup Assembly
In V5, it is possible to locally replace the Part Operation or globally replace all Part Operations pointing to the same NC Setup Assembly.
Case 1: In selected Part Operation only

If you choose a local replacement, even if there are several Part Operations pointing to the same NC Setup Assembly, the design changes will impact only the
edited Part Operation. All the other Part Operations, pointing to the same NC Setup Assembly, continue to point to that one.
Nevertheless, if the other Part Operations reference some activities using some shared elements that are also used by the edited Part Operation (such as
formula, Patterns, and Machining Areas) they will also be impacted by the design changes.
Case 2: In whole Process

If you choose a global replacement, all Part Operations pointing to the same NC Setup Assembly will be impacted by the replacement.
If the selected Part Operation is the only one pointing to a given NC Setup Assembly, the global mode is automatically applied.
As an example of this, imagine that several Part Operations point to "New Subassembly 1".
1. Edit the first one.

2. Replace the current NC Setup Assembly by "New Subassembly 2".
The Product Replacement dialog box appears.
3. If you select In selected Part Operation only then only the edited Part Operation will be impacted. If you select In whole Process then all the Part
operations will be impacted.
How to Copy Activities Between Projects
This section deals with the inter-project copy of activities (that is, machining operations).
Reminder: In V5 application in Manufacturing Hub context, it is not possible to copy an activity from a Project A to a Project B if the Part Operation included in
Project B is not already associated to a NC Setup Assembly.
When you copy activities from a Project A (1) to a Project B (2) in a Part Operation with an associated NC Setup Assembly, three different cases can occur
according to NC Setup Assembly associated to the origin Part Operation and NC Setup Assembly associated to the target Part Operation (3).
Case 1: The target NC Setup Assembly is the same as the origin NC Setup Assembly. In this case the activities will be rerouted on the new NC Setup Assembly
instance. The status of the NC geometries does not change.
Case 2: The target NC Setup Assembly is a Save As from the origin NC Setup Assembly. The status of NC geometries are "Not up to date" for geometries that
have changed.
Case 3: The target NC Setup Assembly is completely different from the origin NC Setup Assembly (or a New From). In this case, the status of all NC
geometries are "Not Found".
If you do not use the Duplicate geometry links option, all the activities will be disconnected in any case.
NC Synchronization in Manufacturing Hub

Context
This section discusses NC Synchronization in the Manufacturing Hub context.
This capability enables you to delete at least one Part belonging to the NC Setup Assembly or replace the
current version of it by a new version. You can manually or automatically synchronize the Process with the new
version of the Part.
Detecting Synchronization Problems

New Not Synchronous Mask on Activity in the Graph
The following status values are possible for an activity:
● Up To Date: In this case, no specific mask is displayed.

● Not Up To Date: In this case, an Update mask is displayed on the graph node of this activity. This
symbol appears when the geometry pointed has been modified (for example, if you made a new revision of
the Part and, in this revision, you have modified a surface that is used by a facing operation).
● Not Complete: In this case, an Exclamation mask is displayed on the graph node of this activity. This
symbol appears when the geometry pointed has been deleted (example: You made a new revision of the
Part. In this revision you have deleted a surface that is used by a facing operation).
● Not Synchronous: In this case, a red cross mask is displayed (as from V5R16). This symbol will appear,
when the geometry pointed belongs to a Document which does not correspond to the Product instance
pointed in the ProductList.
Example: You have made a new version of the Part and you have replaced it in the Product, but you have
saved the Product without versioning. So in the ProductList the new version of the Part is visualized but the
operation still points on the old Part.
As for the other statuses, the Not synchronous mask will be visualized automatically only if the Update
activity status automatically option is active. Otherwise, it will be displayed only if the user refreshes the
activity status.
The priorities between the different statuses are the following.
● First, a check is done to see if the activity is synchronous, otherwise the mask is displayed.
● Then, a check is done to see if the activity is complete, otherwise the mask is displayed.
● Finally, a check is done to see if the activity is up to date, otherwise the mask is displayed.
New Color of Geometry Manipulators
In order to help the user to understand the status defined on the operation, different colors are customizable
to display the geometry manipulators in the editors.
By default, Up to date geometries are displayed in green, Not up to date geometries are displayed in brown,
Not Found geometries are displayed in purple, and Not synchronous geometries are displayed in dark mauve.
All these colors are customizable in Tools/Options.
New Status in Process Table
In the Process Table, an operation can have the following statuses:
● Up To Date if the operation is up to date

● Not Up To Date if the operation is not up to date
● Missing Information if the operation is not complete
● Not Synchronous if the operation points on a design that does not correspond to the one defined in the
Product List.
New Status in Analyze Geometry Dialog Box
The following statuses are displayed for each geometric element in the Analyze Geometry dialog box:
● Up to date
● Not up to date
● Not found
● Not synchronous.
Manual and Automatic Synchronization

Manual Synchronization
Prior to V5R16, when an operation was not synchronous, the only way to synchronize it was to remove all
geometry links and manually select the new geometry.
It is still possible to synchronize this manually but it is easier to know the geometry links that need to be
reselected thanks to the Not Synchronous color of the geometry manipulator and the Not Synchronous status
in the Analyze Geometry dialog box.
Automatic Synchronization
As from V5R16, you can synchronize the CATProcess automatically with Synchronize Process in the
Auxiliary Commands toolbar. The synchronization is global to the CATProcess.
This command takes into account the Optimized detection of design changes option. It is possible to undo
the synchronization.
Synchronization corresponds to reconciliation between the operation and the document present in the Product
List.
Concerning Geometry
Reroute will be possible in the following cases:
● Geometric element is not published and the Part A' is a Save As of the Part A.
● Geometric element pointed in Part A is published in Part A itself (not in the product).
In these cases, reroute will also take into account the Optimized detection of design changes option.
Reroute will not be possible and operation will be disconnected in the following cases:
● Part A has been removed from the Product.

● Geometric element is not published and the Part A' is not a Save As of Part A.
● Geometric element pointed in Part A was published in Product context but not directly in Part A.
Concerning Formula
When a formula points on a parameter defined in a document that is not present in the Product List, two cases
may be considered:
1. If it is possible to find the equivalent parameter in one of the documents of the Product List, we reroute
the formula on it.
2. If it is not possible, we create a clone of the old parameter set with its previous value in the formula. In
this case, the formula is not parameterized any more.
Compute Tool Path, Replay, Simulation and CATMFG

When an activity is not synchronous the integrity of the computed tool path cannot be guaranteed. It is
considered as not complete. Therefore, if an activity is not synchronous, then compute tool path, replay,
simulation and CATMFG will not be available except if the tool path or the activity is locked.
In CATMFG a message is generated in the Log file to indicate the Not synchronous status of this activity.
Examples of Scenarios Resulting in a Non Synchronized

Process
Refer to New Versioning of NC Setup Assembly (Methodology 1) and New Versioning of Part when the
Subassembly is Split into Subelements (Methodology 1) for detail about scenarios which cause the de-
synchronization of NC geometry.
Locked Machining Operations
Often, when a machining operation is computed (that is, the tool path is calculated), it can be useful to lock
the operation to prevent the tool path from being removed (for example, in case of design or operator change)
and allow the NC Programmer to determine what was machined and how it was machined based on the replay
of the locked tool path.
Lock / Unlock Commands on Machining Operations

In the contextual menu for a computed machining operation, there are four commands allowing different
lock/unlock actions.
Lock: Lock the tool path and the operation parameters.

In this case the Locked mask (yellow padlock) appears on the operation icon in the PPR tree.
Unlock: Unlock the tool path and the operation parameters.
Lock Tool Path: Lock the tool path only.

In this case the Locked Tool Path mask (green padlock) appears on the operation icon in the PPR tree.
Unlock Tool Path: Unlock the tool path only.
Commands available depending on the operation's Lock state
The operation is not locked and its tool path is not locked.
Available commands are Lock and Lock Tool Path.
The operation is not locked but its tool path is locked.

Available commands are Lock and Unlock Tool Path.
The operation is locked (Tool path and operation parameters)

Available command is Unlock.
Functionalities available depending on operation's Lock state
The operation is locked (Tool path and operation parameters):
● Replay, simulation and NC data generation are based on the locked tool path.
● Compute tool path and remove tool path are not possible.
● Replace tool is unavailable.
● The OK button on the operation editor is disabled. You can only browse the operation.
● Tool path edition is possible for operations with a tool path node.
The operation is not locked but its tool path is locked:
● Replay, simulation and NC data generation are based on the locked tool path.
● Compute tool path and remove tool path are not possible.
● Replace tool is available.
● The operation editor is available but no update of the operation will be done by means of the OK button.
● Tool path edition is possible for operations with a tool path node.
Please note the following points.
● To modify the tool path using the tool path editor, the Edit Tool Path checkbox must be selected in the
Tools > Options > Machining > Output.
● When generate NC data is generated for a locked machining operation, a specific message will be issued in
the CATMFG.log file.
● The Lock Operations checkbox can be set in the Generate NC Output in Batch Mode dialog box to lock all
operations after NC data generation when Save document is requested.
Lock / Unlock Commands on Manufacturing Programs

By right-clicking a Manufacturing Program you can use the Lock Children or Unlock Children command to
lock or unlock all the children nodes of the program (that is, the program's machining operations) .
Lock Children:
The child node is not locked and its tool path is not locked: Lock Tool Path and operation parameters.
The child node is not locked but its tool path is locked: Lock operation parameters, Tool Path already locked.
The child node is locked: Tool Path and operation parameters already locked.
Unlock Children:
The child is not locked and its tool path is not locked: Tool Path and operation parameters already unlocked.
The child is not locked but its tool path is locked: Unlock Tool Path, operation parameters already unlocked.
The child is locked: Unlock Tool Path and operation parameters.
By right-clicking a Manufacturing Program you can use the Lock Tool Path or Unlock Tool Path command to
lock or unlock all the tool path nodes of the program.
Lock Tool Path:

The child node is not locked and its tool path is not locked: Lock Tool Path.
The child node is not locked but its tool path is locked: Tool Path already locked.
The child node is locked: Tool Path already locked.
Unlock Tool Path:

The child node is not locked and its tool path is not locked: Tool Path already unlocked.
The child node is not locked but its tool path is locked: Unlock Tool Path.
The child node is locked: Tool Path is protected by the operation lock. You cannot unlock the Tool Path only.
You have to unlock the operation.
Tool Path Stability

The Lock Tool Path functionality offers a means for ensuring the stability of a computed NC tool path from
one release to another.
Knowing that tool path variations may be introduced from one release to another due to algorithm
enhancements or maintenance interventions, this functionality reduces NC Programmer time and effort by
eliminating the need to re-calculate and re-validate previously computed NC data.
When Lock Tool Path is used, the computed tool path data is stored in the model. If an operation is not
modified from one release to another (that is, geometry, parameters, and so on are unchanged), it is not re-
calculated: the previously stored tool path data will be read.

This document provides methodology for setting up the workpiece, stock, and fixtures on the machine.
A user task showing you how to manage part set up is also include in this guide.
Terminology
Part Operation means:
● One machine
● One set up (that is, workpiece in position on the machine )
● One or more Manufacturing Programs (same set up). One program equals one NC output file (APT, CLFile, or
NC code).
Set up is usually defined through a CATProduct document. It includes the machine table, the workpiece (in
position), the fixtures, and the stock.
A CATProcess document can include several Part Operations. Each Part Operation references a different
CATProduct set up document.
Preparing the First Set Up

Create one CATProduct document for first set up with:
● Machine table (one CATPart document)

● Workpiece (one CATPart document)
● Three fixtures (three instances of the same CATPart document).
Preparing the Second Set Up

Create one CATProduct document for second set up with:
● Machine table (one CATPart document)

● Workpiece (one CATPart document)
● Two fixtures (two instances of the same CATPart document)
● Support (one CATPart document).
Programming the Top of the Workpiece

Use the first CATProduct document for first Part Operation.
Programming the Bottom of the Workpiece

In the same CATProcess document (or in another), create a Part Operation that refers to the second CATProduct
(that is, the second set up).
Hints
If there are several Part Operations in the same CATProcess document, then by activating one Part Operation,
the system will show the corresponding Product(s) referenced by that Part Operation.

This section deals with the material removal simulation capability provided with the Replay Tool Path command.
For information about... Please refer to...

CATProduct user representation of tools ● CATProduct User Representation of Milling Tools
● CATProduct User Representation of Lathe Tools
● CATProduct User Representation of Cleaning Tools
CATPart tools for milling CATPart Tools for Photo or Video Mode
Stock considerations Stock for Material Removal Simulation
CATProduct User Representation of Milling Tools

You can attach a CATProduct to a tool or tool assembly by means of the NC Resources > Add User Representation
contextual command in the Resource List.
Parts of this CATProduct are the components of the tool:
● tool holder, which is a non-cutting component

● shank, which is a non-cutting component
● cutter, which is a cutting component.
The tool created from the CATProduct can be used in Video simulation. This tool can have multiple cutters, holders, and
shanks.
Please note however that user representation may reduce the performance of the material removal simulation.
Preliminary Settings under Tools > Options
To allow Parameter nodes to be displayed in the PPR tree, make the following settings:
● Parameters and Measure: set Parameter Tree View checkbox in the Knowledge tab.
● Part Infrastructure: set Parameters checkbox in the Display tab.
Tool Structure
You can define tool geometry as a CATProduct file. CATParts instantiated in this CATProduct (there may be intermediate
products between root product and parts at any level ) are components of this tool. A given component may be
instantiated several times in the product, at different locations.
Naming Convention and Content of Parts
Some components are cutting components and are used in simulation and in In-Process Model (IPM) generation. Some
other components are non-cutting and are used in collision detection. A non-cutting component may be a shank or a
holder. These sub-categories of non-cutting components must be differentiated as well.
To identify the type of a component, the corresponding CATPart must contain a Knowledgeware parameter (added using
the Fx button in Part Design).
Parameter name is CuttingType (type string).
Possible values of this parameter are CUTTER, SHANK and HOLDER.
Any CATPart not containing this parameter is ignored in the simulation and in IPM generation.
Note that Photo simulation allows one shank or holder only.
In the following example:
● CUTCutterBig.1, CUTCutterBig.2, and CUTCutterSmall.1 are cutting components (note that one of them is
instantiated twice).
● NOCUTShank.1 is a non-cutting component.
● HOLD.1 component is ignored in simulation and in IPM generation.
Material Removal
You can perform material removal with tool assemblies with multiple cutting parts.
For example:
If you perform machining with the tool assembly as shown above, then all three cutting parts should be considered for
material removal.
CATProduct User Representation of Lathe Tools

You can attach a CATProduct to a lathe tool by means of the NC Resources > Add User Representation contextual
command in the Resource List.
Parts of this CATProduct are the components of the lathe tool:
● insert, which is a cutting component

● insert holder, which is a non-cutting component.
The lathe tool user representation can be used in Video simulation. However, unlike the user representation used for
milling tools, only one cutting and one non-cutting component can be used for lathe tools. Also, the insert holder does
not participate in material removal (regardless of Rapid or Feed mode) and is used only for collision detection.
The sketch conventions outlined below for cutting and non-cutting components must be respected. Non-cutting parts
must be convex (that is, the profiles used do not have any cut-outs).
Please note however that user representation may reduce the performance of the material removal simulation.
Preliminary Settings under Tools > Options
To allow Parameter nodes to be displayed in the PPR tree, make the following settings:
● Parameters and Measure: set Parameter Tree View checkbox in the Knowledge tab.
● Part Infrastructure: set Parameters checkbox in the Display tab.
To allow you to pick individual points during the material removal simulation, make the following setting:
● Sketcher: set Grid Graduations to 100.
Define the Cutting Component (the insert)
Create a part (New > Part) then select the F(x) Formula command.
In the Formula dialog box, set CuttingType to CUTTER.
In the Sketcher workbench, select the ZX plane (in lathe machining, Z is the spindle axis and X is the radial axis).
Create a closed profile, adding successive elements in the anti-clockwise direction.
Note that:
● the Sketch user representation of tools can include construction elements.

● transformations (such as rotation or translation) must not be applied on this sketch as they will not be taken into
account for simulation.
In the Part Design workbench, create a Pad from the sketch (2mm thick, for example). This will represent the lathe
insert.
Right-click the Part in the tree and select Properties. Rename the Part Number (Insert001, for example).
Save the CATPart.
Define the Non-Cutting Component (the insert holder)
Define the non-cutting component using the same procedure.
Create a part (New > Part) then select the F(x) Formula command. In the Formula dialog box, set CuttingType to
HOLDER.
In the Sketcher workbench, select the ZX plane. Create a rectangle.
In the Part Design workbench, create a Pad from the sketch. This will represent the lathe insert holder.
Right-click the Part in the tree and select Properties. Rename the Part Number (Holder001, for example).
Save the CATPart.
Create the CATProduct User Representation
Create a new CATProduct instantiated with the Insert and Holder CATParts.
You can then use the CATProduct as the Tool in the Video simulation.
CATProduct User Representation of Cleaning Tools

A Cleaning operation is a non-machining operation that uses a CATProduct user representation tool. It is defined by first
creating a machining operation (depending upon the strategy required by the cleaning process) so as to generate the
tool path for cleaning. Then by assigning a specific user representation tool a cleaning behavior can be simulated.
Cleaning simulation can be performed in Video mode only.
The tool assigned to cleaning operations must be a CATProduct user representation and must conform to the following
rules. The CuttingType knowledge attribute needs to be defined with a value equal to CLEANING for defining the
cleaning component of the tool (which may be a brush, for example). Possible values for the non-cleaning components
are SHANK and HOLDER.
In operations where cleaning tools as described above are used, the Video simulation has the behavior as illustrated
below:
● The cleaning tool will not remove any material.

● Collisions will be detected (if collisions detection is set ON) between the holder and the other components in the
system, as is the normal collision detection behavior.
● In rapid mode, collision detection will be performed between the cleaning element and the rest of the components in
the system, including the stock.
● No collision will be reported during the cleaning action, provided it is in feed mode between the work-piece and the
cleaning element of the tool.
Note that Cleaning tools are not supported for turning operations or in Photo mode.
CATPart Tools for Photo or Video Mode

Please note that the CATProduct user representation of tools described above is the recommended method.
You can attach a CATPart to a tool or tool assembly by means of the NC Resources > Add User Representation
contextual command in the Resource List.
You can add a sketch called CUT to define the cutting part of the tool and, optionally, a sketch called NOCUT to define
the non-cutting part of the tool. These profiles will be used in the material removal simulation in Photo or Video mode.
Note that the sketches must be called CUT and NOCUT: no other names are possible.
Please note however that user representation may reduce the performance of the material removal simulation .
Here is a step-by step procedure for defining the CUT and NOCUT profiles.
Define a closed profile representing the cutting part of the tool:
● In the Sketcher workbench, create a sketch in the Oyz plane.

● Click the Axis icon then create an axis from (0,0) along the V-axis.
This is useful if you want to use the profile to generate a 3D representation of the cutting part of the tool.
● Create the profile, starting from a position on the V-axis. Create the profile using line segments and circular arcs in
an anti-clockwise direction. H coordinates must be positive. Close the profile using a line segment.
Examples of correct profiles:

● Using the Properties contextual command, name this profile CUT in the Feature Properties tab of the dialog box
that appears.
If needed, define a profile representing the non-cutting part of the tool:

● In the Sketcher workbench, create a sketch in the Oyz plane.

● Click the Axis icon then create an axis from (0,0) along the V-axis.
This is useful if you want to use the profile to generate a 3D representation of the non-cutting part of the tool.
● Create the profile, starting from a position on the V-axis. Create the profile using line segments and circular arcs in
an anti-clockwise direction. H coordinates must be positive. Close the profile using a line segment.
● Using the Properties contextual command, name this profile NOCUT in the Feature Properties tab of the displayed
dialog box.
Stock, Design and Fixtures for Material Removal Simulation

The following can be defined as stock, design or fixtures in the Part Operation editor:
● CATPart bodies
● hybrid bodies
● cloud of points bodies
● Video result stored in a CATProduct.
Note: This CATProduct contains cgr (CATIA graphic representation) and WPC information.
Video results can be used effectively in a Part Operation that contains more that one program. The Video result of the
last operation of a program can be used as the stock for a following program. For that, you must set the Simulation at
Part Operation level option and use the Video from Last Saved Result command when using simulation in the
following program.
If there is no stock defined, the envelope volume of the design part is used. If there is no design part, the envelope
volume of the design part is used.
In Video mode only, if the stock geometry is not correctly closed, a stock representing the envelope volume of the
design part is computed.

This document provides methodology for machining symmetrical parts and left-hand/right-hand parts. A user
task showing you how to program using Opposite Hand Machining techniques is also include in this guide.
Although this is quite a flexible process, there are usually 3 steps involved:
1. Preparing the program

2. Transforming the machining operations and reversing the machining conditions
3. Locally editing the transformed program.
By following this method, you will obtain a program for the symmetrical part that has the same cutting
conditions as the initial part.
Preparing the Program

The following methodology assumes that a proven program already exists for one symmetrical half of a part or
for one workpiece in a left-hand/right-hand pair.
Taking the example of an existing left-hand program, you should make a copy of the program (or the
operations in the program) in one of the following ways:
● Copy/Paste the left-hand program to create a new program. This method is suitable for symmetrical left-
hand/right-hand parts
● Copy/Paste operations in left-hand program to create a new operations in that program. This method is
suitable for a symmetrical (or nearly symmetrical) workpiece.
● perform a File>Save As of the CATProcess.
Transforming the Program and Reversing Machining

Conditions
To transform the copied program (or operations):
● Use the TRACUT Operator command to create and apply a transformation in order to create a
symmetrical tool path (Mirror or other suitable transformation).
After applying the transformation to the tool path, the cutting conditions of some operations may be
reversed (climb/conventional milling, for example).
● Select the Opposite Hand Machining Options command . In the dialog box that appears, select the
types of operations whose cutting conditions change after a Mirror type transformation. You can now apply
a Reverse Machining Conditions processing to the selected operation types.
● In the specification tree, select the program (or groups of operations) whose cutting conditions have been
reversed and apply the Reverse Machining Conditions command .
Modified operations can be easily identified in the program due to the update symbols ( ) that appear in the
tree. The tool paths of these operations must be computed or re-computed.
Due to the applied transformation followed by the Reverse Machining Conditions processing, the cutting
conditions are now reset to the values of the initial program. A summary of the processing appears on an
information pop-up.
Note that the cutting conditions of deactivated operations ( ) can be changed, since they can be edited.
However, the cutting conditions of locked operations ( ) cannot be changed, since they cannot be edited.
Locally Editing the Transformed Program

The program may need to be finalized by means of some local editing.
If the operations of the original program are linked one after the other, you may need to reverse the order of
these operations in the processed program. This is the case, for example, if the end point of Operation1 is the
start point of Operation2.
In this case, you can use the Reorder Operations List command to reverse the order of one or more
groups of operations. In the example below, the groups A, B, C and E, F were selected and reversed.
Operation.A Operation.C
Operation.B Operation.B
Operation.C ---------------> Operation.A

Operation.D Operation.D
Operation.E Operation.F
Operation.F Operation.E
Note that groups of operations must be selected one after the other in the tree and they must use the same
tool. Operations in each group must be selected from top to bottom.
Similarly, it may be necessary to inverse the approach and retract macros on an operation. In this case, select
the relevant operations and select the Inverse Macros command .
Operations Processed by Opposite Hand Machining

The following table summarizes the references elements that are transformed by Opposite Hand Machining.
Typically, the Reverse Machining Conditions command must be applied to these operations in order to
retrieve the cutting conditions of the initial program.
Operation Effect of Opposite Hand Machining

3-axis Roughing Climb and Conventional options are inverted.
Spiral Milling Climb and Conventional options are inverted.
Axial Machining Operations Order of pattern points is reversed in the tool path.
Pocketing Climb and Conventional options are inverted.
Facing Climb and Conventional options are inverted.
Profile Contouring Climb and Conventional options are inverted.
Order of multi-contour is inverted.
Start and End elements, offsets, and conditions are inverted.
Groove Milling Climb and Conventional options are inverted.
3-axis/5-axis Isoparametric Machining Order of parts is inverted.
Corners 1 and 2 are swapped.
Corners 3 and 4 are swapped.
Corresponding interpolation axes at corners are swapped.
5-axis Flank Contouring Order of drives is inverted as follows when the Close tool path
checkbox is not selected in the operation's Machining parameters tab.
Drives A, B, C, D are machined in the order D, C, B, A.
Before Opposite Hand Machining:
After Opposite Hand Machining:
Order of drives is inverted as follows when the Close tool path

checkbox is selected in the operation's Machining parameters tab.
Drives A, B, C, D are machined in the order A, D, C, B, A.
Drive A is the first and last machined element.
Before Opposite Hand Machining:
After Opposite Hand Machining:

Start and End elements, offsets, and conditions are inverted.

Approach and Leave distances are swapped.
Manual direction is reversed (Left / Right).
Local stopping condition and Local restarting direction are updated.
5-axis Curve Machining Climb and Conventional options are inverted.
Sign of Tilt angle is changed to invert the left/right condition.
Couple of Points limit elements are swapped.
For Tangent Axis guidance along isoparametric lines:

when machining a strip of drive surfaces, check that the reference
tool axis gives the desired result for the best matching u or v
isoparametric line of the first machined face.
CUTCOM You should check that the desired cutter compensation is still applied
(correct side, and so on).
Typical User Scenarios

Machining of any symmetrical right part, when left part machining is already defined.
The right part does not exist as a physical model, everything is referenced on the left part.
Scenario 1: Creation
Program of left-hand part has been defined.
1. Duplicate left-hand program (CTRL+C, CTRL+V) and rename it 'Right Program before Transform'.
2. Use the TRACUT Operator command to manage the symmetry. You can also use another way to
transform the resulting tool path. The CUTCOM syntax is not taken into account by the transformation.
PQR output is taken into account by the transformation. This may be done in a 'Final left program after
symmetry'.
3. Select the Auxiliary Operations tool bar.
4. Check the Options command in order to select operation types for Reverse Machining Conditions
processing.
5. Select the block of operations to be processed.
6. Select the Reverse Machining Conditions command.
7. Compute the new tool paths.
8. Locally edit the program, if needed (to reverse the order of operations, macros, pattern points, and so
on).
Scenario 2: Modification of the left program
Operations in left-hand program have been updated because of design changes, but the tool path was fully
associative.
In this case, right-hand program is updated and is associative.
Operations in left-hand program have been updated because of design changes, some operations have been
edited to take new geometry into account.
1. Delete existing old operations in the 'Right Program before Transform'.

2. Select and duplicate the modified operations in the 'Right Program before Transform'.
3. Do local opposite hand processing and modifications on operations.
Some operations' options in left-hand program have been modified, or some operations have been added to
left part.
1. Delete existing old operations in the 'Right Program before Transform'.

2. Select and duplicate the new and modified operations in the 'Right Program before Transform'.
3. Do local opposite hand processing and modifications on the operations.
Create a User Feature for Machining
This task shows how to:

● define a User Feature for Machining
● create a machining process that makes use of the User Feature.
Please refer to the Product Knowledge Template User's Guide for more information about creating user features, storing them in
catalogs, and reusing them in documents.
Mapping Rule File
A default mapping dedicated to the User Features and their use in Axial Operations can be defined through a mapping rule file.
This file is located in \resources\msgcatalog\CATMfgUdfForMappingToMfg.CATNls. It contains:
● Drilling Point (MfgHolePoint) which has to be an input or output point of the User Feature
● Drilling Axis (MfgHoleAxis) which has to be an input or output planar face of the User Feature
● Drilling Diameter (MfgHoleDiameter) which has to be a published parameter of the User Feature
● Drilling Depth (MfgHoleDepth) which has to be a published parameter of the User Feature.
It enables you to use a User Feature when defining a machining pattern or an axial operation without any other mapping
consideration.
For more complex mapping rules, the Machining Process functionality is more suitable.
1. In the Part Design workbench, select Insert > User Feature > User Feature Creation.
The User Feature Definition dialog box appears.
The left part of the graph displays the features that are required to build the selected object.
To rename these features, just select a feature in the graph and enter a new name in the Name field. When the Inputs tab is
selected, the user feature inputs are indicated by red arrows in the geometry area.
2. In the Parameters tab, all available parameters are displayed along with their values. By default, the instantiation process of a
user feature forbids the modification of a parameter value. If you want to get round this, you can publish a parameter. That
means you must declare that the value of this parameter can be modified in a user feature instance.
To do so, select the parameter to be modified in a forthcoming instantiation and check the Published option.
You can rename a parameter. Just select it and enter its new name in the Name field. For the purpose of this scenario, declare the
Depth for NC and Diameter for NC parameters as published. Note that a published parameter is identified by a Yes in the
Published column.
The Type tab manages the User Feature type that will be accessible in the formula definition. In this example, it is UserFeature1.
Managing type is required in order to access all user feature attributes in the Machining Process definition.
Click OK to define the user feature.
3. Select a Machining workbench from the Start menu and select Machining Process View .
The Machining Process View dialog box appears.
4. Select Machining Process .
The dialog box is updated with a new machining process as shown.

5. Select Drilling .
The Operation Definition dialog box appears, if the Start Edit mode is selected in the Tools > Options > Machining > Operation
settings.
6. Just click OK to add a reference Drilling operation to the machining process.
The reference operation has an associated Tool Query.
You can associate Formulas or Checks to the operation and specify a Tool Query.
7. Right-click the Drilling operation in the Machining Process View and select Edit Formula.
The Formula Editor dialog box appears at the Numerical Expressions tab page.
A formula is an expression associated to an operation or a machining feature attribute, which will be converted to a F(x) formula
when the machining process is applied.
Define the Diameter and Depth attributes of the formula as shown:

8. In the Geometrical Expressions tab page, define the Drilling Point and Axis as shown below.
Fill in the two fields with:
● anchor point of the Drilling operation as "Entry Point for NC" user feature input parameter
● axis of the Drilling operation as "Entry Face for NC" user feature input parameter.
Click OK to assign the formula to the Drilling operation.

9. Double-click the Tool Query associated to the Drilling operation.
The Tool Query Definition dialog box appears.
Define a simple tool query as shown below.

10.
Select the tool repository ToolsSampleMP using the Look in combo.
Click OK to assign the tool query to the Drilling operation.

11. Select File > Save As to save the machining process in a CATProcess document called
UserFeatureMachProcess01.CATProcess, for example.
You can then apply this machining process following the general procedure described in Apply a Machining Process.
How to Use Properties of a Machining Operation

This document shows you how use the properties of a machining operation and how to get information on it.
Right-click the desired operation in the program, then select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
To get information about the duration of the operation:
In the General tab page, the Calculated cycle time is indicated in seconds:
Navigate on Belt of Edges
Navigate on Belt of Faces
Navigate on Edges Until an Edge
Navigate on Faces
Navigate on Faces Until a Face
Open Catalog
Opposite Hand Machining Options
Part Operation
Post-Processor Instruction
Preview the Contour
Process Table
Reamer
Reorder Operations List
Replace Tools
Replay Tool Path
Reset All Selections
Resource Context
Retrieve Faces of Same Color
Reverse Machining Conditions
Rotate to Align
Rules Manager
Screen Capture
Select Faces in a Polygon Trap
Select Normal Faces
Selection Sets
Snap
Spot Drill
Standard Drilling
Standard Multi-Axis Flank Contouring

Synchronize Process
Tap
Thread Mill
Tool Change
TRACUT Operator
T-Slotter
Update Transition Paths
Workpiece Automatic Mount
compensation
Compute Tool Path contextual command
Conical mill
Conical Mill command

contextual command
Activate
Activate (macro path)
Add User Representation
Closeup
Column Filter
Column Order
Compute Tool Path
Deactivate
Deactivate (macro path)
Delete
Delete (macro path)
Delete Generated Machine Rotations
Delete Generated Tool Changes
Delete Unused (machining features)
Delete Unused Resources
Display NC File
Edit NC Resources
This tool path will be displayed in the set color if Display tool path of operation in current Part Operation
is set in Tools > Options > Machining > Operation.
Double-clicking the colored tool path activates the dialog box of the corresponding machining operation.
Note: This color has no influence on the color of feedrates while replaying an operation.
Glossary
A
approach Motion defined for approaching the operation start point.
macro
APT Import This is an entity created in the Manufacturing Program by importing NC data (APT source,
activity Clfile or NC code). It references a tool path, like a machining operation, but it has no attribute
specification. The tool path comprises tool motions and/or Post-Processor words.
APT Tool This is a tool which is created from the CUTTER definition found in the APT source file or Clfile.
The CUTTER definition includes 7 parameters which are tool radius, corner radius, horizontal
and vertical distances from the center of the corner to the tool axis or bottom, bottom and
flank angles, and finally the tool height. This definition is quite poor to define a Version 5 tool.
An APT Tool is a resource which cannot be modified and used by Version 5 machining
operations.
auxiliary A control function such as tool change or machine table rotation. These commands may be
command interpreted by a specific post-processor.
axial Operation in which machining is done along a single axis and is mainly intended for hole
machining making (drilling, counter boring, and so on).
operation
B
back and forth Machining in which motion is done alternately in one direction then the other. Compare with
one way.
bottom plane A planar geometric element that represents the bottom surface of an area to machine. It is
normal to the tool axis.
C
check A list of Knowledgeware expressions that are used to constrain the validity of a machining
process or a machining operation.
In a single expression, operators such as and and or are available. In a list of expressions, an
and operator is applied between check expressions. When a machining process is applied, the
checks list is executed, a logical status is returned, and the operation is created if the status
is true.
clearance Motion that involves retracting to a safety plane, a linear trajectory in that plane and then
macro plunging from that plane.
climb milling Milling in which the advancing tool rotates down into the material. Chips of cut material tend
to be thrown behind the tool, which results to give good surface finish.
Compare with conventional milling.
conventional Milling in which the advancing tool rotates up into the material. Chips of cut material tend to
milling be carried around with the tool, which often impairs good surface finish. Compare with climb
milling.
D
DPM Digital Process for Manufacturing.
E
extension Defines the end type of a hole as being through hole or blind.
type
F
Facing A surfacing operation in which material is removed in one cut or several axial cuts of equal
operation depth according to a pre-defined machining strategy. Boundaries of the planar area to be
machined are soft.
Fault Types of faults in material removal simulation are gouge, undercut, and tool clash.
feedrate Rate at which a cutter advances into a work piece.

Measured in linear or angular units (mm/min or mm/rev, for example).
fixture Elements used to secure or support the workpiece on a machine.
formula A Knowlegeware expression containing feature attributes that is used to compute parameters
(mainly parameters of a machining operation).
G
generic A CATProduct machine representation that was created using the NC Machine Tool Builder
machine product.
gouge Area where the tool has removed too much material from the workpiece.
H
hard A geometric element (such as a boundary or a bottom face) that the tool cannot pass beyond.
I
inward helical Machining in which motion starts from a point inside the domain to machine and follows paths
parallel to the domain boundary towards the center of the domain. Compare with outward
helical.
L
linking motion Motion that involves retracting to a safety plane, a linear trajectory in that plane and then
plunging from that plane.
M
machine An auxiliary command in the program that corresponds to a rotation of the machine table.
rotation
machining Reference axis system in which coordinates of points of the tool path are given.
axis system
machining A feature instance representing a volume of material to be removed, a machining axis,

feature tolerances, and other technological attributes. These features may be hole type or milling
type.
machining Contains all the necessary information for machining a part of the workpiece using a single
operation tool.
machining An ordered list of machining operations, PP instructions and, possibly, machine rotations. It
process can be used in two ways:
● to generate a complete subprogram by defining all the operations from geometrical
information which will be solved when the machining process is instantiated into another
CATProcess file.
● to generate a subprogram by defining all the operations without any geometrical
information (design or manufacturing geometrical features): this way is dedicated to the
settings mode.
machining The maximum allowed difference between the theoretical and computed tool path.
tolerance
manufacturing Defines the sequence of part operations necessary for the complete manufacture of a part.
process
manufacturing Describes the processing order of the NC entities that are taken into account for tool path
program computation: machining operations, auxiliary commands and PP instructions.
manufacturing Allows various views of the part operation:

view
● sorted by features
● sorted by operations
● sorted by patterns
● sorted by tooling (that is, tools or tool assemblies)
● sorted by machinable features.
milling Operation in which 2.5 to 5-axis capabilities are used for part machining (roughing, pocketing,
operation surface machining, contouring, and so on).
multi-level Milling operation (such as Pocketing or Profile Contouring) that is done in a series of axial
operation cuts.
N
NC Setup The assembly in the process that contains the design part and all other parts (such as
Assembly fixtures, stock, and In Process Model) that are necessary to perform the process. All the
components of the NC Setup Assembly are positioned.
O
offset Specifies a virtual displacement of a reference geometric element in an operation (such as the
offset on the bottom plane of a pocket, for example).
An offset value can be greater than, less than, or equal to zero. It is measured normal to
the referenced geometry or in a specific direction such as axial or radial.
For example, a 5mm Offset on Contour means that a virtual displacement is applied normal to
the contour geometry. A 5mm Axial Part Offset means that a virtual displacement is applied
to the part geometry along the tool axis direction.
Compare with thickness.
one way Machining in which motion is always done in the same direction. Compare with zig zag or back
and forth.
outward Machining in which motion starts from a point inside the domain to machine and follows paths
helical parallel to the domain boundary away from the center of the domain. Compare with inward
helical.
P
part operation Links all the operations necessary for machining a part based on a unique part registration on
a machine. The part operation links these operations with the associated fixture and set-up
entities.
pocket An area to be machined that is defined by an open or closed boundary and a bottom plane.
The pocket definition may also include a top plane and one or more islands.
Pocketing A machining operation in which material is removed from a pocket in one cut or several axial
operation cuts of equal depth according to a pre-defined machining strategy.
Point to Point A milling operation in which the tool moves in straight line segments between user-defined
operation points.
PP instruction Instructions that control certain functions that are auxiliary to the tool-part relationship. They
may be interpreted by a specific post processor.
PPR Process Product Resources.
Process A CATProcess that is 'cleaned' from all linked files and all unnecessary information (except
Template machining operations). For example, all links to external tool paths, IPM bodies or
CATDrawings associated to the previous design are removed. This allows reusing a
CATProcess structure to program the machining of a new design by keeping the sequence of
operations and the parameter values that were used in the previous program.
Profile A milling operation in which the tool follows a guide curve and possibly other guide elements
Contouring while respecting user-defined geometric limitations and machining strategy parameters.
operation
R
retract macro Motion defined for retracting from the operation end point
return macro Motion for linking between paths or between levels. It involves retracting to a safety plane, a
linear trajectory in that plane and then plunging from that plane.
S
safety plane A plane normal to the tool axis in which the tool tip can move or remain a clearance distance
away from the workpiece, fixture or machine.
set up Describes how the part, stock and fixture are positioned on the machine.
soft A geometric element (such as a boundary or a bottom face) that the tool can pass beyond.
spindle speed The angular speed of the machine spindle.

Measured in linear or angular units (m/min or rev/min, for example).
stock Workpiece prior to machining by the operations of a part operation.
T
thickness Specifies a thickness of material to be removed by machining. A thickness value must be
greater than zero and is measured normal to the machined geometry. For example, if a
5mm Finish Thickness is specified on an operation then 5mm of material will be removed
during the finish pass.
Compare with offset.
top plane A planar geometric element that represents the top surface of an area to machine. It is
always normal to the associated tool's rotational axis.
tool axis Center line of the cutter.
tool change An auxiliary command in the program that corresponds to a change of tool.
tool clash Area where the tool collided with the workpiece during a rapid move.
tool path The path that the center of the tool tip follows during a machining operation.
tooling query One or more Knowledgeware expressions that define criteria to find an appropriate tool for a
given machining operation.
total depth The total depth including breakthrough distance that is machined in a hole making operation.
U
undercut Area where the tool has left material behind on the workpiece.
W
WPC file This is the file format for data resulting from a material removal session. A typical ascii WPC
file contains the number of faces/edges available in the solid and all the vertex information
forming each of the triangles in the solid.
Z
zig zag Machining in which motion is done alternately in one direction then the other. Compare with
one way.
Index
A
Accept Geometry Selections command
Activate (macro path) contextual command
Activate contextual command
Add User Representation contextual command
Align Center command
Align Side command
Analyze command
approach macro
APT format
APT source generation in batch mode
Associate Video Result to Machining Operation icon command
Associativity
Attach command
Auto Sequence command
Auto-sequence operations
auxiliary command
Auxiliary operation
COPY Operator
Copy Transformation
Machine Rotation
PP Instruction
Tool Change
TRACUT Operator
axial machining operation
Axial Process for Design Holes command

B
Batch queue management
Boring and chamfering tool
Boring and Chamfering Tool command
Boring bar
Boring Bar command
C
Cancel Geometry Selections command
CATProduct generation
Center drill
Center Drill command
Check Reachability command
checks in machining process
clearance macro
Clfile format
Clfile generation
climb milling
Close Contour with Line command
Closeup contextual command
Column Filter contextual command
Column Order contextual command

command
Accept Geometry Selections
Align Center
Align Side
Attach
Auto Sequence
Axial Process for Design Holes

Boring and Chamfering Tool
Boring Bar
Cancel Geometry Selections
Center Drill
Check Reachability
Close Contour with Line
Conical Mill
COPY Operator
Copy Transformation Instruction
Counterbore Mill
Countersink
Display Status of Selected Activities
Distribute
Drill
End Mill
Face Mill
Generate Documentation
Generate NC Code in Batch Mode
Generate NC Code Interactively
Import/List Tools
Insert Lines on Gaps
Inverse Macros
Isolate Process Data
Machine Rotation
Machining Axis System
Machining Instruction
Machining Pattern
Machining Processes Application
Manufacturing View
Navigate on Belt of Edges
Navigate on Belt of Faces
Navigate on Edges Until an Edge
Navigate on Faces
Navigate on Faces Until a Face
Open Catalog
Part Operation
Post-Processor Instruction
Preview the Contour
Process Table
Reamer
Replace Tools
Replay Tool Path
Reset All Selections
Resource Context
Retrieve Faces of Same Color
Rotate to Align
Rules Manager
Screen Capture
Select Faces in a Polygon Trap
Select Normal Faces
Selection Sets
Snap
Spot Drill
Standard Drilling
Standard Multi-Axis Flank Contouring

Synchronize Process
Tap
Thread Mill
Tool Change
TRACUT Operator
T-Slotter
Update Transition Paths
Workpiece Automatic Mount
compensation
Compute Tool Path contextual command
Conical mill
Conical Mill command

contextual command
Activate
Activate (macro path)
Add User Representation
Closeup
Column Filter
Column Order
Compute Tool Path
Deactivate
Deactivate (macro path)
Delete
Delete (macro path)
Delete Generated Machine Rotations
Delete Generated Tool Changes
Delete Unused (machining features)
Delete Unused Resources
Display NC File
Edit NC Resources
Expand Tree to Machining operations
Expand Tree to Tool changes
Expand Tree to Tool paths
Feedrate (macro path)
Generate Machine Rotations
Generate NC Code Interactively
Generate Tool Changes
Hide Children
Import APT, Clfile or NC Code File
Insert (macro path)
Lock Children
Machine Instruction
Pack Tool Path
Parameter (macro path)
Remove Tool Path
Remove Video Result
Rename Current View
Replace Tool
Replay Tool Path
Save in Catalog
Select by String
Selected Objects
Send to Catalog
Show Children
Simulate Machine using NC Code
Simulate Machine using Tool Path
Sort by Features
Sort by Machining Features
Sort by Operations
Sort by Patterns
Sort by Tooling
Start Video Simulation

Start Video Simulation using NC Code
Start Video Simulation using Tool Path
Unlock Children
Unpack Tool Path
conventional milling
COPY Operator command
Copy Transformation Instruction command
Copy/Paste of Manufacturing Data
Counterbore mill
Counterbore Mill command
Countersink
Countersink command
cutting conditions
cutting speed, cutting condition
D
Deactivate (macro path) contextual command
Deactivate contextual command
Delete (macro path) contextual command
Delete contextual command
Delete Generated Machine Rotations contextual command
Delete Generated Tool Changes contextual command
Delete Unused (machining features) contextual command
Delete Unused Indices contextual command
Delete Unused Resources contextual command
depth of cut, cutting condition
Design Changes
dialog box for Tool Path Replay
Diamond insert
Display NC File contextual command
Display Status of Selected Activities command
Distribute command
Document Management
Documentation generation
Drill
Drill command
E
Edit NC Resources contextual command
End mill
End Mill command
Expand Tree to Machining operations contextual command
Expand Tree to Tool changes contextual command
Expand Tree to Tool paths contextual command
External groove insert holder
External insert holder
External thread insert holder
F
Face mill
Face Mill command
Fault
Feature based programming
Feedrate (macro path) contextual command
feedrate/tooth, cutting condition
formula in machining process
Frontal groove insert holder
Full Video icon command

G
Generate Documentation command
Generate Machine Rotations contextual command
Generate NC Code in Batch Mode command
Generate NC Code Interactively command
Generate NC Code Interactively contextual command
Generate Tool Changes contextual command
Generate Transition Paths command
generic machine
Geometry Analyzer dialog box
gouge
Groove insert
H
hard geometric element
Hide Children contextual command
I
icon command
Associate Video Result to Machining Operation
Full Video
Mixed Photo/Video
Save Video Result in a CATProduct
Video Collision Report
Video from Last Saved Result
Import APT, Clfile or NC Code File contextual command
Import/List Tools command

Insert
Diamond
Groove
Round
Square
Thread
Triangular
Trigon
Insert (macro path) contextual command

Insert holder
External
External groove
External thread
Frontal groove
Internal
Internal groove
Internal thread
Insert Lines on Gaps command
Internal groove insert holder
Internal insert holder
Internal thread Insert holder
Inverse Macros
Isolate Process Data command
L
Lock Children contextual command
M
Machine Editor dialog box
Machine Instruction command
Machine Instruction contextual command
machine rotation
Machine Rotation command
Machining Axis Change command
machining axis system
Machining Axis System command
machining feature
machining feedrate (Vf)
machining operation
machining pattern
Machining Pattern command
machining process
Machining Process command
Machining Process View command
Machining Process, Apply
Machining Process, Apply Automatically
Machining Process, Create
Machining Process, Knowledgeware
Machining Process, Methodology
Machining Process, Organize
Machining Processes Application command
machining tolerance
manufacturing process
manufacturing program
Manufacturing Program command
manufacturing view
Manufacturing View command
Manufacturing View, with formula
Manufacturing View, with parameters
Manufacturing View, with relations
Mapping Rule File

Photo mode
Video mode
MFG_AA_FINISH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_AA_ROUGH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_ANGLE2 attribute
MfgMultiDiamDrillTool
MfgTwoSidesChamferingTool
MFG_AR_FINISH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_AR_ROUGH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_ASS_GAGE_1 attribute
MfgMillAndDrillToolAssembly
MFG_ASS_GAGE_2 attribute
MFG_AXIAL_RADIAL_MOVE attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg3AxisWithTableRotationMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MfgHorizontalLatheMachine
MfgVerticalLatheMachine
MFG_BALL_TYPE attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_BAR_CUT_RAD attribute
MfgInternalTool
MFG_BAR_LENGTH_1 attribute
MfgInternalTool
MFG_BAR_LENGTH_2 attribute
MfgInternalTool
MFG_BODY_DIAM attribute
MfgBoringAndChamferingTool
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCounterboreMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgInternalTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_BORE_ABILITY attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_BOTTOM_ANGLE attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM1 attribute
MFG_CHAMFR_DIAM2 attribute
MFG_CLEAR_ANGLE attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgExternalTool
MfgGrooveExternalTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgInternalTool
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_COMMENT attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgExternalTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgInternalTool
MfgLatheToolAssembly
MfgReamerTool
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgSquareInsert
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadInsert
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_COMPOSITION attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_COOLNT_SNTX attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgExternalTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgInternalTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_CORNER_RAD attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_CORNER_RAD_2 attribute
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_CUT_ANGLE attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MFG_CUT_LENGTH attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgReamerTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_DESC_CODE attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_DIAMETER_1 attribute
MFG_ENTRY_DIAM attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgTapTool
MFG_FLANK_ANG_1 attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_FLANK_ANG_2 attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_GAUGING_ANG attribute
MFG_GROOVE_TYPE attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_HAND_ANGLE attribute
MFG_HAND_STYLE attribute
MfgExternalTool
MfgInternalTool
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_HOLDER_CAPAB attribute
MfgExternalTool
MFG_INIT_ROT_POS attribute
MFG_INSCRIB_DIAM attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_INSERT_ANGLE attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgExternalTool
MfgInternalTool
MFG_INSERT_HEIGH attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_INSERT_LGTH attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgExternalTool
MfgInternalTool
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_INSERT_MAT attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_INSERT_THICK attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_INSERT_WIDTH attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_INT_CIRC_2D attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_INT_CIRC_3D attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_INT_LIN_3D attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_KAPPA_R attribute
MfgExternalTool
MfgInternalTool
MFG_LATHE_RAD_AX attribute
MFG_LATHE_SPN_AX attribute
MFG_LEADING_ANG attribute
MfgExternalTool
MfgInternalTool
MFG_LENGTH attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_LENGTH_1 attribute
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_LENGTH_2 attribute
MFG_LIFE_TIME attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_MACH_QUALITY attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_MACH_TYPE attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_MAX_BOR_DPTH attribute
MfgInternalTool
MFG_MAX_CUT_DIAM attribute
MFG_MAX_CUT_DPTH attribute
MFG_MAX_CUT_WDTH attribute
MFG_MAX_DIAMETER attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_MAX_FEEDRATE attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_MAX_MIL_LENGTH attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgExternalTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgInternalTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_MAX_MIL_TIME attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgExternalTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgInternalTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_MAX_PLNG_ANG attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MFG_MAX_REC_DPTH attribute
MfgExternalTool
MfgInternalTool
MFG_MIN_ANGLE attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_MIN_DIAM attribute
MfgInternalTool
MFG_MIN_DIAMETER attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_MIN_DISC attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_NAME attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgExternalTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgInternalTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgSquareInsert
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadInsert
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_NB_OF_COMP attribute
MFG_NB_OF_FLUTES attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_NB_OF_STAGES attribute
MFG_NOMINAL_DIAM attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_NON_CUT_DIAM attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_NOSE_RAD_1 attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_NOSE_RAD_2 attribute
MfgGrooveInsert
MFG_NOSE_RADIUS attribute
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MFG_NURBS_OUTPUT attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_ORIENT_ANGLE attribute
MFG_OUTP_PREF_1 attribute
MFG_OUTPUT_FRMT attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_OUTPUT_TYPE attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_OUTSIDE_DIAM attribute
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_OVERALL_LGTH attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_PITCH_NUMBER attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_PITCH_OF_THREAD attribute
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadInsert
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_PP attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_PP_WORD_TBL attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_R_MAX_CIRC attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_R_MIN_CIRC attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_RAPID_FEED attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
MFG_ROT_DIR attribute
MFG_ROT_TYP attribute
MFG_ROTABL_OUTPUT attribute
MFG_ROTARY_ANGLE attribute
MFG_ROTARY_AXIS attribute
MFG_SHANK_HEIGHT attribute
MfgExternalTool
MFG_SHANK_WIDTH attribute
MfgExternalTool
MFG_SHK_CUT_WDTH attribute
MfgExternalTool
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_1 attribute
MfgExternalTool
MFG_SHK_LENGTH_2 attribute
MfgExternalTool
MFG_STRT_PT_SYNT attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_SZ attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_SZ_FINISH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_SZ_ROUGH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_TAPER_ANGLE attribute
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_THD_CLS_DESC attribute
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_THD_FRM_DESC attribute
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_THREAD_ANGLE attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_THREAD_CLASS attribute
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_THREAD_DEF attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_THREAD_FORM attribute
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_THREAD_PROF attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_TIP_ANGLE attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_TIP_LENGTH attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_TIP_RADIUS attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_TL_RAKE_ANG attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_TL_SET_LGTH attribute
MFG_TL_SET_X attribute
MFG_TL_SET_Y attribute
MFG_TL_SET_Z attribute
MFG_TL_SETUP_ANG attribute
MFG_TL_TIP_LGTH attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgTapTool
MFG_TOOL_ANGLE attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MFG_TOOL_ASS_POWER attribute
MFG_TOOL_CORE_DIAMETER attribute
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MFG_TOOL_INVERT attribute
MFG_TOOL_NUMBER attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_TOOTH_DES attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_TOOTH_DESC attribute
MfgEndMillTool
MFG_TOOTH_H attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_TOOTH_MAT attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_TOOTH_MATDES attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_TOOTH_MATDESC attribute
MfgEndMillTool
MFG_TOOTH_X attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_TOOTH_Z attribute
MfgThreadInsert
MFG_TRAILING_ANG attribute
MfgExternalTool
MfgInternalTool
MFG_TRAV_PITCH attribute
MFG_TRAVERSE_NB attribute
MFG_VC attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MFG_VC_FINISH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_VC_ROUGH attribute
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSquareInsert
MfgThreadInsert
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_WAY_OF_ROT attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_WEIGHT_SNTX attribute
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgExternalTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgInternalTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTSlotterTool
MFG_X_HOME_POS attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_X_INIT_SPNDL attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_X_ROT_CENTER attribute
MFG_Y_HOME_POS attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_Y_INIT_SPNDL attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_Y_ROT_CENTER attribute
MFG_Z_HOME_POS attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_Z_INIT_SPNDL attribute
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MFG_Z_ROT_CENTER attribute
MfgBatch utility
MfgResourcePackage
Mfg3AxisMachine
Mfg5AxisMachine
MfgBoringBarTool
MfgCenterDrillTool
MfgConicalMillTool
MfgCountersinkTool
MfgDiamondInsert
MfgDrillTool
MfgEndMillTool
MfgExternalTool
MfgFaceMillTool
MfgGrooveInsert
MfgInternalTool
MfgReamerTool
MfgRoundInsert
MfgSpotDrillTool
MfgSquareInsert
MfgTapTool
MfgThreadInsert
MfgThreadMillTool
MfgTriangularInsert
MfgTrigonInsert
MfgTSlotterTool
milling operation
Mixed Photo/Video icon command
Multi-diameter drill
Multi-Diameter Drill command
N
Navigate on Belt of Edges command
Navigate on Belt of Faces command
Navigate on Edges Until an Edge command
Navigate on Faces command
Navigate on Faces Until a Face command
NC Code Based Simulation
NC code generation
NC command
NC_AXIAL_MO_START_COMMENT
NC_CHANGE_REF_PT
NC_COMMENT
NC_COMPENSATION
NC_CUTCOM_LEFT
NC_CUTCOM_NORMDS_OFF
NC_CUTCOM_NORMDS_ON
NC_CUTCOM_NORMPS_OFF
NC_CUTCOM_NORMPS_ON
NC_CUTCOM_OFF
NC_CUTCOM_ON
NC_CUTCOM_RIGHT
NC_DELAY
NC_FEEDRATE
NC_LATHE_MO_START_COMMENT
NC_MACHINING_AXIS
NC_MILL_MO_START_COMMENT
NC_MULTAX_OFF
NC_MULTAX_ON
NC_PITCH
NC_SPINDLE
NC_SPINDLE_LATHE
NC_SPINDLE_LOCK
NC_SPINDLE_OFF
NC_SPINDLE_ON
NC_SPINDLE_START
NC_SPINDLE_STOP
NC_THREAD_TURN
NC_THREAD_TURN_OFF
NC data generation in interactive mode
NC Gantt Chart command

NC instruction, auxiliary command type
NC_ACTIVITY_HEADER
NC_END_MACRO
NC_HEAD_ROTATION
NC_ORIGIN
NC_PROGRAM_HEADER
NC_START_MACRO
NC_TABLE_ROTATION
NC_TOOL_CHANGE
NC_TOOL_CHANGE_LATHE
NC instruction, axial machining type
NC_BACK_BORING
NC_BORING
NC_BORING_AND_CHAMFERING
NC_BORING_SPINDLE_STOP
NC_BREAK_CHIPS
NC_CIRCULAR_MILLING
NC_COUNTERBORING
NC_COUNTERSINKING
NC_DEEPHOLE
NC_DRILLING
NC_DRILLING_DWELL_DELAY
NC_LATHE_THREADING
NC_REAMING
NC_REVERSE_THREADING
NC_SPOT_DRILLING
NC_T_SLOTTING
NC_TAPPING
NC_THREAD_MILLING
NC_THREAD_WITHOUT_TAP_HEAD
NC_TWO_SIDES_CHAMFERING
O
Open Catalog command
Origin
P
Pack Tool Path contextual command
Parameter (macro path) contextual command
part operation
Part Operation command
pattern of holes
Photo material removal simulation
Post-Processor Instruction command
PP instruction
PP word table
PPR
Preview the Contour command
Process Engineer Support
Process List
Process Table command
Product List
Properties of Machining Operations
R
Reamer
Reamer command
Remove Tool Path contextual command
Remove Transition Paths command
Remove Video Result contextual command
Rename Current View contextual command
Replace Tool contextual command
Replace Tools command
Replay Tool Path command
Replay Tool Path contextual command
Reset All Selections command
Resource Context command
Resources List
retract macro
Retrieve Faces of Same Color command
return macro
return macro type
between levels
on same level
to finish pass
Rotate to Align command
Round insert
Rules Manager command
S
Save in Catalog contextual command
Save Video Result in a CATProduct icon command
Screen Capture command
Select by String contextual command
Select Faces in a Polygon Trap command
Select Normal Faces command
Selected Objects contextual command
Selection Sets command
Send to Catalog contextual command
Set Up Documents
Show Children contextual command
Simulate Machine using NC Code contextual command
Simulate Machine using Tool Path contextual command
SmarTeam support
Snap command
soft geometric element
Sort by Features contextual command
Sort by Machining Features contextual command
Sort by Operations contextual command
Sort by Patterns contextual command
Sort by Tooling contextual command

spindle speed (N)
Spot drill
Spot Drill command
Square insert
Standard Drilling command
Standard Multi-Axis Flank Contouring command
Start Video Simulation contextual command
Start Video Simulation using NC Code contextual command
Start Video Simulation using Tool Path contextual command
Starts Machine Simulation command
Starts Machine Simulation contextual command
Synchronize Process command
T
Tap
Tap command
TDM
Thread insert
Thread mill
Thread Mill command

Tool
Boring and chamfering tool
Boring bar
Center drill
Conical mill
Counterbore mill
Countersink
Drill
End mill
Face mill
Multi-diameter drill
Reamer
Spot drill
Tap
Thread mill
T-slotter
Two sides chamfering tool

tool assembly in operation
edit or select another

Tool Assembly in Resource List
add
edit
Tool Axis
Tool Catalog from Resource List
tool change
Tool Change command
tool clash
tool in operation
edit or select another

tool in resource list
edit
tool path
tooling query in machining process
Tools catalog
Tools Options - Machining
General
Operation
Output
Photo/Video
Program
Resources
TRACUT Operator command
TRACUT/NOMORE
Transition paths
Triangular insert
Trigon insert
T-slotter
T-Slotter command
Two sides chamfering tool
Two Sides Chamfering Tool command
U
undercut
Unlock Children contextual command
Unpack Tool Path contextual command
Update Transition Paths command
User Feature
User parameters, in APT source
User parameters, in PP instruction

utility
MfgBatch
V
Video Collision Report icon command
Video from Last Saved Result icon command
Video material removal simulation
W
Workpiece Automatic Mount command
WPC file

NC Manufacturing Infrastructure

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

NC Manufacturing Infrastructure

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

NC Manufacturing Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1

DELMIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

ENOVIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

SMARTEAM® is a registered trademark of SmarTeam Corporation Ltd.

Raster Imaging Technology copyrighted by Snowbound Software Corporation 1993-2001

Copyright © 2005, Dassault Systèmes. All rights reserved.

This overview provides the following information:

● NC Manufacturing Infrastructure in a Nutshell

● Before Reading this Guide

● Getting the Most Out of this Guide

● Accessing Sample Documents

● Conventions Used in this Guide.

NC Manufacturing Infrastructure in a Nutshell

NC Manufacturing Infrastructure offers the following main functions:

Before Reading this Guide

Getting the Most Out of this Guide

Accessing Sample Documents

● Graphic conventions structuring the tasks

● Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required

● Graphic conventions used in the table of contents

Graphic Conventions Structuring the Tasks

Graphic conventions structuring the tasks are denoted as follows:

This icon... Identifies...

estimated time to accomplish a task

the start of the scenario

information regarding settings, customization, etc.

the end of a task

functionalities that are new or enhanced with this release

allows you to switch back to the full-window viewing mode

Graphic Conventions Indicating the Configuration Required

Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required are denoted as follows:

This icon... Indicates functions that are...

specific to the P1 configuration

specific to the P2 configuration

specific to the P3 configuration

Graphic Conventions Used in the Table of Contents

Graphic conventions used in the table of contents are denoted as follows:

This icon... Gives access to...

Split View Mode

User Tasks or Advanced Tasks

Frequently Asked Questions

How to Use the Mouse

● Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...)

3. Select Manufacturing Program.1 in the tree to make it the current entity.

Please note the following points:

The CATProcess references one or more CATPart and/or CATProduct documents.

You can have links between a CATProcess document and:

Set Up and Part Positioning

The Part Operation dialog box appears.

4. Click OK in the Part Operation dialog box.

● preview the geometry specified by means of the current tab page

Part Operations and Manufacturing Programs

Part Operations and Manufacturing Programs

Create a Process Template

1. Select Part Operation .

Name and Comment

3. Click Machine to assign a machine tool to the part operation.

Reference Machining Axis System

This is similar to the procedure described in Insert a Machining Axis Change.

5. Click Product or Part to associate an existing product (CATProduct) or part (CATPart) to

Note: In a Manufacturing Hub context, Product Instance Selection replaces Product

or Part in the Part Operation editor.

The generation of transition paths in the program takes into account: